Standard Safety Practices Manual PDF

Standard Safety
Practices Manual
BP Canada Energy Company
December, 2007
version 1.1
This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy
To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer

to the gHSSEr Website -
http://gasiso14001.bpweb.bp.com/index.asp
Document Owners: gHSSEr Forum
C-7037 XGS
Standard Safety Practices Manual
Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.
Standard Safety
Practices Manual
BP Canada Energy Company
December, 2007
version 1.1
This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy
To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer

to the gHSSEr Website -
Document Owners: gHSSEr Forum
C-7037 XGS
i
BP CANADA GAS PERFORMANCE UNIT

SAFETY PRACTICES MANUAL
Accident prevention and efficient operations go hand in
hand; therefore, incorporating safe work practices in our
day-to-day operation is essential to minimize accidents,
injuries and job interruptions.
This manual provides safe guidelines for all employees to
use in addressing the potential risks associated with each
task when developing safe work methods. Guidelines
specified are in accordance with governing regulations,
standards, BP Canada requirements, and recommended
good working practices. It will be necessary to incorporate
these practices into the specific situations that will arise in
each operation.
The manual covers many, but by no means all, of the jobs
and situations encountered in our operations. Should
situations arise which are not adequately covered in the
manual, please bring it to the attention of your immediate
supervisor.
The definition of a BP representative in this manual is taken
to include employees, contractors, consultants, and service
representatives who have the authority and are duly quali-
fied to direct work on a the behalf of BP. A BP designate is
an individual who has authority to direct a defined scope of
work specified by the BP Representative. Safety is everyones
responsibility.
WORKSITES
The following must be available at all BP Canada worksites:

Standard Environmental Practices Manual
Local Emergency Response Plan
Material Safety Data Sheets
Site-Specific Procedures
2
iiii
DEVIATIONS
The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used as a
living and working document, and as such must include
provisions to handle warranted deviations. The Manual
contains practices in accordance with governing regulations,
standards, BP Canada Gas Performance Unit requirements
and recommended or good working practices. Government
Regulations and BP Canada Gas Performance Unit require-
ments are distinguishable throughout the document by the
use of the words Shall, Will and Must, etc. Recommended
or good working practices are recognized by the use of the
words Should, May and Could, etc.
The following outlines how to handle deviations in our
day-to-day operations to ensure the safe work methods are
practiced.
DEVIATIONS FROM:
A. Recommended or Good Working Practices
(Should, May, Could)
Authorized by Local Management (i.e. minimum,
employee-in-charge + supervisor)
B. Government Regulations or BP Canada
Requirements
(Shall, Will, Must)
uthorized by Safety Department (Performance
A
Unit) and the applicable Government Agencies.
Frequent deviations in either case should be submitted to
the gHSSEr Forum for review and adoption if warranted.
Procedures for submitting a suggested revision are outlined
in the subsequent pages.
Note: When government regulations call for additional re-
quirements in excess of BP Canada SSPM, the government
regulation will be followed.
i3ii
iii
REVISION PROCEDURE
To suggest a Revision
The Standard Safety Practices Manual is intended to be a
living document, and suggestions for revisions by operat-
ing personnel will be welcomed. To initiate a revision,
please follow these procedures:
1. orward request to the HSSE Advisor responsible for
F
your Department/Area.
2. SSE Advisor to forward to gHSSEr Forum as war-
H
ranted.
The gHSSEr Forum will convene periodically to review all
suggested revisions.
i4v
iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Standards and Safe Work Practices Index
Golden Rules of safety
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE 1

ENERGY ISOLATION PRACTICE
(Lock Out - Tag Out) 16
GROUND DISTURBANCE PRACTICE 37
LIFTING AND RIGGING PRACTICE 43
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PRACTICE 64
PERMIT TO WORK AND HAZARD
ASSESSMENT PRACTICE 87
VEHICLE STANDARD AND ROAD
SAFETY PRACTICE 112
WORKING AT HEIGHTS PRACTICE 136
Safe Work Standards/Practices
ASBESTOS 147
ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING 147
CANADIAN NUCLEAR SAFETY COMMISSION
(CNSC) REGULATED ISOTOPES 151
DRAINING AND DEPRESSURING 153
ELECTRICAL 154
ELECTRICAL STORMS 161
EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS,
TEMPORARY BY-PASS 162
EYEWASH STATIONS & DELUGE SHOWERS 163
FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 167
FIRE RESISTANT WORKWEAR PRACTICE 170
FIRST AID EQUIPMENT AND MEDIC 182
GAS AND LIQUID SAMPLING 183
GUARDS 184
HAND PROTECTION PRACTICE 185
5
v
GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS 191

HOUSEKEEPING 193
HOT AND ODD BOLTING PRACTICE 195
HYDRATES, IDENTIFICATION
AND REMOVAL 211
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) SAFETY 213
INCIDENT/ACCIDENT REPORTING 216
LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING PORTABLE 217
LADDERS, STAIRS AND PLATFORMS - FIXED 220
LINE THAWING PRACTICE 225
MANUAL LIFTING AND HANDLING
HEAVY OR AWKWARD LOADS 229
METER PROVING 232
MOBILE STEAMERS 234
MOVING HEAVY EQUIPMENT
ON BP WORKSITES 236
NOISE EXPOSURE & HEARING
CONSERVATION 239
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 242
JEWERLY 245
PIGGING OF PIPELINES AND FLOWLINES 248
POSITIVE AIR SHUT-OFF
REQUIREMENTS (PASO) 249
PRACTICE FOR WORKING IN
A COMBUSTIBLE GAS ENVIRONMENT 251
PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES 262
PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING 264
PURGING 267
RADIOACTIVE OR NATURALLY OCCURRING
RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM) 269
RAIL CAR LOADING 273
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 275
HSSE MEETINGS 280
vi
6
SAFETY STANDBY 283

SAND BLASTING / ABRASIVE BLASTING 286
SECURITY 288
SERVICE RIG SAFETY 291
SIGNS AND BARRICADES 297
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATING PROCEDURE 298
STRESS RELIEVING 306
SWABBING 307
TANK GAUGING 310
TANK TRUCK LOADING /UNLOADING 311
TOOLS 315
TRAINING 316
WELDING PRACTICES GENERAL 319
WELL SERVICING WORK PLAN 324
WELL TESTING 327
WIRELINE OPERATIONS 331
WELL WORK - HAND OVER BETWEEN
OPERATIONS AND WELLS TEAMS 333
WORKING ALONE PRACTICE 334
vii
REFERENCES
lberta Occupational Health and Safety Act and

A
Regulations http://employment.alberta.ca/cps/rde/
xchg/hre/hs.xsl/307.html
ritish Columbia Occupational Health and Safety

B
Regulations http://www2.worksafebc.com/Publica-
tions/OHSRegulation/Search.asp
odes of Practice http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

C
bp.com/index.asp
ntario Occupational Health and Safety Act and

O
Regulations http://www.e-laws.gov.on.ca
Golden Rules of Safety/Practices (gHSSEr Docu

ments) http://gasiso14001.bpweb.bp.com/index.asp
I nternal and External HSSE Links http://canadahsse.

bpweb.bp.com/home/links.html
egal and Other Matrix http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

L
bp.com/EMS/Legal%20Requirements/
rocess Safety Management http://psmcanada.

P
bpweb.bp.com
viii
Confined Space Entry

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE
1.0 Scope and Applicability
1.1 This practice applies to BP Canada Gas
Performance Unit (CGPU) employees,
contracted employees, contractors, and other
visiting personnel doing work on CGPU
premises and sites.
1.2 This practice provides guidelines for the
development of site specific procedures to
prevent injury to personnel by ensuring that
an assessment of all known hazards, pre-job
planning, and communications are done prior
to and during work in confined spaces.
1.3 e purpose of this practice is to ensure that
Th
all reasonable precautions will be taken to
protect the safety of personnel who are or may
be required to work in confined spaces.
2.0 Scope of Definitions
2.1 Confined Space:

A confined space means an enclosed or partially enclosed
space that is not primarily designed or intended for human
occupancy, except for the purposes of performing work,
having restricted access or egress and which, due to its
design, construction, location, atmosphere, the materials
or substances in it, or other conditions, is or may become
hazardous to a worker entering it, or does not have an easy
means of escape for, or rescue of, a worker entering it.
Examples:
2.1.1 Tanks, vessels, towers, heaters, silos, aerial

coolers, bins, hoppers, tank cars, ventilation
or exhaust ducts, sewers, underground utility
tunnels or pipes, scale pits, sumps, vessel
skirts, mud pits and cement and chemical
storage tanks.
1
2.1.2 An excavation is considered a confined space

under certain circumstances, for example if
there is limited access or egress or the quality
of the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed.
2.1.3 A
diked area could be considered a confined
space if it is more than 1.5m deep and the
atmosphere cannot be guaranteed.
2.1.4 T
ower or vessel skirts, under trailers with
skirts, false ceilings, because of restricted ac-
cess and egress must be considered as confined
space.
2.1.5 Others, such as pipe racks, utility doors,

compressor fan housings and hoardings.
2

DETERMINATION OF CONFINED SPACE
START
Is the space Is access/egress so
Does the space
enclosed enough to restricted that NOT A
now have or has it NO NO exit or CONFINED
NO
previously had contain a emergency
contents that could hazardous rescue requires SPACE
atmosphere or extra manpower or
be harmful?
other physical equipment?
h d?
YES YES YES
THIS IS A CONFINED SPACE
Class 1 No Hazard Class 1I Potential Hazard Class III Hazard Exists
A Confined Space in A Confined Space in which A Confined Space in

which there does not there has existed or was likely which there now exists
exist and is not likely to to exist: or is likely to exist:
exist: x A hazardous gas, vapour, x A hazardous gas,
x A hazardous gas, dust or fumes vapour, dust or
vapour, dust or fumes x An oxygen content less fumes
x An oxygen content than 19.5 % or more than x An oxygen content
less than 19.5 % or 23% and, which has been less than 19.5 % or
more than 23% by purged, ventilated and more than 23% and
volume. steps taken to provide and which cannot be
maintain a safe ventilated to
Class 1 No Hazard Class 1I Potential Hazard Class III Hazard Exists
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS ENTRY REQUIREMENTS ENTRY REQUIMENTS

x Communication with x Confined Space Permit x ALL
back-up x Lockout/Tagout REQUIREMENTS
x Atmospheric Testing Procedure followed LISTED IN
(if applicable) x Isolation Procedure CLASS II PLUS
x All PPE identified followed THE
and worn x Continuous Atmospheric FOLLOWING:
x Rescue plan in place Testing mandatory x Breathing
x Rescue Equipment x Confined space purged & Apparatus
readily available ventilated mandatory for all
x Rescue Plan in Place personnel entering
Rescue Equipment set up,
2.2 ntry into a confined space is deemed to have

E
occurred as soon as the plane of the entry point has
been broken by a part of the body.
2.3 ll BP Canada Gas Performance Unit CGPU sites
A
must:
Identify and document all confined spaces
L
abel all entry points. Class 1 Confined Spaces
labeled Confined Space, Class 2 & 3 Confined
Spaces labeled Confined Space Permit Re-
quired
I dentify and control all hazards prior to entry
utilizing site specific procedures
3
3.0 Scope of Responsibility
3.1 ach worker is responsible to recognize the hazards

E
of a confined space and take corrective measures to
work within those areas ensuring that site specific
procedures and this practice are followed.
3.2 e on-site BP representative in charge or designate

Th
must ensure that:
A
n emergency response plan is in place specific
to the work being performed
A
n adequate inventory of protective equip-
ment is available at the work location; e.g. PPE,
supplied air, gas detection, harnesses/lifelines,
ventilation equipment
A
ll workers required to wear respiratory protec-
tion are medically fit to wear the associated
equipment and/or perform the required duties
A
Confined Space permit is issued laying out
the conditions upon which the work is to be
performed and that this is communicated to all
workers at the site
Th
e confined space work location is properly
prepared for the work to take place; e.g. area is
ventilated and isolated from external piping/
equipment
A
dditional risk assessment beyond the scope of
the safe work permit is completed if deemed
necessary based on the scope of the job (see Job
Hazard Analysis form and Prejob Risk Assess-
ment form). Documents will identify and com-
municate to all workers the possible hazards of
working in the confined space and what controls
are in place to make the job safe to proceed
A
ll workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO
and Time Out for Safety and understand their
obligation to exercise these tools
4

3.3 The Area Manager has ensured that:
A
ll confined spaces are defined, documented and
labeled in the area sites
W
orkers who are involved in confined space
work are adequately trained and competent
3.4 The immediate supervisor or designate overseeing

the confined space work is responsible for:
R
eviewing the need for a confined space entry,
ensuring all other options have been ruled out
Assist in completing the rescue plan
E
nsuring that everyone involved in the confined
space understands the hazards involved in the job
scope
M
aintaining the safe conditions on which the
permit is based
S uspending the permit if the permit conditions
cannot be maintained
M
aking certain that the confined space is evacu-
ated if the permit is suspended
E
nsuring a new work permit is issued at the start
of each shift
E
nsuring atmospheric testing and continuous
monitoring is done by qualified gas tester and
ensuring he/she co-signs the permits
D
etailed vessel diagrams must be reviewed
during the pre-job risk assessment including the
following items where applicable: entry/exit
points, ventilation points, blinding points, and
Nitrogen vent points
F
iling Confined Space Permit at the field site for
13 months upon completion
E
nsuring all workers are adequately trained and
qualified for the job at hand
A
pproving the means of isolating the confined
space
5
A
pproving the means of ventilating the confined
space
E
nsuring tests and measurements are taken to
determine the presence of, or change in, the
concentration of harmful substances or oxygen
deficiencies
E
nsuring an emergency and rescue plan is in
place, documented and communicated
E
nsuring information on the availability and
proper use of PPE is communicated
D
efining the maximum number of workers who
will be allowed access for the purpose of execut-
ing work within the confined space at any one
time
E
nsuring that workers entering the confined
space are familiar with the layout of the confined
space
3.5 The person accepting the permit (Lead Worker in

control of the work) is responsible for:
N
otifying Supervisor or designate in the event of
job delays or changing conditions. The work site
must be re-inspected and tested by the permit
issuer before the job can be allowed to resume
E
nsuring the preparation and precautions are
acceptable, understood, and agreed to, before en-
dorsing and accepting a Confined Space Permit
E
nsuring all safety equipment is in good working
condition
E
stablishing an escape plan agreed to by the
Supervisor or designate and Lead Worker
Defining appropriate tools to be used for the job
E
nsuring that any person entering the confined
space is aware of his/her responsibilities under
this code, is qualified to use all the personal
protective equipment required, and is aware of
6

the conditions of the confined space entry, e.g.
hazards, communications, escape plan
R
enewing permits, obtaining new permit when
required and returning permit to issuer when
permit expires or job is complete
3.6 Th
e person(s) entering the confined space is respon-
sible for:
U
nderstanding and following the conditions
detailed in the permit
R
eporting changing conditions to the Supervisor
or designate and confined space safety standby
R
eporting conditions and practices that will not
allow him or her to follow the conditions of the
permit
U
sing appropriate tools for the job and ensuring
they are in good condition
Reporting defective or damaged tools
U
sing respiratory protection and other PPE
(personal protective equipment) properly (if
breathing air is used, a full body harness must be
worn)
A
tool list must be checked off before and after
entry and exit of the confined space to ensure
nothing is left behind
3.7 Definition of the Confined Space Safety Standby:

A
safety standby person is an employee or
designate used as an observer and back-up,
whenever the above work applications are being
carried out. This person is not part of the work
crew, and is only concerned with the safety of the
workers. Safety standby personnel will be identi-
fied by some type of measure as identified in the
pre-job risk assessment.
7
3.8 The Confined Space Safety Standby is respon-

sible for:
Observing work task
Monitoring atmospheric conditions
E
nsuring ongoing communications with those is
confined space
E
xecution of emergency rescue plan and activa-
tion of rescue team
M
aintaining entry log and tool log to ensure all
personnel and tools are accounted for
E
nsuring unsupervised entry points are flagged
off indicating DO NOT ENTER or made
inaccessible by other means
E
nsuring that all workers involved in the task
have the proper training certification in place
O
ther duties as specified in the pre-job safety
meeting
F
or further guidance please check the safety
standby section of the SSPM
NOTE: Safety Standby personnel can not leave their as-

signed post unless personal safety is jeopardized, relieved by
a competent person, or confined space is evacuated.
4.0 Scope of Training and Qualification
4.1 raining is mandatory, to ensure safety, that all

T
personnel associated with the confined space entry
are trained and competent, commensurate with the
duties assigned in the confined space activity.
4.2 acilities are required to establish individual training

F
requirements to meet the needs of the activity.
P
reparing Confined Space Entry Permits pre-
entry training is required
8

C
onfined Space Entry Class 2 or 3 - pre-entry
training and Confined Space entry is required
S afety Watch class 2 or 3 - pre-entry and Con-
fined Space entry training is required
C
onfined Space Rescue confined space rescue
training is required
Must have first aid training
5.0 Scope of Pre-entry Procedures
5.1 Pre Entry Cleaning

5.1.1 All confined spaces should be made clean
prior to entry, according to the nature of the
product and residue, using the most practical
method. Workers may only enter a confined
space to clean after all other reasonable means
have been exhausted. Mechanical means are
the preferred method of cleaning, and should
be used prior to any personnel entering the
confined space.
5.1.2 If steam is used as a cleaning medium,
cleaning contractors must ensure appropri-
ate respiratory and other protective gear, and
ensure the confined space is cooled to ambient
temperature and adequate oxygen levels are
present upon completion of cleaning.
5.1.3 P
yrophoric and other products capable of
spontaneous combustion require special
handling methods. Please refer to site-specific
procedures and MSDSs for handling these
materials.
5.1.4 S ludge, fluids and all spent cleaning materials
should be disposed of in accordance with
applicable regulatory requirements and CGPU
site specific waste handling procedures.
5.1.5 INERTING - If an inert gas is used to protect
against an explosive or flammable atmosphere
9
the personal responsible for the confined space

must:
G
ain approval from the Operating Centre Man-
ager
N
otify BC WCB in writing 7 days prior to the
entry (BC applications)
E
nsure all requirements for working in an inert
atmosphere are followed
5.2 Pre-Entry Isolation and Lockout

5.2.1 E
lectrical equipment controlling or connected
in any way to the confined space or peripheral
equipment shall be tagged and locked, as per
BP Canada Energy Isolation practice gHSSEr
MS 800.
5.2.2 L
ines that could allow fluids to enter the con-
fined space shall be disconnected, capped, or
blind flanged, as per gHSSEr MS 800 Energy
Isolation (Lock out/Tag out) practice.
5.2.3 W
here connecting lines cannot be removed
and capped or blind flanged, slip or pan-
cake blinds rated for full line operating pres-
sure must be used. If a full-rated ASME blind
cannot be accomplished, a safe process must
be developed in close cooperation with site
engineers. The ASME size and rating, as well
as the MAWP (maximum allowable working
pressure) must be permanently marked on the
handle in such a manner that the information
is visible when the blind is installed.
5.2.4 B
linds that do not meet engineering practices
and have not been marked accordingly will
not be used.
5.2.5 A blind list will accompany the site specific
job procedure for the confined space being
entered.
5.2.6 Disconnecting or blanking shall be performed
10

as close to the confined space as practical. It
is acceptable to include a re-boiler, exchanger,
etc., as part of the package for the Confined
Space, providing that the entire system is
tested in accordance with the following:
E
xplosive gases or vapors: continuous monitor-
ing is required where the atmosphere cannot be
guaranteed. When gases lighter than air could be
present, continuous monitoring of high points is
required. When gases heavier than air could be
present, continuous monitoring of low points is
required
N
ORM: Naturally Occurring Radioactive Mate-
rials should be tested for, if known to exist in the
stream
N
oise - All effort must be made to monitor,
minimize and protect against
B
enzene: Must be monitored prior to entry and
at frequent intervals, if known to exist in the
stream
E
xcess or insufficient oxygen: a continuous oxy-
gen monitor is required where the atmosphere
cannot be guaranteed
T
oxic or otherwise hazardous vapors or gases
such as hydrogen sulfide must be continuously
monitored to ensure conditions on the permit
have not changed
5.2.7 Rotating equipment (e.g. fan blades, pumps,
agitators) must be immobilized and secured
against accidental movement.
5.2.8 Atmospheric monitoring should be completed
immediately prior to entry. Atmospheric
monitoring must be completed within 20
minutes of entry.
5.2.9 Where monitoring is not continuous,
confined spaces shall be re-tested after work
breaks and shift changes before re-entry.
11
5.2.10 Confined spaces shall be ventilated to

ensure a known working atmosphere and to
prevent accumulation of any other harmful
substances:
19.5% to 23.0 % oxygen (by volume)
Less than 10 % LEL; Less than 10 ppm H2S
B
enzene >0.5 ppm (half mask) or >10 ppm
(breathing air)
Ventilation providing a minimum of 85m3/hr
(50cfm) of clean respirable air is required for
each person inside the confined space with
exception given to a) when the atmosphere is
continuously monitored and shown to contain
respirable air b) the space has an internal vol-
ume greater than 1.8m3 (64ft3) per occupant,
is occupied for less than 15 minutes, and the
work inside generates no contaminates other
than exhaled air
5.2.11 R
espiratory protection must be worn while
initial and re-entry atmospheric tests are
being performed
5.3 Temporary Heating Devices

5.3.1 H
eaters that are required to maintain a suit-
able thermal environment inside the confined
space shall be located outside the space with
the hot air supply ducted into the space (see
Manufacturers instructions for setup and
venting).
5.3.2 D
irect-fired heaters, which discharge exhaust
gases with the heated air, will not be used to
heat confined spaces while they are occupied.
If direct-fired heaters are used, personnel must
confirm a safe working atmosphere prior to
entry.
5.3.3 A
reassessment of the amount of ventilation
required must be made when heating confined
12

spaces that may release additional toxic,
explosive, or flammable materials at elevated
temperatures.
5.4 Personal Protective Equipment

5.4.1 A
ppropriate personal protective equip-
ment must be worn for the particular job as
required (i.e. fire retardant clothing, gloves,
boots, goggles, face shields, respiratory ap-
paratus, safety harness and lifelines).
5.4.2 Prior to any confined space entry the con
trolled products that may be encountered in
the confined space must be identified and
the MSDS on these materials must read and
understood.
5.4.3 B
reathing apparatus is also required as standby
equipment outside the confined space, to be
used by personnel responding to emergency.
5.5 Emergency Rescue

5.5.1 A rescue plan must be completed, reviewed,
documented and a copy must be on site prior
to a confined space entry.
5.5.2 Rescue plans will be kept on file at the
facility. Any equipment required to imple-
ment the plan must be in place prior to the
confined space entry. New plans will be
developed only where a suitable plan does not
already exist.
5.5.3 A competent safety standby person must be in
attendance at the entrance during all phases
of any confined space entry unless classified
as a Class 1 confined space.
13
5.6 Communication
5.6.1 A system of communication must be
established and maintained, between the
safety standby person and the person(s) in the
confined space. This method must include at
least two of the following:
Simple voice
Visual contact
Radio equipment
Alarm horn
Rope attached to worker
5.6.2 A system of communication must be estab-
lished and maintained between the safety
standby and the rescue personnel.
5.7 Electrically Operated Equipment

5.7.1 Preference should always be given to the use of
pneumatic portable tools and explosion-proof
lamps.
5.7.2 E
lectrical equipment must be tested for
ground continuity prior to use in a confined
space.
5.7.3 A
C electrical equipment, which is used within
the confined space, shall be used in conjunc-
tion with a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
(GFI). GFIs are to be located outside con-
fined spaces.
5.8 Static Electricity

5.8.1 Consideration must be given to inclusion of
static relief procedures where there is a poten-
tial of generating static electricity.
5.8.2 Some specific conditions that may lead to

static are:
14

Th
e use of high-pressure steam, nitrogen, air
hoses discharging to atmosphere, or vacuum hoses
The use of sandblasting equipment
The types of clothing worn
5.9 Unsupervised Entry Points

5.9.1 All confined spaces must be made secure when
left unattended.
5.9.2 Barricades, closures, signage (i.e. Confined
space - Entry by permit only) or other means
of warning that the confined space must not
be entered by unauthorized personnel are
required at all unsupervised entry points. En-
try is prohibited until a new permit has been
issued, all required safety checks have been
completed and the area deemed safe as per the
Confined Space Classification.
6.0 Scope of Forms
6.1 gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment
6.2 gHSSEr MF 82001 Confined Space Entry Permit
7.0 Scope of References
7.1 lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as

A
amended
7.2 B.C. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation

and Guidelines 296/97 as amended
7.3 g HSSEr MS 800- Energy Isolation (Lock Out-Tag

Out) Practice)
7.4 gHSSEr MS 840- Ground Disturbance Practice
15
ENERGY ISOLATION PRACTICE (LOCK OUT

Energy Isolation
TAG OUT)
1.1 This practice will be used if the unexpected energiza-

tion or startup of machinery or equipment or the
unexpected release of energy could result in health,
safety, environmental or equipment damage losses.
1.2 This practice specifies minimum requirements for the

control of hazardous energy.
1.3 is practice applies to all BP Canada Gas

Th
Performance Unit (CGPU) employees, contracted
employees, contractors and other visiting personnel
doing work on CGPU premises and work sites.
1.4 is practice does not apply to hot tap operations

Th
performed on pressurized pipelines, provided it can
be demonstrated that:
Continuous service is essential
Shutdown of the system is impractical
C
GPU accepted documented procedures are
followed
E
quipment is used that will provide proven,
effective protection for employees
2.1 unctional Area Manager Operating Center Man-

F
ager or Wells Manager or HSSE Manager.
2.2 unctional Team Lead Area Foreman, Construc-

F
tion Foreman, Wellsite Leader.
16
2.3 rea Authority the person who is on-site or as-

A
Energy Isolation
sociated with that site and is assigned single point
accountability for that site. This person can be the
operator in charge, a maintenance worker, a con-
struction foreman or a wells foreman or designate.
2.4 Authorized worker is a person who applies the

energy isolation procedure and is deemed competent
by the functional team leader or designate.
2.5 Affected worker is a person who works on equip-

ment in which energy control procedures have been
implemented.
2.6 Energy isolating device is a mechanical device that

physically prevents the transmission or release of
energy.
2.7 Energy source is any electrical, mechanical, hy-

draulic, pneumatic, gravitational, chemical, nuclear,
thermal, or other energy source that could cause
injury.
2.8 Personal Lock means a lock for use by an affected

worker to ensure personal lockout protection such
that each lock when applied is operable only by a key
in the workers possession.
2.9 Lockout means the use of a lock or locks to render

the energy isolating device inoperable.
2.10 Lockbox is the control point for the key securing

system which physically prevents access to keys when
locks are applied in a group lockout procedure.
2.11 I dentification/Warning Tag is a tag directing people
not to start or operate locked out equipment and
17
indicates the name the lock is assigned to, the date of

Energy Isolation
the lockout and reason for the lock out. The identifi-
cation/warning tag is attached to each authorized
and affected workers personal lock.
2.12 Warning Tag is a numbered tag directing people

not to start or operate locked out equipment and
references people back to the energy isolation log for
date, name and reason for lockout.
2.13 P
ermanent Lockout Isolations is equipment, ma-
chinery or process that is indefinitely locked out
from service.
3.0 Scope of Responsibilities
3.1 E
ach functional area manager is accountable for
ensuring that:
A
n energy isolation system is implemented to
control the hazards at the worksite
3.2 e functional team lead or designate is responsible

Th
for:
E
stablishing on site individual training programs
for authorized and affected workers that meet the
sites needs for required energy isolation activities
E
nsuring the authorized worker(s) are competent
to perform the energy isolation procedures
D
etermining the requirement for site specific
lockout procedures for equipment being worked
on within their area
Th
ere is an adequate inventory of protective
equipment and energy isolation devices such as
locks, blinds etc. for the job at hand
A
ll workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO
and Time Out for Safety and feel comfortable in
being able to exercise these tools
18
3.3 e Area Authority in charge or designate is respon-

Th
Energy Isolation
sible for ensuring:
A
proper work permit is issued for the type
of work being undertaken and that everyone
involved is aware of the hazards, controls and
emergency procedures
Th
e authorized and affected workers are aware
of the risks prior to starting work, including the
hazards of the energy sources to be controlled,
the methods or means to control the energy, and
the prohibitions regarding attempts to restart or
re-energize locked out and tagged equipment
Th
e equipment to be worked on has been
properly isolated, locked out and tagged and is
verified and documented safe to be worked on
E
mergency response plans are in place that
addresses unplanned exposure to energy sources
from the equipment being worked on
Th
at all required testing, inspection and checking
of the work site is completed prior to the work
permit being issued
Th
at the work area is inspected and checked after
the job is completed
3.4 e authorized worker is responsible for ensuring

Th
that all equipment and energy sources are properly
isolated and locked and tagged with a personal lock
prior to starting work.
3.5 e affected workers and authorized workers are

Th
responsible for ensuring no work is performed on the
equipment until it has come to a complete stop and
the affected worker(s) working on the equipment
has a personal lock in place at each isolating device
or at the group lock box when the group lockout
procedure is being used.
19
4.0 Scope of Expectations

Energy Isolation
4.1 I f the unexpected energization or start-up of equip-

ment or the unexpected release of an energy source
could cause injury, the energy source must be iso-
lated with an energy isolating device and effectively
controlled.
4.2 hen energy isolating devices must be locked

W
out the devices must be locked and tagged in the
position that isolates the affected worker(s) from all
hazardous energy when maintenance/servicing work
is being performed. Each affected worker must
install a personal lock to secure the isolating device
in a safe position.
4.3 A work permit is issued by the Area Authority in

charge or designate to each trade or group of workers
on the job, communicated to all personnel involved
in the work, and posted as required.
4.4 work permit is not issued until a Pre-job Task

A
Hazard Analysis is completed to evaluate risks for all
deemed critical and non-routine jobs.
4.5 orkers servicing, maintaining or cleaning cord-con-

W
nected electrical equipment; for example changing
grinding wheel or repairing a drill, can lock out the
equipment by applying a lock to the electrical plug
or render the equipment inoperative. An acceptable
approach to rendering the equipment inoperative is
for the worker doing the work to:
Disconnect the plug from its electrical supply
K
eep the plug in sight and within reach so that
no else can accidentally plug in the equipment
Keep the plug under his or her exclusive and
20
immediate control at all times while working on
Energy Isolation
the equipment
4.6 T
o complete maintenance, troubleshoot problems
or perform adjustments, it may be necessary to work
on equipment while it is energized. This is allowed
only if it is required by the manufacturer or it is not
reasonably practicable (in the case where there are no
manufacturer specifications) to render the equipment
inoperative. For example, adjusting/tuning engines,
pigging of pipelines or volt/amp checks on electrical
equipment.
4.7 Site specific procedures and controls must be

developed and implemented to ensure the work is
performed to an equivalent level safely. This approach
cannot be used simply because it is more convenient
than locking out equipment.

5.0 Scope of Energy Isolation (Lock Out/Tag
Out) General Requirements
5.1 The Area Authority designates an authorized worker

to turnoff or shut down machinery using the site
specific procedures established for an orderly shut-
down in order to avoid any additional or increased
hazard(s) to employees. Refer to Isolation Log
gHSSEr MF 80001
5.2 A designated authorized worker will physically

identify the required isolation points for isolating the
equipment or machinery from the energy sources.
The authorized worker positions all the energy-isolat-
ing devices and applies lock out and tag to isolate the
machinery or equipment from the energy source(s).
5.3 Lockout of the equipment will be done with a
21
lock and tag approved by the Area Authority or

Energy Isolation
designated authorized worker(s). Areas may elect to

use a group lockout where a number of workers are
working on equipment or a large number of energy
isolating devices must be locked out:
I f a group lockout is not used each authorized
worker and all affected workers will place their
personal lock with an identification/warning tag
showing the installers printed name, signature,
date of installation and reason for installation on
each energy isolating device. This is also logged
on the Energy Isolation Log sheet. The number
of personal locks and tags on each energy isolat-
ing device equals the number of authorized and
affected workers working on the equipment
For group lockout:
o The authorized worker will lockout and attach

a warning tag to each isolation device
o Th
e authorized worker and all affected work-
ers place their personal lock on a group lock
box with an identification/warning tag with
the installers printed name, signature, date
of installation and reason for installation at-
tached to it
o The number of locks on the lock box securing

the master key to the lock box equals the
number of authorized and affected workers
working on the equipment. Each energy
isolating device will have the master lock from
the lock box secured to it
5.4 ockout devices must be affixed to each energy or
L
isolating device by the worker authorized by the Area
Authority. The devices must be attached in a manner
that will hold the energy isolating devices in a safe
or off position.
22
5.5 Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy
Energy Isolation
isolating device, the tag must be located as closely
and safely as possible to the device, in a position that
will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to
operate the equipment.
5.6 If more than one group is working on the same item
(including different maintenance crafts), each trade
or group will verify or test the isolation to confirm a
state of zero energy.
5.7 Whenever locks, blinds and tags are installed, details

must be recorded in the Energy Isolation Log and
be available on site for the duration of the lockout
to record and track the status of the isolation. The
reference number on the Energy Isolation Log must
be recorded on the Permit to Work form completed
for any work falling under the isolation.
5.8 All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy

must be relieved, disconnected, restrained, or other-
wise rendered safe.
5.9 If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored

energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation
will be continued until the servicing or maintenance
is completed, or until the possibility of such accumu-
lation no longer exists.
5.10 After ensuring that all personnel are clear, the

equipment must be tested to verify that it is properly
de-energized, locked out and will not operate. Veri-
fication must be documented in the Energy Isolation
Log.
5.11 At the beginning of each shift change, the Area

Authority, authorized workers or affected workers
23
will verify that all equipment is safe for work and has
Energy Isolation
not been returned to service during their absence.
6.0 Specific Procedures Color Identified

Locks
6.1 ach affected worker must install a personal lock

E
color-coded to their respective trade or group of
workers prior to commencing work. Such locks will
be operated only by the keys of the individual work-
ers affected by the isolation. Color-coding applies to
BP personnel and FTE. Contractors working on BP
sites will apply their own personal locks identifiable
with an attached tag.
6.2 nly the affected worker who installed the lock

O
may remove it with exception to emergency or if
the worker is not available in which site specific
procedures must be followed.
6.3 ach trade will use a different color-coded lock and

E
will use the colors as listed below:
Construction: Yellow
Electrical: Blue
Instrumentation: Red
Mechanics: Orange
Operations: Green
Permanent Lockout: Black
7.0 Specific Procedures Group Lockout

(Lockboxes)
7.1 Areas may elect to use a group lockout where a num-

ber of workers are working on equipment or a large
number of energy isolating devices must be locked
out.
24
7.2 An authorized worker competent in the isolation of
Energy Isolation
equipment is responsible for:
Locking out the energy isolating devices
S ecuring the key(s) for the locks used for locking
out energy isolating devices in a lock box by
affixing a personal lock on a multiple lock hasp
to the lock box
C
ompleting, signing and posting the Energy Iso-
lation Log that identifies the equipment covered
by the lock out
7.3 e energy isolation must be verified by two autho-

Th
rized workers. Verification must be documented in
the Energy Isolation Log.
7.4 e lockbox will contain as many keyed-alike locks

Th
as required for the energy isolation. Site specific
requirements will determine the size and number
of lockboxes required. Each lockbox must contain
locks with a key unique only to the locks in the re-
spective lockbox. When multiple lockboxes are used
on a site each lockbox must have its own identifier
corresponding to its respective locks.
7.5 ach affected worker working on the locked out

E
equipment must apply a personal lock to the lockbox
referred to in subsection (7.2) before working on the
equipment.
7.6 fter each affected worker has completed their work
A
they must remove their respective locks.
7.7 hen all affected workers personal locks are

W
removed from the lockbox, the authorized worker
must ensure that it is safe to end the group lockout.
The personal lock of the authorized worker is the last
lock to be removed from the lockbox.
25
8.0 Energy Isolation Process

Energy Isolation
The following steps identify the process in which the

Energy Isolation Practice is to be applied:
8.1 I dentify energy source(s) to be isolated electrical,

pneumatic, mechanical, hydraulic, fluids and gases.
8.2 I dentify system and isolation points to be isolated.

Isolate all sources of energy:
S hut down electrical equipment using the selec-
tor switch followed by the master disconnect
I solate all inlet and outlet piping by closing block
valve(s) upstream and downstream, disconnect-
ing, inserting blinds, or use of double block and
bleed
U
se blocks, pins, or chains to secure potential
mechanical energy
8.3 De-energize sources of energy:

S tored electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic and gasses
and fluids energy must be bled to obtain zero
energy state
I n cases where zero energy state cannot be
attained control measures must be developed
to prevent uncontrolled release of energy. For
example, use blocks, pins or chains that are rated
to restrain the potential energy when equipment
cannot be brought to zero potential energy state
W
hen working on or near exposed de-energized
electrical equipment, a qualified person will use
testing equipment to ensure that all circuits are
dead
8.4 Install/ lockout and tag energy isolation devices:

Lockout energy isolation devices (e.g. block
26
valves, electrical switches and breakers, mechani-
Energy Isolation
cal devices)
I nstall blinds or disconnect piping as necessary
(lockout required when opening piping)
A
ffix identifier/ warning tags to each isolation
point
Record points in isolation log
8.5 Verify isolation is complete:

W
orkers verify zero energy. Ensure that the
switch or START button used to test the lockout
is returned to its OFF or NEUTRAL position to
prevent accidental start-up on re-energization
I solation points are confirmed to be secure in
safe position
P
ersonal locks of affected workers control the
isolation
8.6 Complete Isolation log:

All workers applying locks sign off isolation log
Workers verifying isolation sign off isolation log
Confirm all isolation points are recorded
I solation log remains at site for duration of the
energy isolation procedure
9.0 Blinding/Blanking Guideline
9.1 General:
A
ll blinding/blanking or disconnecting and plug-
ging requires a safe work permit with a master
list attached identifying the isolation method and
listing the isolation devices and their location. A
pre-job meeting (accompanied by a Task Hazard
Analysis) needs to be done with all involved
27
personnel prior to starting work

Energy Isolation
C
athodic protection must be shut down and
flanges bonded prior to the installation of a blind
or disconnecting of piping
B
linding/blanking or disconnecting and plug-
ging is the preferred method of isolation for
pipes, pipelines, vessels and equipment
I f these cannot be done, the recommended
alternative is double block and bleed. After de-
pressuring, the block valves are to be locked and
tagged in the closed position and the bleed valve
locked and tagged in the open position. The
bleed valve venting safely to atmosphere
S ingle valve isolation is not recommended. If
necessary, then verification must be made that
the valve is holding before the work commences.
The work must be accompanied by a risk assess-
ment and specific site procedure with approval
by the Functional Team Leader in charge or des-
ignate. Valves (inlet and outlet) must be locked
and closed and tagged before work begins
9.2 Blinding and Blanking:

o E
very blinding job will have a blind list that
was generated by referencing all the available
P&IDs for the system. The system will also
be physically inspected to make sure that all
the blind locations that were identified on the
P&IDs will completely isolate the system. If
extra blinds are required they will be added to
the blind list
o All blinding jobs will use a tag system to track
blind locations. These tags must be attached to
the blind when the blind is installed. A record
must be kept of the blinds that have been in-
stalled with their respective tag number. Blind
boards or multi-part blind tags may be used to
28
track installed blinds
Energy Isolation
o After equipment has been made ready to blind
(depressured) the operator in charge will use
the tag system to track all active blinds. If
blind boards are used the tag is moved from
the blind board and attached to the blind
o Blind equipment as required ensuring the tags
from the board and the blind list correspond
with each other
o E
ach blind location must be recorded in the
Energy Isolation Log
9.3 efer the tables in Appendix A to select proper blind

R
thickness and Appendix B for standard practices for
isolation of pipe, pipelines, equipment and vessels.
10.0 Scope of Restoring Service to Equipment
10.1 A
fter each affected worker has completed their work,
they will remove their respective locks. Upon remov-
ing their locks they must sign off work completed in
the Energy Isolation Log.
10.2 I n a group lockout once all affected workers personal

locks are removed from the lockbox, the authorized
worker must ensure that it is safe to end the group
lockout. The personal lock of the authorized worker
is the last lock to be removed from the lockbox.
Once all locks have been removed from the lockbox
an authorized worker may remove the locks from
the energy isolation devices and return them to their
respective lockbox. Refer to gHSSEr MF 80001.
10.3 U
pon removal of locks and blinds the Energy
isolation Log must be updated to record status of
isolation.
10.4 A personal lock can only be removed by the autho-
29
rized and affected workers who installed the lock.

Energy Isolation
For situations where an authorized or affected worker

is unavailable to remove their lock (e.g. off-shift,
holidays) or an emergency involving equipment
arises, then the Area Authority will complete gHSSEr
MF80002 (Removal of Absent Employee Personal
Lock Log) to verify that the following steps are
completed:
M
aking every reasonable effort to contact the
affected worker who installed the lock
D
etermining conclusively the job has been com-
pleted and no personnel remain in the affected
area
V
erifying that the machinery can be operated
safely before removing the lock
C
ontacting the Functional Team for verbal
authorization to access spare key stored in desig-
nated central location or to cut the lock
R
eturning the spare key to the designated central
location
N
otifying the worker at the start of his or her
next shift that the personal lock was removed
since the workers previous shift
F
orwarding completed Form to Functional Team
Lead to sign off documentation and verify spare
key was returned to designated central location
10.5 B
efore a machine or equipment is started, affected
employees must be notified that all lockout devices(s)
have been removed and that all blinds have been
accounted for. An authorized worker must verify the
de-isolation and complete the Energy Isolation Log.
Completed log sheet(s) are filed at a central location
for 1 year.
10.6 The individual restoring energy to the equipment

must:
30
I nspect the work to ensure that non-essential
Energy Isolation
items have been removed
E
nsure that the machine or equipment com-
ponents are operationally intact and ready for
service
C
heck the work area to ensure all employees are
safely positioned or removed from the equip-
ment
11.0 Permanent Lockout Isolation
11.1 Prior to the installation of a permanent lock, a

Management of Change (MOC) will be conducted
to determine and verify the correct isolation points.
11.2 The functional team lead will designate an authorized

worker to lock each of the energy isolation devices at
the identified isolation points with a permanent lock
(black).
11.3 Th
e authorized worker will attach a steel tag to the
lock which identifies the date of the lockout, group
responsible and a reference number for reference to a
log providing details and reference to the MOC.
11.4 Th
e authorized worker will record the lockout on the
energy isolation log and file it at a central location
for future reference.
11.5 K
eys for the permanent locks must be controlled by
the Functional Team Lead.
12.0 Scope of Regulatory References

A
lberta General Safety Regulation (Alberta
Regulation 448/83, as amended)
B
C Occupational Health and Safety Regulation
and Guidelines (BC Regulation 296/97, as
amended)
31
Ontario Industrial Establishments Regulation

Energy Isolation
(O.Regulation 851, R.R.O. 1990, as amended)
Appendix A
Selection of Temporary Blinds/Blanks
Appendix A is only to be used for temporary blinds and
blanks. The tables were calculated using A-285 Gr. A plate
material and the formula found in clause 304.5.3 of ASME
B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Code. The allowable stress used was 90% of the SMYS.
Zero corrosion allowance was used. These tables can only
be used for process temperatures less than 100 F (38C).
The following alternate materials may also be used: A-285
Gr. B and C, A-299, A-525, A-516 and A-537.
If alternative material is used or a higher temperature is

required, thickness requirements must be calculated using
above codes and certified by a Professional Engineer.
Permanent Blank sizing Requirements must be certified by
Professional Engineer.
32
HYDROTEST BLANKS--SELECTION TABLE
Energy Isolation
Pipe Size
(inches) 2 3 4 6 8 10 12
Blank
Thickness
(inches) Pressure (psig)
0.250 952 450 288 139 85 56 40
0.375 2142 1013 648 314 192 127 91
0.500 2048 1800 1152 557 341 225 161
0.625 3200 2813 1800 871 533 352 252
0.750 4608 2243 2592 1254 768 506 362
0.875 6272 3053 2170 1707 1045 689 493
1.000 8192 3987 2835 2230 1365 900 644
1.125 10368 5047 3588 1800 1727 1139 815
1.250 6230 4429 2222 2132 1407 1006
1.375 7539 5359 2689 1929 1702 1218
1.500 8972 6378 3200 2296 2025 1449
1.625 10529 7485 3756 2695 2377 1700
1.750 8681 4356 3125 1936 1972
1.875 9965 5000 3588 2222 2264
2.000 5689 4082 2528 1800
NOTE: The shaded area beneath the line in the above

table applies to RTJ type flanges only.
These tables are for selection of temporary blanks only.

DO NOT USE FOR PERMANENT BLANKS!
Pipe Size
(inches) 14 16 18 20 24 26 30
Blank
Thickness
(inches) Pressure (psig)
0.250 34 26 21 17 13 10 7
0.375 76 59 46 38 26 22 17
0.500 135 104 82 67 47 40 29
0.625 210 163 129 105 73 62 46
0.750 303 234 186 151 106 89 66
0.875 412 319 253 206 144 121 90
1.000 539 417 330 269 188 158 118
1.125 682 528 417 341 238 200 149
1.250 842 651 515 421 294 247 184
1.375 1018 788 624 509 356 299 223
1.500 1212 938 742 606 423 356 265
1.625 1422 1101 871 711 497 417 312
1.750 1649 1276 1010 824 576 484 361
1.875 1893 1465 1160 946 661 556 415
2.000 2154 1667 1320 1077 752 632 472
33
Appendix B.
Energy Isolation
Standard Practice For Isolation of Pipes, Pipelines, Equip-

ment and Vessels Matrix

For Unattended, Open For Vents and
Ended
Piping Where Drains on
Equipment/
Confined Component is Vessels or
Physically Pipelines
Space Hot Work Cold Work Removed for in Operation
Entry Maintenance
Sour Gas 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Gas Liquids (Propane, 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
Butane) 2,3,4,7,8
Sweet Gas 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Crude oil (Emulsion, 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
Bitumen) 2,3,4,7,8
Steam > 2482 kPa 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Steam < 2482 kPa & > 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
50.8mm 2,3,4,7,8
Steam < 2482 kPa & 1 or 2 1 or 2,3,4,7,8 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
50.8 or less 2,3,4,5,7,8
Acid/Base 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Amines 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3,4,7,8 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,5,7,8
Flammable Substances 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Non-Flammable 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3,4,6 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
Substances 2,3,4,5,6
Produced Water 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
Fresh Water 1 or 2 1 or 2,3,4,6 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,5,6
Toxic Substances 1 or 2 1 or 2, 3 1 or 1 or 2, 3 1
2,3,4,7,8
*The isolation options in the table above are presented in

the order of preference.
See the Legend for an explanation of numbered references
Legend
1. Blind/Blank or plug
2. Disconnect and plug
3. Double Block and Bleed
4. S ingle Block valves with Authorization (use only if
#3 doesnt exist or #1 & 2 are impractical. Can only
be used if approved by a Professional Engineer or
Functional Team Lead, based on a documented risk
assessment complete with procedures.
5. Double Block Valves (no bleed)
34
6. Single Block valves
Energy Isolation
7. Common tasks carried out using a standard practice
certified by Professional Engineer.
8. Unique task carried out using a site specific proce-
dure certified by Professional Engineer.
Notes
Note A: All valves must be locked out and tagged when us-
ing double block and bleed, bleed must be vented
to atmosphere and consideration must be given to
make sure it is vented to a safe place.
Note B: For valves that are holding but the threads/nipple
are unable to accept a bull plug/cap, the bull plug/
cap will not be required until the valve is replaced.
Note C: Double block and bleed cannot be used to isolate
critical hot work in British Columbia. Refer to
Provincial regulations outside Alberta.
Note D: This practice needs to be used with other proce-
dures, codes of practice and standards to provide a
safe work environment (i.e. Lockout Procedures,
H2S Code of Practice).
Blinding/Blanking or Disconnect and plug:

B
linding/blanking or disconnect and plug is the
preferred method for isolating equipment for
work purposes
A
blind/blank tag system must be used in all BP
Canada facilities. This tag system must also be
used for identifying disconnect and plug loca-
tions. When a blind/blank is being installed the
following are important:
o S ite-Specific blinding/blanking procedures or
guides must be followed
o Gaskets must be installed on the pressure side
and, where possible, on both sides to prevent
damage to flange faces
35
o P
roper pressure rated blinds/blanks and
Energy Isolation
gaskets must be used. See specification table at

the end of this section
Double Block and Bleed:

I f installing blinds/blanks creates a hazard and dis-
connect and plug is impractical, the recommended
alternative for isolating equipment is closing double
(block) valves with a bleed valve in between. The
bleed valve size between the block valves must be
sufficient to handle potential upstream block valve
leakage without applying pressure to the downstream
block valve. Block valves must be locked and tagged
in a closed position and the bleed valve must be
locked and tagged in the open position.
NOTE: Bleed valve outlets must be vented with
consideration given to both Safety and Environ-
mental impacts
Single Block Valves with Authorization:

Closing of inlet valve and outlet valve and then de-
pressuring the equipment. Must verify that the valves
hold before work commences. Valves must be locked
closed and tagged. Can be used only when approved
by a Professional Engineer or Functional Team Lead,
based on documented risk assessment complete with
site-specific procedure.
Double Block Valves (No Bleed):

Two valves closed on each side of the equipment
without de-pressuring between the block valves.
The block valve nearest to the inlet and the outlet of
the isolated equipment must be locked and tagged
closed.
Single Block:
36
Closing of inlet valve and outlet valve and then de-
Ground Disturbance
pressuring the equipment. Must verify that the valves
hold before work commences. Valves must be locked
closed and tagged.
Unique task:
Task that is unique and requires the expertise of a
Professional Engineer to ensure that the equipment
isolation meets BP safety requirements and OH&S
regulations.
Reference Forms:
gHSSEr MF 80001 Energy Isolation Log
gHSSEr MF 88001 Permit to Work
gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-Job Risk Assessment
GROUND DISTURBANCE PRACTICE
1.1 is practice applies to all BP Canada Energy BP

Th
Canada Gas Performance Unit(CGPU) employees,
contracted employees, contractors and other visiting
personnel involved in ground disturbance activities
on CGPU sites.
1.2 The purpose of this practice is to outline the

requirements for ground disturbance necessary to
ensure worker safety and to avoid contact with all
underground facilities.
2.1 round Disturbance is a man made cut, cavity,

G
trench or depression in the earths surface. Examples
37
include excavating, digging, trenching, plowing,

Ground Disturbance
drilling, tunneling, aurgering, back-filling, blasting,

hydrovacing, topsoil stripping, land leveling, grading,
clearing, fencing, rig anchors and soil sampling.
3.0 Scope of Responsibilty
3.1 ach worker has the responsibility to recognize

E
ground disturbance hazards and take corrective
measures by ensuring this practice is followed.
3.2 n-site BP representative in charge or designate

O
must ensure that:
E
mergency Response Plans are in place to ad-
dress Ground Disturbance specific hazards as
well as the area Emergency Response Plan
A
n adequate inventory of Protective Equipment
required for hazards identified for the Ground
Disturbance (shoring, cages, gas detection, bar-
ricades, harness, lifelines etc.) is available
A
ll protective trench devices temporarily used in
an excavation are to be certified by a Professional
Engineer
A
Ground Disturbance permit and, where
required, a Confined Space Permit is issued
G
round movement is controlled and collapse
is prevented by systematically shoring, sloping,
benching and use of temporary protective
devices(see section 5.5)
A
hazard assessment of the worksite is com-
pleted prior to work commencing, this includes
identification, and where possible, isolation and
depressurization of all underground hazards (e.g.
pipelines, electric cables) within the area to be
disturbed
That all workers are trained in STOP-THINK-
38
GO and Time Out for Safety and are able to
Ground Disturbance
exercise these tools
A
ll requirements of the Ground Disturbance
Code of Practice and Permit have been met
4.0 Scope Of Training And Certification
4.1 ll workers involved in the ground disturbance must

A
be trained and competent. This training can be job
specific training on site by a person who has received
formalized Ground Disturbance Level II training
from a recognized institute. The person supervising
the job must have formalized Ground Disturbance
Level II training.
4.2 rior to Ground Disturbance activity commenc-

P
ing, a Work Permit and Hazard Assessment Form
(gHSSEr MF 88001) and Ground Disturbance
permit (gHSSEr MF 84001) shall be completed.
Ground Disturbance training is not required for the
BP representative completing the Work Permit and
Hazard Assessment Form. Any worker who issues
a Ground Disturbance permit, supervises or inde-
pendently creates a disturbance requires formalized
Level II Ground Disturbance training. The Ground
Disturbance Permit recipient is not required to have
Ground Disturbance training. Permit recipient is
not required to have training but person supervising
the job must have training and be on-site during the
disturbance. Both permits shall be filed at the field
office for 13 months.
4.3 raining shall be conducted by a competent trainer.

T
Onsite documentation of training will be entered in
the VTA database.
5.0 Scope of Consideration for Ground Disturbance
39
Ground Disturbance
5.1 A risk assessment is necessary to determine if a

ground disturbance permit needs to be completed
and all steps followed. This risk assessment needs to
be completed by a person trained in ground distur-
bance by a recognized institute.
5.2 Ground Disturbance Permit is required any time

A
powered mechanized equipment is used to disturb
the ground. An exemption to this rule would be
grading a lease road (see 5.3) as it is considered
low risk due to extra ground cover. Certain manual
penetrating hand tools can damage underground
structures and this should be considered when doing
risk analysis.
5.3 ollowing is a list of jobs that have been identified as

F
low risk jobs and therefore a ground
disturbance permit would not need to be issued:
U
sing a spade to dig to a depth of less than 30
cm
Pounding in wooden survey peg
Pushing in wire marker flags
Grading a lease road
U
sing hydro vac at low pressure (< 2200 p.s.i.) to
dig

5.4 ydrovacing or hand exposure is to be used on plant
H
facilities (excluding wellsites) to locate any possible
underground facilities. No mechanical excavation.
5.5 A complete hazard assessment for ground distur-

bance needs to address the following areas which are
incorporated in the Work Permit and Hazard Assess-
ment Form (gHSSEr 88001):
40
C
onsideration must be given to all trenches
Ground Disturbance
and excavations being confined spaces.If the
atmosphere in an excavation cannot be guaran-
teed safe, the excavation would be considered a
confined space
I f an excavation is more than 1.5 metres deep
and closer to the wall or bank than the depth of
the excavation, it must be properly shored or cut
back before workers can enter the area. If this is
not possible an engineered approved structure for
shoring will need to be installed. Proper shoring
is as follows:
If the soil is considered:
o hard and compact the walls are sloped to
within 1.5 metres of the bottom of the excava-
tion at an angle of not less than 30 degrees
measured from the vertical
o likely to crack or crumble the walls are
sloped to within 1.5 metres of the bottom of
the excavation at an anlgle of not less than 45
degrees measured from the veritcal
o soft, sandy or loose the walls are sloped from
the bottom of the excavation at an angle of
not less than 45 degrees measured from the
vertical
Th
e employer must ensure the the Spoil Pile is
piled so that:
o the leading edge is at least 1 metre away from
the edge of the excavation
o the slope of the spoil pile adjacent to the
excavation is at an angle of not more than 45
degrees from the horizontal, and
o loose materials are scaled and trimmed from
the spoil pile
Th
e method of identification of underground
facilities
The method of exposure methods and pressures
41
involved
Ground Disturbance
S afety and environmental procedures for dealing

with encountered or compromised underground
facilities
S pecific excavation considerations such as soil
type, consistency, natural angle of repose, slurry
disposal, contamination, preexcavated, and spoil
pile placement
S ize of excavation, proximity to traffic, stability
of adjacent improvement, structures, vibration
producing equipment, load placement distances
and wieght distribution relating to the excavation
(vehicles, equipment, piping, lay down areas, etc)
E
ngineering certification and design require-
ments for excavations > 6 metres (4.6 metres BC)
M
ethods to stabilize excavation faces, ramping
and proper access & egress points, maintain a
safe atmsophere, establish degradation factors
(heat, cold, water, soil fluid pressures, environ-
mental conditions)
Th
e work to be carried out, the number of work-
ers and tools and equipment in the excavation,
PPE requirements and the need for a safety
standby
5.6 uring the job, in accordance with the permit,

D
ground and atmospheric conditions must be con-
tinually monitored for changing conditions.
See gHSSEr MS830.
5.7 eavy equipment (including pickup trucks) must

H
not cross a pipeline unless it is properly ramped or
there is a minimum of 1.5 metres of ground cover.
The pipeline owner may have more stringent requir-
ments therefore this should always be addressed in
the pre-project meeting.
6.0 Scope of Forms
42
Lifting Opeartions
6.1 g HSSEr MF 84001-BP Canada Energy Ground
Disturbance Permit
6.2 gHSSEr MF 88001 BP Canada Work Permit and

Hazard Assessment
7.1 Alberta General Safety Regulations AR 448/83 as

amended. Part 32

7.3 Ontario Regulation 213 Construction Projects - Part

III Excavations, as amendedgHSSEr MS820-
Confined Space Entry Practice
7.4 g HSSEr MS830- Working in a Combustible Gas

Environment Practice
LIFTING AND RIGGING PRACTICE
1.1 This practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Perfor-

mance Unit (CGPU) employees, contracted employ-
ees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing
lifting and rigging operations on CGPU premises
and work sites.
1.2 The purpose of the practice is to identify safe lifting

and rigging procedures, when it is necessary to
prepare a lifting plan and to make certain all neces-
43
sary pre-planning has been accomplished when heavy

Lifting Opeartions
loads and/or long booms will be in proximity of

operating equipment.
1.3 e practice defines training and certification

Th
requirements for crane operators, crane inspection,
maintenanace requirements and fundamental operat-
ing requirements used throughout the BP Canada
Gas Performance Unit (CGPU).
1.4 e practice defines circumstances and requirements

Th
that classify a lift to be Critical, and if deemed criti-
cal, requires that the Critical Lift form be completed,
signed, and executed by all responsible parties associ-
ated with the lift.
2.1 ach worker is responsible for recognizing lifting and

E
rigging hazards and taking corrective measures to
ensure that this practice is followed.
2.2 The on-site BP representative in charge or designate

must ensure:
mergency response plans are in place to ad-
E
dress specific Lifting and Rigging hazards for
the job at hand
at the workers are trained and competent
Th
to operate the cranes and/or hoists or rig up
for lifting as required for the work at hand
ll cranes, hoists and rigging equipment are
A
properly labelled and inspected daily prior to
work commencing
at the safety devices installed on the lifting
Th
equipment are operational
A hazard assesment is completed prior to start-
44
ing work that includes identification of the
Lifting Opeartions
loads involved and that the lifting equipment
is adequate and otherwise ready for service for
those loads. It will identify that the lift is clear
of overhead obstacles, that workers are aware
of the hazards and there is a clear understand-
ing of communication methods and what
hand signals are to be used, and how the load
is to be balanced and directed throughout the
various stages of the lift
at all workers are trained in STOP-
Th
THINK-GO and Time Out for Safety and
feel comfortable in being able to exercise these
tools
3.0 Scope of Training, Certification and Com-

petencies
3.1 nly trained and competent authorized personnel or

O
trainees under the direct supervision of trained and
competent authorized personnel will be permitted to
operate cranes and hoists or rig up for lifting.
3.2 e employer of crane operators and riggers will co-

Th
ordinate the training and will maintain the training
records.
3.3 Crane Operators will have:

A
ppropriate Provincial Crane Operators Certifi-
cate or an Inter-Provincial Certificate
Th
e Alberta Apprenticeship has 3 defined ap-
prenticeship programs for lifting and hoisting
M
obile Crane Certification 3 year program,
capable of lifiting > 45 tons.
B
oom Truck Certification is required when
operating:
45
Lifting Opeartions
a) Booms (including telescoping booms and ar-

ticulating booms possessing live lines) capable
of swinging, hoisting and booming up and
down with a lifting capacity of greater than 5
tons and less than 45 tons
b) Articulation booms without live lines with a
lifting capacity of greater than 8 tons and less
that 45 tons
W
ellhead Boom Truck to work in this trade
a person must be a registered apprentice or a
certified journeyman or hold a recognized trade
certificate. A wellhead boom truck may be used
for one or more of the following:
1. Wellhead pumping operations.
2. Wireline operations
3. Perforation operations
4. Coiled tubing operations
5. Snubbing operations
6. Rig up and rig out of slant service rigs.
A
ll operators of lifting devices rated > 2000
kilograms shall be certified as a journeyman op-
erator or enrolled in the Alberta Apprenticeship
system. Operators of lifting equipment that is
rated at < 2000 kilograms must be able to show
competence to the items below:
1. Sound working knowledge and understand-
ing of the use of hardware and equipment
2. Ability to read,understand and implement
lift plans and drawings
3. Ability to recognize hazards and risks
within the lift area, have a clear understand-
ing of lift dynamics, and have previous
experience or familiarity with the type of
lift to be performed
3.4 Riggers will have:
Knowledge of equipment
46
Experience with lift procedures
Lifting Opeartions
W
orking knowledge of relevant practices, codes
and practices
A
bility to prepare and interpret site and lift plans
and drawings
Knowledge of hand signals
4.0 Scope of Inspection and Maintenance
4.1 ll cranes, hoists and rigging equipment will be

A
installed, erected, checked, labelled, examined,
inspected, tested, operated, maintained and repaired
in accordance with the appropriate practice listed in
the applicable provincial regulations.
4.2 ll lifting devices (i.e. Davitt Arms) must be certified

A
by an engineer and properly labelled for capacities.
4.3 ll cranes on CGPU sites must have the most recent

A
appropriate inspection documentation on site as per
5.1.
4.4 I f an incident occurs with lifting equipment (i.e.

shock loading to the boom, sling breaks during lifts),
and damage is suspected, the crane shall be taken out
of service until it is recertified in safe operability.
4.5 ll cranes and hoists will receive preventative
A
maintenance based on usage and manufacturers
recommendations.
4.6 ll rigging equipment will be inspected to prior to

A
each usage to ensure the integrity of the equipment.
All damaged rigging equipment will be removed
from use immediately and destroyed or discarded
or repaired and certified by the manufacturer. (See
Appendix 1 for guidelines regarding sling damage).
47
Lifting Opeartions
5.0 Scope of General Operation
5.1 A substantial and durable rating chart with clearly

legible letters and figures will be provided with each
crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a con-
spicious location visible to the operator while seated
at the controls.
5.2 Cranes will not be operated without the full amount

of any ballast or counterweight in place as specified
by the manufacturer. The ballast or counterweight
in place that is specified by the manufacturer will not
be exceeded.
5.3 hen a crane is to be operated near energized

W
overhead electrical power lines, a clearance of 3
meters will be maintained as an absolute limit of
approach with the boom, block, and load to ensure
safe operation and eliminate hazards of electrocution.
A crane in transport with the boom or mast lowered
can come within 2 meters of an energized line. If
the voltage is greater than 50kv, the clearance shall be
increased 10 centimeters for every 10kv over 50kv.
5.4 e crane operator will not lift or carry any load over
Th
or above personnel. The area of the lift over which
the load is carried should be barricaded (i.e. roping,
taping) and signed. All unnecessary personnel will be
restricted from the barricaded area.
5.5 No hoisting, lowering, swinging, or traveling will be

done while personnel is on the load or the hook.
5.6 All crane hooks must be equipped with a positive
locking safety latch.
48
5.7 The crane operator must test the brakes each time a
Lifting Opeartions
load approaching the rated load is handled by raising
it a few inches and applying the brakes.
5.8 Once a load is hooked up, the load is the responsibil-

ity of the crane operator.
5.9 The command STOP may be given by anyone and

must be obeyed by everyone including the crane or
hoist operator.
5.10 Backhoes, track hoes, front-end loaders, side loaders

and similar earth moving equipment may be used
only for incidental lifting in which they are designed.
Such use of this equipment shall comply with the
equipment manufacturers requirements, specifica-
tions and designs for lifting.
5.11 While making lifts, cranes equipped with outriggers

will have them fully deployed whenever possible.
Wood blocks used to support outriggers must be
strong enough to prevent crushing, be free of defects,
and be of sufficient width and length to prevent
shifting or toppling under load.
5.12 Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses and other necessary
articles will be stored in the tool box and not be
permitted to lie loose in or about the cab.
5.13 C
ranes will not be refueled while the engine is run-
ning.
5.14 A
carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire
extinguisher will be kept in the cab or the vicinity of
the crane, with easy accessibility.
5.15 U
se of a flag man is required to direct the lifting
operator in a blind zone. The flag man should be
49
competent in the use of signalling to direct the lift

Lifting Opeartions
operator.
6.0 Scope of Rigging the Load
6.1 Only competent riggers will attach a load. A com-

petent rigger must have sufficient knowledge of hand
signals and rigging loads and procedures. Prior to a
lifting operation, STOP, THINK, GO and ensure
communication and hand signals are reviewed.
6.2 nsure that the hoist rope is free from kinks or

E
twists. Do not wrap the hoist rope around the load.
6.3 nsure that the load will be attached to the hook by

E
means of slings or other approved rigging devices.
6.4 ake care to make certain that the sling clears all
T
obstacles (i.e. sharp edges, portruding objects).
7.0 Scope of Hoisting Operation
7.1 Center the crane over the load before starting the
hoist to avoid swinging the load as the lift is started.
7.2 The crane operator must make sure the load is well
secured and properly balanced in the sling or lifting
device before it is lifted more than a few inches. A
test lift should be performed.
7.3 oads should not be swung by the crane to reach

L
areas not under the crane. Crane hoisting should be
kept vertical. Cranes will not be used for dragging
loads sideways.
50
7.4 uring hoisting, care should be taken so that there is

D
Lifting Opeartions
no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving
load.
7.5 o not make lifts beyond the rated local capacity of

D
the crane, slings, chains, cables or any other rigging
and lifting equipment.
7.6 On truck mounted cranes, no loads will be lifted

over the cab of the vehicle except as approved by the
crane manufacturer.
8.0 Scope of Holding the Load
8.1 The crane operator will not be permitted to leave

their position at the controls while the load is sus-
pended. Do not leave unsupervised loads suspended.
8.2 Neither the load nor the boom will be lowered below
the point where less than five full wraps of cable
remain on their respective drums.
9.0 Scope of Moving the Load
9.1 Before moving the load, ensure all slings, chains, or

other load lifting devices are fully seated in the saddle
of the hook.
9.2 veryone in the immediate area must be clear of the
E
load and aware that a load is being moved. When
raising, lowering, or moving loads, a horn or some
other method of warning must be used to warn
personnel in the area that a lift is taking place.
9.3 ag lines of sufficient length must be used to steady

T
or guide the loads as they are being moved unless
they would not be effective (e.g. extremely heavy
51
large loads) or creating an uncontrolled hazard. Rig

Lifting Opeartions
matting may be moved without tag lines with the

load less than 1 meter from the ground and workers
standing back from the load.
10.0 Scope of Travelling
10.1 When travelling without a load, the empty hook

should be secured.
10.2 Speed should be kept to a minimum and should not

exceed manufacturers recommendations.
10.3 B
efore travelling a crane with a load, the crane opera-
tor will be responsible for ensuring position of the
load, boom location, ground support, travel route,
and speed of movement. When travelling with a
suspened load, ground speed should not exceed
5kph. The crane will have a ground or vehicle guide
to escort them so that travel can be conducted in the
safest manner possible.
10.4 A
crane, with or without a load, shall not be travelled
with the boom so that it may bounce back over the
cab.
11.0 Scope of Critical Lift Requirements
11.1 A
lift will be considered Critical and a Critical Lift
Plan will be completed when any of the following
conditions or circumstances exists.
11.2 All lifts made over operating process equipment.
52
11.3 S ingle crane lifts when the total load exceeds 80% of
Lifting Opeartions
the cranes load chart.
11.4 T
wo or more cranes are required for a single piece
of equipment. Boom cats during pipeline stringing
operations would not be considered a critical lift.
11.5 Utilization of poles and derricks that have been

erected for a specific lift.
11.6 If power lines are within twice the maximum swing
radius of the crane, plus the required voltage clear-
ance. Minimum clearance is 3 meters for voltages up
to 50 kilovolts (kV) and distances increasing by 1.5
meters for every extra 150 kV.
11.7 L
ifting of personnel. Manbaskets must engineered
and visually inspected before the lift is made. Lifts of
personnel utilizing man baskets must conform to 29
CFR 1926.550 (g).
11.8 BP CGPU or contract employee requests a lift plan.
12.0 Scope of the Critical Lift Plan
12.1 Th
e contractor performing the Critical Lift must
develop a Critcal Lift Procedure and must include
a Critical Lift Checklist which must reviewed by a
BP CGPU representative. (see Appendix 3 for an
example).
13.0 Drilling and Well Servicing
13.1 D
rilling and Service rigs will be maintained and
inspected in accordance with the manufacturers and
American Petroleum Insitudes (API) specifications.
Certification of Masts will be in accordance of CA-
53
DOC Recommended Practice 1.0, 2.0. 3.0 and 4.0.

Lifting Opeartions
13.2 D
rilling and Service rigs will also follow Part 37, Oil
and Gas Wells, in the OH&S code in which lifting
related equipment is referenced.
14.0 Scope of Appendices
APPENDIX 1- Sling Checklist

APPENDIX 2- Sling Operating Practices Guidelines
APPENDIX 3- Example of a Critical Lift Plan
completion/Approval Checklist
APPENDIX 4- Initial Crane Inspection
APPENDIX 5- Daily Crane Inspection
15.1 A
lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as
amended

and Guidleines 296/97 as amended
15.3 CAODC Recommended Practices
15.4 Albertas OH&S Act, Regulation and Code Ontario

Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments and
Regulation 213 Construction Projects, as amended
16.0 Forms
gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-Job Risk Assessment

g HSSEr MF 88001-BP Canada Energy Com-
pany Hot Work/Cold Work Permit
54
APPENDIX 1
Lifting Opeartions
Lifting and Rigging Practice - Sling Guidelines
This checklist is to be referred to prior to the use of

any slings for lifting and rigging procedures. If any of
the following checklist items are identified as an issue,
remove the sling from use immediately.
1) D
oes the synthetic sling(s) have a rated capacity
tag that is clearly legible?
2) A
re there any acid or alkalis burns on the
sling(s)?
3) I s there any melting, charring, or weld spatters
on any part of the sling(s)?
4) A
re there any holes, tears, cuts, snags or embed-
ded particles in the sling?
5) I s there any broken or worn stitching in load
bearing splices?
6) Are there signs of excessive abrasive wear?
7) Are there are knots in any part of the sling?
8) I s there any evidence of distortion, excessive pit-
ting, corrosion or broken fittings on the sling(s)?
9) A
re there any conditions which cause doubt as to
the strength of the sling?
APPENDIX 2
Sling Operating Practices Guidelines
1) D
etermine the weight of the load. The weight of
the load shall be within the rated capacity of the
sling.
2) Select the sling(s) having suitable characteristics
55
for the type of load, hitch and environment.

Lifting Opeartions
3) S lings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated

capacity. Considerations shall be given to the
sling load angle which affects rated capacity.
4) S lings with fittings that are used as a choker
hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that
the choking action is on the webbing, and never
on a fitting.
5) S lings used in a basket hitch shall have the load
balanced to prevent slippage.
6) Th
e opening in fittings shall be the proper shape
and size to insure that the fitting will seat prop-
erly in the hook or other attachments.
7) S lings shall always be protected from being cut
by sharp corners, sharp edges, protrusions or
abrasive surfaces.
8) S lings shall not be dragged on the floor or over
an abrasive surface.
9) S lings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or
joined by knotting.
10) Slings shall not be pulled from under loads if the
load is resting on the sling.
11) Do not drop slings equipped with metal fittings.
12) Slings that appear to be damaged shall not be
used unless inspected and accepted.
13) The sling shall be hitched in a manner providing
control of the load.
14) Personnel, including portions of the human
body, shall be kept from between the sling and
the load, and from between the sling and the
crane hook or hoist hook.
15) Personnel shall stand clear of the suspended load.
16) Personnel shall not ride the sling.
17) Shock loading shall be avoided.
18) Twisting and kinking the legs (branches) shall be
avoided.
56
19) Load applied to the hook shall be centered in the
Lifting Opeartions
base (bowl) of the hook to prevent point loading
on the hook.
20) During lifting, with or without the load, person-
nel shall be alert for possible snagging.
21) The slings legs (branches) shall contain or sup-
port the load from the sides above the center of
gravity when using a basket hitch.
22) Slings shall be long enough so that the rated
capacity of the sling is adequate when the angle
of the legs (branches) is taken into consideration.
23) Place blocks under load prior to setting down
the load, to allow removal of the web sling, if
applicable.
24) Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used at
temperatures above 90 degrees C.
25) Exposure to sunlight or ultra-violet light
degrades the strength of slings. Store slings in a
cool, dry and dark place when not in use.
APPENDIX 3-Example of a Critical Lift Plan

Critical Lift Plan
Completion/Approval Checklist
Note: All applicable forms (Lift Plan, Lifting Near Electri-

cal Hazards Safety Form, etc.) and drawings/plans (Rigging
Drawing, Lifting Site Plot Plan, etc.) must be attached to
this completion/approval checklist prior to the approval
meeting and for the duration of the lift.
Job Name: _____________________________________

Date Lift Expected To Take Place:
Planned Duration Of Lift: hrs.
Site/Ground Evaluation/Preparation:
57
Answer YES or NO
Lifting Opeartions
(if NO provide explanation and justification of in space

provided after each section)
A detailed site plot plan has been prepared and

includes crane(s) location, all above ground
hazard or obstructions, all underground
hazards, and load travel paths to be utilized
during the lift.
round conditions surrounding the crane

G
location, as indicated in the attached site plot
plan; have been evaluated for underground
hazards such as underground piping,
conduit, and uncompacted backfill from
recently filled excavations. Any potential
underground hazard and the position of the
crane has been noted on the site plot plan.
ll open excavations in the lift area have

A
been examined for their potential effect on
the lift in question. All open excavations in
the lift area have been noted on the site plot
plan.

Ground stability has been evaluated and
documented in the attached report for ability
to support the bearing surface of the lifting
equipment being used. All conditions that
may affect the ability of the ground to support
the load, such as dynamic or impact loads,
swing rates and sudden load stops have been
examined. Bearing mats are required if any
question exist as to the grounds ability to sup-
port the lift in question.
Construction details of the bearing mats,
58
if required, are attached and have been
Lifting Opeartions
reviewed.
Cranes(s):
e lift plan for each crane used to support

Th
the load has been completed, reviewed and is
attached to the critical lift plan.
A detailed crane configuration drawing has

been completed, for each crane used to sup-
port the load, and includes, but is not limited
to, boom configuration to be used, the mini-
mum boom angle to the ground, maximum
boom length, maximum operating radius,
minimum jib offset angle to the ground (if
applicable), to be used during the lift.
The maximum allowable wind speed has been

established, based on crane manufactures
recommendation and load configuration, and
is clearly labeled on the crane configuration
drawing.

The percent crane capacity, as noted on the
lift plan, has been verified and the cranes load
chart used to complete the lift plan has been
attached to the critical lift plan.
Load:
A detailed drawing of the load has been

completed and is attached to the critical lift
plan. The detailed load drawing will show,
at a minimum, information pertaining to the
weight of the load, including any auxiliary
59
equipment such as ladders, platforms, piping,

Lifting Opeartions
insulation, etc. that may be attached to the

load prior to the lift, lifting and tailing lugs
available on the load and their orientation,
anchor bolt pattern of the load, and anchor
bolt pattern of the loads foundation. Any
special lifting requirements will also be clearly
stated on the detailed load drawing.
All information on the detailed load drawing

has been verified for accuracy.
Rigging:
A detailed rigging drawing has been com-

pleted and is attached to the critical lift plan.
The detailed rigging drawing will show, at a
minimum, all rigging to be utilized for the
lift, including shackles, slings, I-bolts, spreader
bars, chain falls, etc., the configuration of all
rigging, including angles and lengths, attach-
ment to the load and crane.
All information on the detailed rigging draw-
ing has been reviewed and verified acceptable
for the lift in question.
Lift Logistics:
A logistics plan has been prepared and is

attached to the critical lift plan. The logistics
plan addressing, at a minimum, the travel
path of the crane or cranes supporting the
load, swing radius of the crane or cranes sup-
porting the load, the travel path of the load,
placement of Signal Person(s), communica-
tions between the Signal Person(s) and the
crane operator(s), securing the load once it is
60
in place, and access to disconnect the rigging
Lifting Opeartions
from the load once the load is secured.
All information in the logistics plan has been

reviewed and is acceptable for the lift in ques-
tion.
Critical Lift Plan Approvals:
Area Manager:
Project/Construction Engineer:
Rigging Inspector:
Job Representative:
The following items must be addressed on the day of the

lift.
e Emergency Response Coordinator has

Th
been notified of the lift in question.

The crane location is in accordance with the
location noted on the site plot plan.
The crane configuration is in accordance with

the detailed crane configuration drawing.
The rigging configuration is in accordance

with the detailed rigging drawing.
The Rigging Inspector has obtained the cur-

rent wind speed and has noted the current
wind speed and the maximum allowable wind
speed in the spaces provided. The current
wind speed is equal to or below the maximum
61
allowable wind speed

Lifting Opeartions
mph - Current Wind Speed

mph - Maximum Allowable
Wind Speed

A detailed pre-lift safety meeting has been
held and included ALL individuals involved
or affected by the critical lift in question and
covered all details associated with the lift.
Critical Lift Pre-Lift Safety Meeting Attendance:
By signing this form, the following individuals are indicat-

ing they have actively participated in the pre-lift safety
meeting for the critical lift in question and fully understand
the scope of the lift to be made and their assigned roles and
responsibilities.
Equipment Operator:
Rigging Inspector:
Signal Person/Rigger:
Signal Person/Rigger:
Operations Representative:
APPENDIX 4
Initial Crane Inspection
Date: ____________________________
Inspection By. _____________________
_____________ I s Crane Certification Current? Please

include date of certification
____________ Is Operator Certification Current?
____________ Is the size of the crane adequate for the
62
jobs anticipated?
Lifting Opeartions
____________ I s there a current log book kept with the
crane?
APPENDIX 5
Daily Crane Inspection
Date: ____________________________
Inspection By: _____________________
___Lubrication (gears, pulleys, pins, wire rope)

___Log (check previous reports or logs)
___Cylinders (fittings, hoses, leaks, seals)
___Bolts/Pins ((loose, missing, damaged)
___Capacity (limitations, plate, rigging, chart, log)
___Hoses (leaks, filters, wear secure, connections)
___Manual (familiar with operator/maintenance manual)
___Controls (movement, swing, telescope)
___Brakes (functioning, limit switch)
___Outriggers (functioning, limit switch)
___Pads (large enough, strong enough, good condition)
___Hydraulic Fluid (level ok, filter ok)
___Boom (wear, dents, bolts, pins, cables, sheaves)
___Engine (belts, filters, wiring, PTO)
___Work Area (clean, access, barricades, workers)
___Obstructions (clearances, power lines, vehicles)
___Ground (firm, level, dry)
___Load (capacity, weight known)
___Cable (kinks, damage, wear, capacity)
___Rigging (capacity, fittings, hardware, clips)
___Rigger (understanding of hand signals, roles, high
63
visibility vest)
___Hook (bent, twisted, safety catch, wear, cracks)
___Sheaves (cable fits, wear)
MOC
___Track or tires (clean, free of debris, condition)
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PRACTICE
1.0 Purpose, Scope and Applicability

1.1 anagement of Change (MOC) is a system to evalu-
M
ate, authorize and document changes before they are
made and ensure proper closure after the changes are
completed.
1.2 Its purpose is to establish the procedures necessary to

ensure that the risks arising from proposed changes
are managed to an acceptable level.
1.3 e MOC practice applies to all permanent, tempo-

Th
rary and emergency changes to organization, staffing
levels, systems, procedures, equipment, products,
materials or substances.
1.4 OC practice is also an excellent communica-

M
tion tool to inform impacted groups or areas that a
change is being considered and/or about to occur.
1.5 The practice is designed to insure compliance with

gHSSEr Element 7 and Group Process Safety and
Integrity Management Practice Element 2.
1.6 The practice covers modifications intended for

implementation by BP personnel and contractors, as
well as projects designed by an approved engineer-
64
ing contractor, but does not apply to project scope

changes which are managed by the engineering
contractor using their internal processes.
MOC
1.7 The practice should be applied when assessing any
significant change in BP operations in the (CGPU),
in particular:
Modifications to plant facilities and equipment
Changes to the organization
M
odifications to wells within the well integrity
envelope
Changes to critical information and procedures
Changes to IT systems and softwar
1.8 It is the intention of this process to highlight changes

that affect the original design intent of the facility,
which includes facility and equipment, organization-
al structures and supporting documentation, with
the intention of maintaining an auditable trial from
the original design through to the current status. The
application of this process provides this audit trail.

1.9 It is not necessary to follow this practice when:
R
outine activities covered by practice
maintenance and operations procedures (e.g.
scaffolding) are undertaken under other safety
management controls, such as safe systems of
work and permits
Carrying out replacement-in-kind work
R
eplacing an individual with someone having
the same competencies
I f you are not sure whether an MOC practice is
required, access this web link to an MOC deci-
sion tree:
65
Technical MOC Practice Decision Tree
1.10 A Temporary change is not intended to be perma-

MOC
nent (e.g. 30, 60, 90 days) and will not exceed the
indicated timeframe for the change without an ad-
ditional authorization and review. SmartMOC can
be used to record the termination/reassessment date
and forward a reminder task to the SPA.
1.11 A
n Emergency Change is one in which personnel
assume the responsibility to make a change without
invoking the full MOC practice. This type of change
is justified when the following circumstances exist:
Immediate danger to personnel
Potential for major equipment damage
Potential for major operational loss
Serious environmental impact
Community complaint
Regulatory violation
In spite of the fact that emergency change initially by passes
the formal change process, it is vital that there be at least
one review with a minimum of three people, preferably
from different disciplines and the change must be approved
by a Technical Authority or line supervisor. Only in true
life-or-death situations where minutes count can a single
person assume full responsibility for making a change
without reviewing that change with others. The formal ap-
plication of the MOC practice must follow the emergency
change as soon as possible.
1.12 Organizational Change can range from substitu-

tion of personnel to the elimination of positions.
Changes to the organizations structure and respon-
sibilities are reflected in HSSE responsibilities and
accountabilities; therefore, organizational change
whether permanent or temporary must formally
assess and recorded.
66
1.13 A
n Administrative Change is one that impacts a pol-
icy, procedure, process or form and includes changes
from regulators or outside agencies. These changes
stand alone and are not initiated as the consequence
MOC
of a Technical or Organizational change. Policies,
procedures, processes or forms affected as a result of
a Technical or Organizational change are resolved as
part of the original instigating change.
1.14 M
anaging a change to a DCS (Distributed Control
System) or a SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition) system requires completion of specific
records for assurance. Details of how to manage this
type of change are available at the following web
link:
MOC practice for SCADA Change Worksheet
2.0 Roles and Responsibilities
2.1 I n summary, the MOC practice requires com-

petent personnel in the following three areas:
I nitial approval and risk assessment: Facilitator
and Approval Authorities
I mplementation of change: Single Person Ac-
countable, Gatekeeper and Assurance role
P
erformance Unit technical authority frame-
work: Engineering Authorities, Technical
Authorities and Technical Reviewers
2.2 The key process roles in the MOC practice are the
Facilitator and Approval Authorities. They have the
following roles and responsibilities:
2.2.1 The Facilitator:

Facilitators will be appointed for each major site
67
or group of smaller sites

Th
ey are typically the Management of Change or
Process Safety Management Coordinators
MOC
F
acilitators must be properly trained in the
change assessment methodology being used
Th
ey should have detailed knowledge of the site,
its hazards and procedures
The Facilitators are responsible for:
o L
ogging data associated with the change into
the SmartMOC system
o Selecting the appropriate method of assess-
ment and managing the process
o Identifying which Technical Authorities
should be involved in the assessment of risk
associated with a given change proposal
o M
aking recommendations, including condi-
tions for implementation and such monitor-
ing requirements as deemed necessary, to the
Approval Authority
o E
nsuring that the assessment team includes all
necessary knowledge and competence for the
change being assessed
o M
aintaining a record of the status of all MOC
practice documentation
o Recommending improvements to this proce-
dure
Note: The Facilitator and the Approval Authorities cannot
be the same person
2.2.2 The Approval Authority:

A
pproval Authorities should be appointed for
each major site or group of smaller sites
Th
ey will typically be the Manager, or their
designate(s) based on their role, responsibility,
accountability and delegation of authority
The formal delegation of authority for MOC
68
practice within CGPU can be accessed at the

following web link:
MOC
Approval Authority for MOC practice
The Approval Authority is responsible for:
o Initial approval or rejection, within the
Performance context, of a change to proceed
to assessment
o Nominating a Facilitator to manage the assess-
ment
o S etting the initial workflow schedule for the
change
o Accepting the outcome of the assessment and
approving, or not, the change to move to
implementation. In this role, if appropriate,
they will identify the implementation process
o E
nsuring that any changes stay within defined
scope and that the recommendations from the
assessment are fully implemented
o E
nsuring that the roles within the MOC prac-
tice are carried out by competent personnel
o Feedback to the Originator or Facilitator
when rejecting a proposal
o E
nsuring appropriate financial support for the
change
Note: The Facilitator and the Approval Authority cannot be
the same person
2.3 The key process roles in the implementation of any

approved change are the SPA, the Gatekeeper and
the Assurance role. They have the following roles
and responsibilities:
2.3.1 The Single Point Accountable role (SPA):

Th
e SPA person will be recommended as part of
the approval process
69
The SPA is responsible for:

o Implementation and management of the ap-
proved change through the MOC practice
MOC
o Implementing recommendations from an

MOC practice, including updating documen-
tation
o M
aintaining the change within the scope
assessed by the MOC practice and ensuring
that any changes to the scope are adequately
assessed
o Completing the Pre-Startup Compliance
Review when the change is managed using the
MOC practice
2.3.2 The Gatekeeper role:
Th
e Gatekeeper will be recommended as part of
the approval process if the change is managed
outside the MOC practice
The Gatekeeper will typically be responsible for:
o The funding budget, but the Approval

Authority will be responsible if the change is
implemented within the MOC practice
o Approving the stages of the implementation
process, in particular, sanction of the scope,
cost and timescale
o Providing or obtaining resources for imple-
mentation of the change
o Completing the Pre-Startup Compliance
Review when the change is managed using an
outside process
2.3.3 The Assurance role:
W
ill be recommended as part of the approval
process and will typically be the Facilitator
The Assurance role is responsible for:
o Attesting that the change has addressed the
risks and actions identified in the assessment
70
o Attesting that the change has been controlled

within the scope of the original MOC as-
sessment, or that any changes to the original
scope have been adequately assessed
MOC
o L
iaising with the Gatekeeper, during imple-
men tation of the change through
another process, to ensure adequate resources
are available
o Assisting the SPA or Gatekeeper to document
the Pre-Startup Compliance Review
2.4 e Performance Unit Technical Authority Frame-

Th
work:
o The key roles in the CGPU Technical Author-
ity framework supporting MOC practice are
Engineering Authorities, Technical Authorities
and Technical Reviewers
o The roles and responsibilities of these authori-
ties are detailed in the CGPU Engineering
and Technical Authorities Register
o The Register can be accessed through the fol-
lowing web link:
Technical Authorities Register Rev 2
2.4.1 Th
e Engineering Authoritys responsibilities
for MOC practice are:
T
echnical approval authority for MOC practice
proposals defined as high risk
A
ssures compliance with the engineering aspects
of Management of Change
2.4.2 Th
e Technical Authoritys responsibilities for
MOC practice are:
T
echnical approval authority for MOC practice
proposals defined as medium risk providing:
o Independent assessment of the risks associated
with the proposed change
o Review of the key documents related to the
71
proposed change
o Specification of the maximum implementa-
tion period for temporary modifications
MOC
o Independent technical arbitration

2.4.3 Th
e Technical Reviewers responsibilities for
MOC practice are:
A
ct as the point of contact for MOC practice
requests at the facility level within their assigned
discipline for changes defined as low risk
P
rovide requested technical advice and recom-
mendations within the required time frame
S pecify the maximum duration permitted for
temporary deviations
P
articipate in Process Hazards Analyses as is ap-
propriate
C
hair or participate in Management of Change
technical and safety reviews
A
ct as point of contact for new projects in area of
competency
E
valuate risk associated with each decision or
recommendation carefully and base technical
recommendations on reasonable risk
3.0 Supporting Technology
3.1 The SmartMOC software program developed by Dya-

dem International, in relationship with CGPU, is the
database that supports MOC practice in the CGPU.
All facilities are encouraged to utilize the SmartMOC
program as it insures management of the process. A
log-in name and password are required to access the
software and can be obtained from your PSMC. The
software can be accessed at the following website:
SmartMOC Log-in Page
4.0 Process Description
72
4.1 All potential changes that are assessed by the MOC

practice are carried out through the following main
MOC
process steps. SmartMOC automates this workflow
so that as each step is completed, the change
advances to the next step and advises the identified
resource to expedite the change.
4.2 Initiation Step:

A
ny BP employee or full time contractor in
CGPU may initiate a change proposal under the
MOC practice
A
t this stage, the Initiator has the greatest knowl-
edge of the change and needs to communicate
that information in sufficient detail to eliminate
delays in the evaluation of the change and in-
clude any supporting or relevant documentation
The Initiator should:
o Identify the type of change: Technical, Admin-
istrative* or Organizational*
o Identify the implementation type: Permanent,
Temporary* or Emergency*
o Identify the location of the change, the date
initiated, their name and if they are represent-
ing others
o S martMOC shares the Maximo equipment
database. The database can be searched to
identify the equipment affected by the change
o Identify a title for the change.
o A unique file number will be generated by
Smart MOC
D
efine the reason or scope of the proposed
change by including any relevant history or back-
ground of the problem or opportunity and any
other pertinent information
Identify the high-level risks they may be aware
73
of associated with the change during its imple-

mentation, e.g. hot work required, equipment
shutdown, etc.
MOC
I nclude the potential opportunities presented

by the proposed change to improve things like
safety, integrity, production, environment, etc.
S uggest a high-level plan for achieving the
change. How would you make the change?
Estimate the cost of the change
I dentify the Preliminary Approval Authority.
This will generally be the Initiators direct report
supervisor, but can be whomever is appropriate
to approve the change being proposed
R
ecord the details in the Initiator Section of the
SmartMOC program and attach any supporting
documentation
* NOTE: Not available in Phase 1 deployment of Smart-

MOC, but the type can be noted in the comments section
and a task created for the removal date of a temporary
change.
4.3 Preliminary Approval Step:

o Based on the details presented in the Initiator
section the Approval Authority assesses if the
change proposal is worthwhile, taking into
account Performance context, likely cost and
benefits
o If satisfied, the Approval Authority then
endorses the change in principal, assigns a
suitable Facilitator to carry out the Change
Assessment, and sets the initial workflow
schedule
o If the Approval Authority rejects the proposal,
the reason for rejection is recorded and the
process terminated with the feedback being
given to the Initiator
74
o Record the details in the Approval Section of

the SmartMOC program
MOC
4.4 Change Assessment Step - General:
O
n acceptance of the assignment, the Facilitator
will instigate the change assessment:
o E
nsure that the scope of the change and sup-
porting information is clear
o E
nsure that all relevant information required
to assess the risks are identified and gathered
o Notify the appropriate evaluation personnel
and/or Technical Authorities
o Carry out the risk assessment with the ap-
propriate personnel
o Select the appropriate method for risk assess-
ment. Additional guidance on Process
o Hazard Analysis is available at the following
web link: http://psmcanada.bpweb.bp.com
A
detailed record of the assessment should be at-
tached to the SmartMOC file by the Facilitator.
This should include:

o Further clarification of the scope of the change
if required
o The assumptions associated with the change
o Whether or not the change has been under-
taken before
o The rationale behind the assessment technique
selected
o The risks that are associated with all stages of
the change
o The mitigation measures required
o The plan to put in place the mitigation mea-
sures and the change
o Recommendations to proceed or reject the
75
change
o Recommendations on the way that the modi-
fication should be implemented
MOC
o R
ecommendations for the SPA and/or the
Gatekeeper
4.5 Change Assessment Step - Technical Change:

O
nly a trained Facilitator can perform certain
types of Process Hazard Analyses. A list of
trained Facilitators within CGPU is available at
the following web link:
BP CGPU Facilitators
o M
ake an initial determination of the risk level
to identify the level of Technical Authority
required to approve the change
o Review safe process start-up, operation and
shutdown in the full range of foreseeable
conditions and scenarios including upsets
to insure the risks are reduced to as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP)
o Review all activities required to maintain facil-
ity in a safe condition during the change
o Identify all activities required to insure a fully
functioning health, safety and environmental
protection program, and vigorous process
safety and integrity management systems
o I dentify and include effects of the change on
the Emergency Response Plan
o Identify the Process Safety Information or
other documentation that will need to be
produced or updated as a result of the change
4.6 Change Assessment Step - Organizational Change:

Th
e key objective is to ensure that the changed
organization has the resources (human, time, in-
76
formation, etc.), competency and motivation to

deliver without making unrealistic expectations
of people
MOC
The risk assessment should use two approaches:
o M
apping of tasks and individuals from the old
to the new organization
o Scenario assessments should be made where
the reorganization impacts staff that may have
a role in handling or responding to crises such
as upsets and emergencies
o A knowledge based checklist to aid in assess-
ing organizational change are available at the
following web link:
Organizational Change Checklist
4.7 Change Assessment Step - Administrative Change:

I dentify affected documents, systems, processes
and procedures
E
nsure ISO-14001 document requirements are
met if they are affected
4.8 Change Recommendation Step:
Th
e Facilitator determines if there is a need to
identify a different Approval Authority based
on the category and ranking of the greatest risk
identified in the assessment
Th
e Facilitator meets with the Approval Author-
ity and briefs them on the output of the assess-
ment
B
ased on the results of the change assessment,
the Facilitator recommends whether the risks
associated with the change can be managed
A
t this session the Approval Authority should
make a check on the quality of the assessment
and documentation
The implementation route for the change should
77
also be discussed at the meeting

Th
e risk ranking also sets the workflow manager
in SmartMOC. The workflow manager tracks
MOC
the completion of the change and monitors sub-

sequent steps in the process and sends reminders
if critical timelines approach
R
ecord the details in the Assessment Section
of the SmartMOC program and attach any
checklists or PHA files developed
4.9 Sanctioning the Change Step:

Based
on the review meeting, the Approval Au-
thority is responsible for deciding if the change is
justified
I f it is, then the Approval Authority decides
whether the change will be implemented using
this MOC practice or another process. Other
processes can include the Project Management
Plan or other internal/external process
B
y sanctioning the change, the Approval Author-
ity is confirming that funding for the change is
also sanctioned
I f not approved to proceed, the Approval
Authority records the decision not to implement
the change and informs the Facilitator and the
Initiator
R
ecord the details in the Approval Section of
SmartMOC
4.10 Assurance Step:

A
s part of the handover, the Approval Authority
will identify the Assurance role
Th
e Assurance Role will verify that all the
requirements identified in the process to manage
the change and its risks are completed satisfac-
torily and there is a clear, transparent audit trail
78
through supporting documentation

Th
is assurance is defined in the Records Assur-
ance Form and the Pre-Startup Compliance
MOC
Review documentation
Th
e Assurance Role will perform this verification
step regardless of how the change is implemented
R
ecord the details in the Assurance Section of
SmartMOC.
4.11 Handover Step:

O
nce approval has been given for the imple-
mentation the information and risks associated
with the change are communicated to the person
responsible for implementing the change
Th
ere are two types of handover associated with
change management:
o H
anding over the assessment using the MOC
practice to an Single Point Accountable (SPA)
person to implement the change
o anding over the remaining change
H
management activity to a Gatekeeper for
another supporting process or procedure to
manage the change
R
ecord the details in the Handover Section of
SmartMOC
4.12 H
andover for Implementation Using the MOC prac-
tice:
W
hen a change has been sanctioned, and the
Approval Authority decides that it can be imple-
mented within this MOC practice, the job will
be handed over to the Single Point Accountable
person to implement the change
C
hanges that are implemented using the MOC
practice remain the responsibility of the Approval
Authority
The SPA is responsible for planning, organizing,
79
leading and controlling all resources associated

with completing the change:
o Th
e SPA can utilize SmartMOC to manage
MOC
tasks associated with completing the change

o PHA recommendations can be uploaded and
managed in SmartMOC directly from PHA
Pro software if it was utilized to record the
hazard analysis
I f at any time the SPA cannot make the change
within the defined scope, the equipment should
be made safe and an additional MOC practice
raised to consider the additional changes
required
R
ecord the details in the SPA Section of
SmartMOC
4.13 H
andover for Implementation by a Supporting
Process or Procedure:
W
hen a job has been sanctioned, and the
Approval Authority decides that it will be
implemented outside this MOC practice, the
change will be handed over to a Gatekeeper for
implementation in another supporting process or
procedure
Th
e supporting process is responsible for delivery
of the change
C
hanges that are implemented in this way
become the responsibility of the Gatekeeper
C
hanges to be implemented by supporting pro-
cesses or procedures will not be closed out in the
MOC practice until signed off by the Approval
Authority
R
ecord the details Gatekeeper Section of
SmartMOC
4.14 Close Out Step:

Changes that are sanctioned and managed within
80
the MOC practice, or another process, will be

kept open until the SPA or Gatekeeper informs
the Assurance Role that the change and all sup-
porting documentation is completed
MOC
W
hen the Assurance role has verified the change
is complete, they will inform the Approval
Authority that the change has been completed
within the scope of the assessment and that the
associated work and documentation is complete
Th
e Approval Authority will review the change
and confirm acceptance of the change by signing
off the MOC practice file as complete
Th
e records of the MOC practice will be kept
until the end of the facilitys life
R
ecord the details in the Completion Section
of SmartMOC
5.0 Support for Management of Change
5.1 Training for awareness of MOC practice is manda-

tory for all CGPU personnel. To facilitate the train-
ing, e-Training modules have been developed and are
accessed at the following web link:
Management of Change Practice Training
5.2 SmartMOC also has a comprehensive Help screen

system that explains the software in detail.
5.3 Super Users have been identified for each Operat-

ing Centre and staff department in Calgary to aid
personnel with the transition to the new procedure
and software. For a list of these helpful and knowl-
edgeable individuals access the following web link:
MOC practice Coordinators by Area
81
6.0 Performance Measurement
6.1 The performance of the system will be assessed using

the following Key Performance Indicators:
MOC
N
umber of MOC practices closed out in time
(e.g. all formal documentation was completed
within 90 days of start-up)
N
umber of high risk MOC practices whose
close-out is overdue
7.0 Audit and Performance Review
7.1 e Engineering Authority for CGPU (Manager,

Th
Technical Integrity Group), or delegate, will monitor
compliance with the MOC practice on an annual
basis to confirm:
The process is being correctly applied
A
ppropriate risk assessment processes are being
conducted
T
echnical Authorities are being involved appro-
priately
T
emporary and permanent MOC practices are
closed out in a timely manner
8.0 Online Reference Documents
g HSSEr requirements of MOC
Getting HSSE Right
P
SIM Practice Implementation Guide
Element 2 - MOC
SmartMOC software SmartMOC Log-in Page
E
-Training Modules for MOC
Management of Change Training
E
ngineering & Tech. Authorities Register
Technical Authorities Register Rev 2
D
elegation of Authority for MOC
Approval Authority for MOC
82
Process Hazard Analysis Manual PSM/PHA

CGPU PHA Facilitators BP CGPU Facilitators
M
OC practice Coordinators by Area
MOC
MOC Coordinators by Area
M
OC practice for DCS & SCADA Changes
MOC for SCADA Change Worksheet
D
o I need an MOC?
Technical MOC Decision Tree
http://psmcanada.bpweb.bp.com
9.0 Forms
M
anagement of Organizational Change Checklist
gHSSEr MF36101
Pre-Start-up Compliance Review gHSSEr MF 36104
HSSE Review Checklist HSSEMF36102
Technical Review Checklist HSSEMF36103
Records Assurance Checklist HSSEMF36105
C
hemical Assessment & Ranking Tool
gHSSEr MF36106
C
hecklist for Organizational Change
Organizational Change Checklist
E
quipment Specific Knowledge Based Checklists
Equipment Checklists
83
Figure 1
Process Safety Management

Technical Integrity Group
Canada Gas Performance Unit
MOC
M A N A G E M E N T O F C H A N G E
Technical Management of Change Decision Tree
84
Figure 2
MOC
85
Figure 3
MOC
86
PERMIT TO WORK AND HAZARD ASSESSMENT

PRACTICE
Permit to Work
1.0 Scope and applicability
1.1 This practice applies to all BP Canada Gas

Performance Unit (CGPU) employees, contracted
employees, contractors and other visiting personnel
doing work on CGPU premises and work sites.
1.2 This practice addresses issuing and obtaining permits

to work within the CGPU and requirements for
completing task level hazard assessments.
1.3 e purpose of this practice is to ensure that CGPU

Th
employees, contracted employees, and contractor
staff use the proper permit to work and complete an
adequate task hazard assessment for the particular
job being undertaken.
1.4 The types of permits covered in this Practice are:

Hot work permits
Cold work permits
Confined space permits
Ground disturbance permits
1.5 The types of hazard assessments covered in this

Practice are:
Permit to Work and Hazard Assessment
Procedure
Job Safety Environmental Analysis (JSEA)
Stop Think Go
Time Out for Safety
87
1.6 Refer to North America Gas SPU Control of Work

Practice for requirements around permitted activities
Permit to Work
and risk assessment requirements.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 rea Authority (AA)- The Area Authority is the

A
person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team
Leader for confirming all work activities conducted
are consistent with the COW Practice and associated
practices and permit requirements. In the case of
major projects, the Project Manager, in consultation
with the OCM or Wells Team Leader, will assign
the AA. This role can be delegated to another person
who is a BP Employee or contractor.
2.2 I ssuing Authority (IA)- The Issuing Authority is

the person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team
Leader- and assigned by the AA for issuing permits
consistent with all associated practice and permit re-
quirements. In the case of major projects, the Project
Manager, in consultation with the AA, will assign the
IA.
2.3 erforming Authority (PA)- The PA is the person

P
who has been assigned by the AA to be responsible
for activities carried out on the work site, and is
accountable to the IA/AA for the safe delivery of all
work activities. Tha PA may be performing a task or
may be supervising a group that is performing a task.
In special cases the PA may also be the IA if compe-
tent in the practice and requirements in question.
2.4 erson in Charge (PIC)- The PIC is appointed by the

P
AA to be responsible for coordinating among mul-
tiple PAs and IAs working at one site to confrim safe
delivery of all work activities. The PIC is an onsite
88
individual that has working knowledge of all work

activities being performed by all groups/personnel
Permit to Work
working on location. The PIC can be the AA. IA, or
one of the PAs.
2.5 rocedure A step by step description of how to

P
proceed from start to finish in performing a task
properly.
2.6 J ob Safety Environmental Analysis/(JSEA) A

document that has been approved for use by the
BP representative in charge or by a contractor that
details the job steps, hazards and controls. BP JSEA
are documented on form gHSSEr MF34002 and BP
NAG JSEAs are documented here- NA Gas JSEA
Process.
3.0 Scope of Responsibility and Accountability
3.1 Each Operating Center Manager, Wells Team Leader,

and Major Project Manager is accountable for ensur-
ing that:
A
work permit and hazard assessment system
is implemented to control the hazards at the
worksite
W
orkers are appropriately trained and competent
in its use
3.2 The Area Authority will:

E
nsure that a proper permit is issued for the type
of work being undertaken and that everyone
involved is aware of the hazards, controls and
emergency procedures
E
nsure appropriate permits are issued, closed,
and filed
Identify a Person in Charge (PIC) for each
89
worksite prior to commencement of activity and

approve any replacements
Permit to Work
A
ssign a compenent Issuing Authority (IA)
and/or Performing Authority (PA) for each work
site and/or activity
C
onfirm with the IA that all appropriate control
measures have been, or will be, put in place prior
to commencement of activity
R
equire that the IA and site work group perform
a risk assessment and agree that needed risk
mitigation has occurred and that the work can
proceed safely
E
nsure an assessment of the hazards associated
with the work being performed and control
measures are identified as part of the permitting
process
V
erify that all required testing, inspection and
checking of the work site is completed prior to
the work permit being issued
E
nsure that the work area is inspected and
checked after the job is completed
3.3 The Issuing Authority (IA) is accountable for ensur-

ing that:
W
orkers are aware of STOP-THINK-GO and
Time Out for Safety from their Level 1 indoc-
trination and feel comfortable being able to use
those tools
W
orkers are indoctrinated/orientated prior to
work starting and have all the required tickets
and certifications for the job or task
Th
ere is proper issuance and closure of permits
in their area of competnecy, e.g cold work, hot
work, confined space entry, ground disturbance,
or critical lifting
Th
ey are on site for permit issuance and then as
required as per specific task requirements
90
Th
ey review with all site personnel a site specific
emergency response plan
Permit to Work
C
oordinate with the PIC and maintain full
knowledge of all work in progress in the area
concerned, imcluding any work that is under
someone elses authority/control, i.e. SIMOPS
Th
ere is good cummunication with the AA about
the issuance and closure of permits
A
ll site personnel involved in a work activity are
competent and correctly oufitted for the wok
they will perform.
W
orkers have clear understanding of the scope of
work, hazards, controls, and mitigations
Th
e correct tools and equipment are available
and appropriate certifications and/or inspections
are reviewed or made as appropriate
Th
e required permits are in place and that
work undertaken on site is consistent with, and
confined to, the original scope of work
3.4 The Performing Authority (PA) is responsible for:

C
onfirming that the following have been clearly
established, communicated, and understood:
a process for the transfer of Control of Work
between work groups, what procedures and poli-
cies will be followed (e.g. what permit tracking
system will be used), and who is in charge
V
erifying the permit and hazard assessment is
reviewed by all workers associated with the job
prior to them starting work on the job, even
if they were not present while completing the
permit
I nforming the Issuing Authority of any changes
in conditions, and for understanding and follow-
ing the conditions of the permit
E
nsuging adequate handovers take place between
ingoing and outgoing PAs at shift and crew
91
change periods
A
ccepting and signing authorized permits for the
Permit to Work
work activity being performed

P
articipating in the risk assessment for the
planned activity
C
onfirming, by including in the JSEA discus-
sion, that all persons involved in the task fully
understand the scope of the work, hazards, and
controls for the job
C
onfirming that all members of the work party
sign the permit
C
onfirming that only work within the scope of
the permit takes place
C
onfirming that the worksite is kept in a clean
and safe condition both during and upon
completion of the job
C
onfirming that appropriate lessions learned
from the job are captured, incorporated, and
shared
C
onforming all workers involved in the permit-
ted work activity sign the JSEA and permits(s)
acknowledging their understanding and agree-
ment. In the event that there is more than one
work team, there will be representation from
each team during the risk assessment
O
bserving work activities and if an individual
feels that he/she cannot safely manage more
than one concurrent task, stop the appropriate
portions is assigned work and request assistance
from the IA/AA
3.5 e Person in Charge (PIC) is responsible for ensur-

Th
ing that their permitting system meets this Practice
and complies with the CGPU permit to work
system. They must receive written authority from
the Operating Center Manager, Wells Team Leader,
or Major Project Manager to use their permitting
92
system at a CGPU work site. Otherwise, the CGPU

permit to work system will be used.
Permit to Work
The Person in Charge will:
F
unction as a liason between all personnel and
groups on location
C
oordinate any issues that could result in a
change in work scope with the AA
C
onfirm that all people working on site have
reviewed and signed the JSEA(s)/permits and
verified that the appropriate permits have been
completed
R
emain on site until work activities have
stopped, permits are closed, and appropriate
equipment has been secured for the shift
4.1 ll workers will acquire the appropriate permit and

A
conduct the appropriate hazard assessment for the
type of work they are about to perform.
4.2 ll workers are instructed on work permitting and

A
hazard assessment requirements as part of their
site-specific orientation training (see gHSSEr MS312
Indoctrinations, Orientations & Monitoring).
4.3 e work area should be inspected for all hazards

Th
by the Issuing Authority prior to issuing the permit.
Items for consideration include the hazards associ-
ated with a potentially flammable atmosphere, need
for isolation and/or purging, presence of combustible
materials, conflicting jobs in the area and availability
of fire fighting equipment.
4.4 e Issuing Authority keeps the green and white

Th
copies of the permit and hazard assessment. The
93
receiver keeps the goldenrod copy of the permit and

hazard assessment when doing the work and they
Permit to Work
will return the form when the work is completed

or it is the end of the shift. This expectation does
not apply for work that is self-permitted. When the
work is completed, the green copy of the form may
be provided to the contractor for their records. See
section 6.0 for more information.
4.5 new permit is issued at the beginning of every

A
shift. At the end of the work, the Issuing Authority
indicates if the job is completed, the equipment is
ready to be started and the work area is cleaned.
4.6 ll permits and hazard assessments become void if

A
an emergency occurs at the location that may or may
not be related to the scope of work covered by that
specific permit and hazard assessment form.
5.0 Completing the Work Permit and Hazard

Assessment
5.1 e work permit form, gHSSEr MF 88001 has four

Th
main parts. The form is completed with input from
all people participating in the job.
5.2 Complete the basic job information in Part 1. In

Part 1, check all Golden Rules that apply to the job.
If a procedure or JSEA exists that covers all or part
of the job, its name or number should be referenced
right after the question Procedure/JSEA available.
This document must be reviewed prior to starting
the job.
5.3 art 3 must be completed for all jobs that require a

P
work permit unless the job falls into one of the two
exceptions outlined in sections 5.5 or 5.8.
94
5.4 art 3 should be completed after the work area is

P
inspected.
Permit to Work
5.5 I f an approved procedure or JSEA covering the scope
of the entire job exists, completion of Part 3 is not
required. The procedure or JSEA must be referenced
in Part 1 and reviewed prior to starting the job.
5.6 Review the questions in Part 2 and check each as

applicable or not applicable to the job. For questions
17 28, if the answer to the question is yes than
the control required to mitigate the hazard must be
identified in the column to the right of the question.
See appendix 1 for more information on the intent
of each question.
5.7 Using the hazards identified in Part 2, list the job

steps, the potential hazards associated with each step
and the controls needed to prevent the potential
adverse effect on people and the environment in Part
3:
I n the first column, describe the work identified
on the Permit, list the basic tasks for the job in
order and identify what is to be done, not how to
do it
I n the second column, consider the hazards as-
sociated with the job, focus on each job task and
identify actual and potential hazards including
hazards from the job itself, hazards from the
work area, chemical hazards and physical hazards
I n the third column, list the controls, procedures
or actions the team will take to control the
hazard associated with the job step in the third
column
I f part 3 does not provide sufficient space for
identifying job steps, hazards and controls, use
form gHSSEr MF 34002 either as a separate
95
document or stamped on the back of the Gold-

enrod copy of the form
Permit to Work
5.8 I f the job involves any of the following, Part 3 is not

to be completed and a job specific JSEA using form
gHSSEr MF 34002 must be completed:
J obs which require a rescue plan (not a response
plan but a job where physical rescue may be
required such as class 2 or 3 confined space,
work at heights using fall arrest, work requiring
SCBA/SABA)
J obs which require entry into a Class 2 or 3
confined space
Jobs which require ground disturbance
Jobs which require critical lift plans
J obs where the BP or contractor representative
deem that an additional hazard assessment is
required
5.9 The required atmospheric testing must be completed

as per section 7.5 and documented on Part 4 of the
work permit.
5.10 E
ach person that participated in the permit and
hazard assessment must print their name and initial
in Part 4.
5.11 At the conclusion of the job or at the end of the

shift, the 3 questions (Job Completed, Work Area
Cleaned, Contractor Locks Removed) located at the
bottom of the work permit should be checked yes or
no and the form returned to the Issuing Authority.
5.12 I f the JSEA developed for the job is deemed ap-

propriate for future use, it should be approved for
on-going use by the BP representative in charge.
96
6.0 Scope of Self-Permitting
Permit to Work
6.1 any activities conducted in the Gas Business Unit
M
are done in isolation of other workers. Workers must
follow this Practice but are allowed to issue their own
permits and document their own hazard assessments
for certain work.
6.2 In order for a worker to issue their own permits, they
must have a Level 2 Indoctrination and have demon-
strated a level of competence in completing the job
to the BP representative in charge or designate.
6.3 S elf-permitting can be conducted by BP employees,

full time equivalent contractors (FTEs) and other
designated contractors.
6.4 S elf-permitting cannot be conducted on a location

where operating staff attend the facility for the
majority of a shift. At these locations, the Issuing
Authority issues the permit to the worker to ensure
proper communication in the event of simultaneous
operations or conflicting jobs.
6.5 A self-issued permit can be prepared for any job

involving cold work, hot work, energy isolation,
ground disturbance (if the worker has current Level
2 ground disturbance training), lifting and work at
heights where worker safety is addressed through
engineering controls. Self permitting (working
alone) is not allowed for any job requiring work at
heights in which the fall protection plan does not ad-
dress the provisions for self rescue in the event of an
arresting fall. Self permitting is not allowed for any
job requiring entry into a class 2 or 3 confined space.
6.6 The worker requiring the permit must contact the
97
Issuing Authority for the location prior to starting

work to advise of the work being conducted and
Permit to Work
determine potential hazards to the worker.
6.7 nce the job is complete, the worker signs off the
O
permit and contacts the Issuing Authority to advise
the status of the work and that the worker is leaving
location. Arrangements are made to provide a copy
of the completed permit to the Issuing Authority.
6.8 Requirements 6.6 and 6.7 do not apply if the work is

being done by the Issuing Authority.
6.9 If the worker is visiting more than one location in

a day to perform a similar task, one permit can be
completed for the entire day. Each location is clearly
identified on Part 1 of the form and the worker dis-
cusses each location with the Issuing Authority prior
to starting work that day. When the worker arrives at
each location, he or she reviews the permit to assess if
all hazards have been identified and updates the form
and implements the new hazard controls.
6.10 Other site specific requirements such as working

alone procedures and working with H2S will also
apply when self-permitting.
7.0 Scope of Hot Work Permits
7.1 Hot Work means:

c utting, welding, burning, air gouging, riveting,
drilling, grinding, chipping, buffing
the use of non-classified electrical equipment
t he introduction to a work process of a combus-
tion engine
any other work where flame is used or sparks are
98
produced
work on electric cables and equipment
Permit to Work
7.2 Hot Work Permits are issued where the atmosphere
could become in excess of 0% LEL and/or there is a
potential for a fire and/or explosion, or if electricity
or static charges exists.
7.3 safety standby person may be required as per

A
site specific procedures for any hot work to be per-
formed. The only duty of the safety standby person
is to observe the job and be able to communicate
with others should assistance be required. The
safety standby person must have immediate access to
emergency equipment such as a fire extinguisher, gas
detector and two-way radio or other means of com-
munication. For more information, please reference
Safety Standby in SSPM.
7.4 nder no circumstances will any hot work activity

U
be permitted where LEL is greater than 10%. Work
must be completed to eliminate the source of the gas
release.
7.5 Where atmospheric testing is required during hot

work and confined space work, the employer will en-
sure that continuous monitoring of oxygen, H2S and
LEL hazards are done and that tests are documented
at regular intervals (i.e. prior to starting work and
after each break as a minimum). The test results must
be documented on form gHSSEr MF 88001.
8.0 Scope of Cold Work Permits
8.1 Cold work permits are issued for work where there
is no danger for fire or explosion based on the tools
99
and equipment being used for the job and the

atmosphere will remain normal for human respira-
Permit to Work
tion. Examples include lifting, entry into a Level 1

confined space and work at heights.
8.2 The atmosphere must remain normal for human

respiration.
8.3 No permit is required for the following jobs:

A worker taking readings
A
worker making external adjustments to the
process (changing valve positions, equipment
settings etc.)
D
aily, weekly and monthly housekeeping activi-
ties
B
P tradesperson working in their respective
shops unless their work meets the definition of
hot work
A
worker taking other visitors on a tour of a
facility for the sole purpose of observation (i.e.
SOCs, HSSE inspections, review of new facilities
installation). A permit is required if photos will
be taken in a potentially explosive atmosphere
A
dditions may be made to the above list by area
management after a documented hazard assess-
ment of the work is completed and reviewed
by a team consisting of the Area Authority, the
Operating Center Manager, Wells Team Leader
(if applicable), Major Project Manager (if ap-
plicable), the BP safety coordinator and at least
one representative of the affected workers
9.0 Scope of Confined Space Permits
9.1 Confined space permits are issued for entry into a

Class 2 or Class 3 confined space. See Confined
100
Space Practice gHSSEr MS820 for complete details.
Permit to Work
10.0 Scope of Ground Disturbance Permits

10.1 Ground disturbance permits are issued for any work
operation or activity that results in a disturbance of
the earth. It applies to all pipeline right-of-ways,
company leases, construction sites. See Ground
Disturbance Practice gHSSEr MS840 for complete
details.
11.0 Changing Area Authority
11.1 A work permit and hazard assessment is required

when the area authority for an existing lease dis-
charges their accountabilities to wells or construc-
tion. For example, during a workover of an existing
well or when construction is taking place at an
existing location.
11.2 The following components of the permit are com-

pleted to document a lease turn-over:
The date, location and time
U
nder work description, insert an expected end
date
C
omplete Part 2 only to reflect the hazards of the
location at the time of the turn over:
o Identify if multiple types of operations will
need to take place at the location and the pro-
cedure for checking-in with the area authority
(i.e. well work and daily operator checks)
o Identify any concerns or potential hazards
with permanent equipment or materials
on-site and document any energy isolation
applied
o Identify if there are WHMIS controlled prod-
101
ucts on-site as part of permanent operations

o Identify the linkage of site activities with the
Permit to Work
emergency response plan for the area

o Q
uestions 2, 4, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28 must be answered to
reflect the status of the lease and the hazards
associated with the permanent equipment
on-site
Part 3 does not need to be completed
A
single atmospheric test should be completed
and documented prior to lease turn-over
Th
e issuer is the current area authority and the
receiver is the new area authority
11.3 T
o discharge area authority accountabilities back to
the original area authority, the job completed box
should be checked yes on the original form, and the
date and initials of the person accepting the lease
should be written near the check-box. This task
should be completed after the condition of the site is
reviewed by the two Area Authorities.
11.4 F
or more information, please reference SSPM Well
Work Hand over between operations and Wells
Teams.
12.0 Assurance Process
12.1 People with SOC training can use the SOC process
to provide assurance that the permit to work Practice
is followed. An SOC can be conducted while a job
is in progress to link the hazards identified in the
discussion with what is documented on the permit.
12.2 All workers can use the job observation process to

provide assurance that the permit to work Practice is
102
followed. A job observation can be conducted while

a job is in progress, after the permit to work and
Permit to Work
hazard assessment form has been completed or at the
conclusion of the job to verify that the steps required
for completing a permit were followed.
13.0 Record Keeping
13.1 A
fter the work is completed, all work permits and
hazard assessment forms and associated documents
are signed off in accordance with the permit and
retained in the field office for a period 13 months.
14.1 A
lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as
amended
14.2 B
.C. Occupational Health and Safety Regulations
14.3 gHSSEr MS820 - Confined Space Practice
14.4 gHSSEr MS840 - Ground Disturbance Practice
14.5 g HSSEr MS 312 - Indoctrinations, Orientations and

Monitoring
14.6 NAG SPU Control of Work (COW) Policy

http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/on
shore/documents/K0000002586
103
15.0 Forms
Permit to Work
15.1 g HSSEr MF 88001 - Permit to Work and Hazard

Assessment Form
15.2 gHSSEr MF84001 - Ground Disturbance Permit
15.3 gHSSEr MF84001 - Confined Space Entry Permit
15.4 NAG JSEA Form NA Gas JSEA Process
Appendix 1
Details on the Intent of Work Permit and Hazard Assess-
ment Questions
Part 2 of the work permit and hazard assessment form

contains 28 questions. The questions were chosen because
they represent the majority of the hazards in our various
worksites and they build on learnings identified during
incident investigations.
Questions 1-16 are simple questions that can be answered

yes, no, or not applicable to the job. In some cases, a
line has been added so brief details for that question can
be identified. Questions 17-28 require a yes, no, or not
applicable to the job answer and for all questions answered
yes, the control measures required to mitigate the hazard
must be identified.
The following lists each question on the form, and provides

some interpretation on how to answer it.
1. Safety Stand by required? Name

F
or jobs that require a designated safety stand-by,
this question should be checked yes. This might
include entry into a class 2 or 3 confined space,
work at heights or use of mobile equipment in
an area with heavy foot traffic. If the question is
answered as yes, the name of the safety stand-by
104
should be written on the document. The roles

and responsibilities for that worker need to be
Permit to Work
reviewed prior to work starting.
2. ave conflicting activities/simultaneous operations

H
been identified? List:
I f there are other activities in the area that this
work will be taking place or simultaneous opera-
tions in the same area, the question should be
answered yes and those other activities listed in
the space provided. Part 3 should identify the
controls required for ensuring adequate commu-
nication between different activities. A separate
SIMOPS plan may need to be developed.
3. Is additional PPE required? Face/eyes

Chemical Protection Respiratory Fall Protection
Hands/Gloves
Th
e minimum required PPE is listed near the top
of the form. This question addresses other PPE
that may be required. If any boxes are checked, a
space is provided to specifically identify the item
or items of PPE that are required. It should be
clear to all workers if additional PPE is required
at all times during the job or only during specific
times.
4. rea safe for personnel/vehicle entry? Record test

A
below.
Th
is question is focused on air quality. Oxygen,
LEL and H2S (if applicable) should be checked
prior to work commencing and documented on
Part 4 of the form.
5. Will workers be getting down from equipment or

climbing off of equipment? 3-point contact, step off
dont jump off.
105
A
significant number of recordable injuries are
related to workers getting down from equipment
Permit to Work
at various heights. If workers need to access

work areas or equipment at heights, this question
reinforces the need to descend using caution and
maintaining a 3-point contact.
6. Have all locations that pertain to the job been

reviewed? (Secondary locations-dump sites, assembly
points, permit area)
S ome jobs require work in multiple locations.
If materials are being transferred from one area
to another or if there is a second muster point
close to where the work will be taking place, this
location should be noted on the form.
7. SDS for WHMIS Controlled products affecting

M
job is available and understood? List WHMIS
controlled products.
Th
e MSDS for all WHMIS Controlled products
must be reviewed before handling these materials
so adequate controls may be put in place such as
ventilation or PPE. The MSDS does not need to
be at the work site but the information must be
available to workers by phone or radio.
8. Do workers need job specific certifications?

D
ocumented training is required for some
jobs in addition to what is asked at the Level 1
indoctrination (H2S and WHMIS). If specific
certifications are required (i.e. crane operator,
first aid, confined space) answer the question yes
and list the training required on the space in the
form. Tickets demonstrating training must be
verified.
106
9. Have all tools and equipment that pertain to the job

been identified and checked to be in good condition?
Permit to Work
Certifications checked if appropriate.
A
ll tools and equipment required for the job
should be identified prior to the job starting.
The condition of tools and equipment should be
checked by the person that will be using them.
If a tool or piece of equipment is not suitable for
use, it should be either repaired or destroyed. In
some cases, certifications are required such as
crane inspections, and the document should be
reviewed prior to issuing the permit and hazard
assessment.
10. ave all job-related cathodic protection and/or

H
overhead/underground power lines been located and
identified?
A
ll power lines near the work area need to be
identified prior to work starting and controls put
in place to ensure that power lines will not be
contacted during the work.
11. ave all underground piping/obstructions been

H
identified?
U
nderground piping, tanks and lines need to be
identified for all jobs involving ground distur-
bance, all jobs requiring the use of heavy equip-
ment (i.e. a crane and outriggers) and for all jobs
using mobile equipment as striking or driving
over an underground obstruction can lead to
significant injury and/or property damage.
12. Fire eyes/gas detectors bypassed?

F
ire eyes and/or gas detectors may need to be by-
passed for certain jobs involving hot work inside
a building. Additional procedures may need to
be followed to by-pass these safety devices.
107
13. Protection of all sewer catch basins and floor drains?

Th
is question must be answered yes when doing
Permit to Work
welding inside a building or near any outdoor

sewer catch basins that could contain hydrocar-
bon.
14. ousekeeping - cords, cables, hoses, tools, material

H
or debris controlled and out of the path of workers.
R
ules around housekeeping specific to the job
and the materials, tools and equipment should
be reviewed so areas where people need to walk
are kept free of hazards.
15. Are additional permits required? Ground disturbance

Confined space Critical lift
Th
is question is a double check of the Golden
Rules identified in Part 1 of the form. If the
answer is yes, identify using a check box which
additional permit is required. The document
should be completed prior to starting the job and
attached to this form.
16. Are all personnel involved with the job participating

in the pre-job meeting? If no, who is responsible to
update these workers?
I f some workers will be joining the work site at
a later time, one person needs to be designated
to review the contents of this form with those
workers so they understand the hazards of the
jobs, the controls for those hazards and their role
in promoting a safe and environmentally friendly
work atmosphere.
17. Have the risks of working alone been assessed?

I f a worker will be working alone, this question
must be answered yes and the control measures
108
for ensuring that workers safety documented in

the column to the right. Controls might include
Permit to Work
reviewing the local working alone procedures or
establishing a communication plan with defined
check-in intervals.
18. Is heavy manual lifting involved? Potential of injury

due to over exertion or strain by lifting, pulling,
pushing or twisting.
Th
is question links too many of the recordable
injuries that have occurred as a result of manual
lifting, pulling, pushing or twisting. If this
type of work is required, consider if mechani-
cal devices can be used to reduce the chance of
strain. Determine how heavy a load will be and
the number of people required to lift it. Review
proper lifting techniques.
19. Are personnel at risk of slip, trip, or fall to the same

level or to the area below?
Th
is question links too many of the recordable
injuries that have occurred as a result of slips,
trips and falls. The work area including any sea-
sonal influences should be reviewed and controls
put in place to maximize traction.
20. Are there driving hazards associated with the job?

Th
is will be yes for almost all jobs to cover the
drive to the work site or the drive home. Review
any specific hazards and rules of the road for that
day.
21. Can personnel be placed in line of fire? (struck by

protruding, moving objects, sharp edges, objects
falling, caught in or between)
Th
ere are many considerations for this question.
It should first consider permanent hazards of
109
the site equipment and then must consider the

hazards of the job. If the job creates potential
Permit to Work
line of fire hazards, they need to be identified

during the hazard assessment and controls put in
place to reduce or eliminate the hazard.
22. Can personnel come in contact with an energy

source or be exposed to hazardous material?
C
onsider energy sources and hazardous materials
in and around the work area. Controls might
include energy isolation, using a spotter or using
additional PPE.
23. re personnel working in the vicinity of mobile

A
equipment?
I f the answer to this question is yes, controls
should include verifying that back-up alarms are
fully functioning and a spotter is designated for
the job. Hand signals between the spotter and
driver must be reviewed.
24. re there fire hazards associated with the task?

A
Equipment needed? Identify.
I f the job could result in a fire, this question
should be answered as yes. Steps should be taken
to execute the job to minimize the chance of a
fire starting. Appropriately sized extinguishers
and other fire fighting equipment needs to be
available and readily accessible for workers to en-
sure a safe exit from the area should a fire occur.
25. ave environmental controls/procedures necessary

H
for spills/atmospheric release/waste been identified
due to loss of containment, failure of equipment or
other form of release?
I f the job could result in a spill, atmospheric re-
lease or will generate waste, identify if additional
110
site-specific procedures need to be reviewed. In

some cases, a brief overview of waste storage
Permit to Work
areas and segregation practices or material
handling techniques needs to take place.
26. I s materials/equipment required to be lifted by

mechanical means? I.e. bobcat, hoist, crane.
I f materials will be lifted by mechanical means,
document the controls required to ensure a safe
lift. The lift plan should consider equipment
capabilities, tag lines, the need for spotters, etc.
27. Is a rescue or environmental response plan required?

List team and verify training.
Th
is is in addition to the local ERP and would
be required for jobs involving confined space en-
try, some jobs requiring work at heights and jobs
that involve handling large volumes of liquids
that can have a negative impact on the environ-
ment if released. Identify what is needed at the
job site to immediately address the emergency
situation and ensure that equipment is available
before starting the job.
28. Energy isolation complete? Equipment de-pressured

purged blinded lock-out tag out
stored energy
I f energy isolation is required for the job, the
type of energy isolation applied should be noted
using the check boxes. The control column
should be used to identify how energy was
isolated and reference site-specific practices and
procedures for energy isolation.
111
Vehicle and Road Practice
VEHICLE STANDARD AND ROAD SAFETY PRACTICE
1.1 is standard applies to all drivers operating vehicles

Th
for BP CGPU and NGLBU sites. This includes
employees using personal vehicles for company
business. In this standard, these vehicles are referred
to as company vehicles. The standard is applicable
to summer and co-op students, full time equivalent
contractors and office staff that may be traveling on
company business.
1.2 The purpose of this standard is to ensure BP CGPU

and NGLBU employees, contracted employees,
contractors and other visiting personnel use vehicles
in a safe manner.
2.0 Scope of Vehicle Standard Elements
2.1 Vehicle Specifications-The vehicles must be fit for

purpose and has been maintained in safe working
condition with seatbelts installed and functional.
Seat Belts must be worn at all times while a vehicle is
in motion.
larification: http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/files/
C
showdocument.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=915
A
lways refer to the vehicle owners service
manual for the proper maintenance inspections
and required service
I t is highly recommended that all vehicle main-
tenance be completed by the appropriate (Ford,
GM, Dodge) authorized dealership while the
vehicle is in the warranty period
A
ll BP, Personal, and rented vehicles must be
equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes and Standard
Air Bags
112

M
onthly vehicle safety check sheets must be
filled out by the designated driver for that vehicle
A
ll drivers are required to complete daily vehicle
logs, complete monthly vehicle usage reports (per
local area schedule) and report all personal and
commuting mileage as requested
Th
e driver will walk around their vehicle prior to
each trip to check for potential hazards such as
objects, people or other vehicles prior to driving
and observe the condition of the vehicle such as
tires and lights are in good working condition
and that window, lights and mirrors are clean
Th
e vehicle must be equipped with tires properly
selected and maintained for the driving condi-
tions that could be experienced in the area.
During the period of November 1 to March 31
all BP vehicles and other vehicles being used
on a full time basis within the Canadian Gas
Performance Unit, must be equipped with winter
tires (see Appendix 2 Winter Tire Requirements
in this Practice)
H
eadlights/Driving Lights As a best practice
when driving in conditions that may include re-
duced visibility such as fog, smoke, snow, dust or
low light; it is required that drivers turn on their
headlights rather than relying on the vehicles
daytime running lights. When traveling in the
above conditions it is paramount to provide
maximum visibility to third party drivers that
may be traveling behind our vehicle
F
it for purpose also refers to using the right
vehicle for the right purpose. An example of this
would be to use a 4 wheel drive truck to access a
drilling rig at a remote site.
N
o alterations or modifications are to be made to
the vehicle that can affect the functionality of the
vehicle safety equipment (E.g., a bush guard will
alter the effectiveness of the air bags.)
113
Additional vehicle specifications:

- 4 Wheel Drive for all field service vehicles.
Exceptions will be allowed based on approval
of local management
- A seat which provides good vibration
dampening, lumbar support, and good
adjustability of body position to provide
ergonomically sound driving position
A
method of communication (cell phone
or radio) may be portable or permanently
installed. NOTE: a cell phone or other two way
communication device is not to be used when
vehicle is in motion. An exception would be
when traveling on a road which requires the use
of two way communication. See section 2.6
L
ocal area management may determine that the
following items are appropriate based on risk
assessment for that area:
-Auxiliary driving lights installed according to
the Alberta Highway Traffic Act and Motor
Transport Act
- High frequency deer whistles
- Back up alarms
2.2 Passengers-The number of passengers does not ex-

ceed the manufacturers specifications for the vehicle.
2.3 oads-Loads are secure and do not exceed manufac-

L
turers specification and legal limits of the vehicle. All
equipment, tools or other cargo being transported in
the cargo and passenger areas of all vehicles shall be
secured to prevent serious injury to occupants, in the
event of a sudden stop or an incident. All vehicles
should be assessed to see if headache racks are needed
and if so should be installed.
larification http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/files/show-
C
document.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=916
114

2.3.1 S ecuring Of Loads (Load Binders) - BP Can-
ada E&P has determined that the use of lever-
type load binders poses an unnecessary level of
risk and shall be phased out of BP operations.
Advances in equipment technology provide
the opportunity for continual improvement
by replacing lever-type load binders with the
comparable, safer ratchet-type load binder.
- Warnings and Application Instructions:

F
ailure to use load binders properly may result in
serious injury or even death to you or others
D
o not operate a load binder while standing on
the load
M
ove the handle with caution. It may whip
Keep all body parts clear
K
eep yourself out of the path of the moving
handle and any loose chain lying on the handle
Y
ou must be familiar with state and federal
regulations regarding size and number of chain
systems required for securing loads on trucks
A
lways consider the safety of nearby workers as
well as yourself when using load binders
W
hile under tension, a load binder must not
bear against an object, as this will cause side load
D
o not use a handle extender (cheater pipe) - see
instructions
D
o not attempt to close or open the binder with
more than one person
- Instructions - Ratchet Load Binders
M
anually unscrew the end hoods to get enough
reach
Position ratchet binder so it can be operated
115
from the ground, ideal placement is between

waist & chest high
A
ttach one hook on the chain close to an anchor
point to minimize hook rotation
T
ake up as much slack as possible and hook the
chain to the opposite end of the load binder
S et the pawl and start closing the load binder,
use clean gloves
Keep fingers and hands away from pawl and gear
M
aintain a buffer zone from the end of the
ratchet handle
S ecure footing and stroke handle until desired
tension is achieved, handle extensions are prohib-
ited
L
oads can shift, check the tension of the load
binder frequently, re-tighten as needed
- Maintenance of All Load Binders
R
outinely check load binders for wear, bending,
cracks, nicks, or gouges. If bending or cracks are
present - Do not use load binder
R
outinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of
Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads
of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and
reduce friction wear
2.4 river Training-All drivers are appropriately assessed

D
licensed, trained and medically fit to operate the
vehicle.
larification:http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/files/show-
C
document.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=927
- Operators of BP vehicles must provide proof
of appropriate licence on annual basis. On an
exception basis drivers may be requested to
provide a copy of the Drivers Abstract (e.g. After
116

a vehicle incident)
- It is the responsibility of the driver to inform
their supervisor within the next working day of
a drivers license suspension. Failure to inform is
considered a severe offence, and will be subject to
discipline
- All drivers shall have their appropriate class of
drivers licence and TDG or DOT certificate (if
applicable) in their possession
- A risk assessment must be performed at each job
site to determine what type of additional driving
training is needed. The following are examples of
the types to consider
- Adverse road conditions (gravel, lease roads,
snow and ice, mud, etc.):
- Winter Driving
- Backing
- Sloped surfaces
- Reverse skidding
- Fatigue and Journey Management
- Deer and animal avoidance
- Understanding 4 X 4s
- All drivers shall have passed a BP approved

drivers evaluation course (with skid control if
available) prior to operating a BP vehicle. All
professional drivers shall complete a BP approved
defensive driver training course as per the HSSE
training matrix
- All areas within the BP Canada Gas Performance
Unit will assess their roads as per Local Hazard
Maps to determine which areas would require
chaining on tires. Areas must develop a plan for
chaining requirements. Areas on roads must be
identified which would be used for safe installa-
117
tion of chains. Things that should be considered

are:
o Winter driving conditions(November
1-March 1 minimum)
o Muddy driving conditions
o Grade of roads (e.g. 10% grade)
2.5 river Fatigue and Alertness-All drivers are appropri-

D
ately rested and alert.
C
- Fatigue and stress are two common mental
factors which affect a drivers ability to perform.
When a driver finds they are in this condition,
they should not drive, pull over and take a break
or a nap, or pull over and stretch
- Professional drivers as defined by the BP Global
Driving Standard must have fatigue training as
per HSSE raining Matrix - http://gasiso14001.
bpweb.bp.com/EMS/Competency%20Training/
FIELD%20TRAINING%20MATRIX.xls
2.6 obile Phones-Driver. Drivers must not use a

M
mobile phone or other two way communication
device while a vehicle is in motion. Only short
duration calls on a radio are permitted by exception
on roads which are radio controlled or required
by regulation (e.g. when moving oversized loads
in a convoy with escort vehicles(s)Clarification:
http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/files/showdocument.
asp?tb=subcategory&ID=918
Cellular phones, voice mail devices, recording pagers or
other communication devices which are not intrinsically
safe(explosion proof ), may not be used in classified areas
where a hazardous atmosphere could exist.

118

2.7 Journey Requirements-
C
- D
rivers will contact the local BP management
to be familiar with area specific regulations and
policies and, where possible, acquire a local road
hazard analysis map
- D
riving time should be taken into consideration
as part of the hours of travel and work for that
day in order to address the issues of fatigue and
journey management. STOP, THINK, GO
- High risk road locations should be identified,
communicated to all drivers, and posted in a
conspicuous location
- All BP light vehicles within the CGPU will be
equipped with VDRs (Vehicle Data Recorders)
2.8 Seatbelts-Seatbelts are worn by all occupants at all

times whenever the vehicle is in motion. All people
in the vehicle must be wearing a three point seat belt.
Lap belts may not be used unless a hazard assess-
ment has been completed and approved by the Area
Authority.
C
2.9 lcohol and Drugs-The driver is not under the influ-

A
ence of alcohol or drugs, or any other substance or
medication that could impair their ability to drive.
C
showdocument.asp?tb=subcategory&ID=921:
2.10 Read the label of all over-the-counter medications

before considering driving. Refer to BPs Alcohol
and Drug Policy. Consult your physician if questions
119
arise regarding prescription medication
2.11 Safety Helmet-Safety helmets are worn by riders and

passengers of motorcycles, quads, snow mobiles and
similar types of vehicles.
C
3.0 Additional Specific Requirements.
3.1 egulatory or posted speed limits shall not be

R
exceeded and all vehicles must be driven in a manner
that respects the road conditions.
3.2 irearms shall not be carried in company vehicles.

F
Where Bear Watch or other area specific wild-life
expertise is needed on site, it will be addressed in an
HSSE Assurance Plan for the job and third party
trained and competent experts will be used. Where
flare guns are required, site-specific procedures must
be developed for the transport and operation of this
equipment. Shotguns must not be used for flare
guns.
3.3 ehicles must be backed into parking stalls where it

V
is allowable or where drive-through parking is not
possible. Where space permits, drive-through park-
ing is the preferred technique.
3.4 o vehicle shall encroach within 8 meters of any

N
wellhead, piping, process vessel or tank containing
combustible fluids unless required by a specific main-
tenance or operating function and an appropriate
risk assessment and necessary hot work permit have
been completed.
3.5 A driver, pulling into a well/battery/drilling opera-
120

tion/compressor site or pump station, must park the
vehicle pointing towards the access road for a quick
exit.
3.6 ets will not be permitted in company vehicles while
P
traveling on BP business or while on BP CGPU and
NGLBU premises.
3.7 I t is recommended that drivers wear their safety

glasses while driving on gravel roads as there is a
high risk of rocks, ice or debris to be thrown into the
windshield by another vehicle.
3.8 acking - is to be avoided when practical. Drivers

B
will park in spaces where they can legally drive
forward when leaving; otherwise they will back into
the parking space upon arrival. A spotter shall be
used to assist the driver during backing operations
of heavy vehicles, vehicles with trailers, and vehicles
with limited visibility from their rear window.
4.0 Scope of Towing and Tow Straps
4.1 ow trucks are to be used as the first choice for tow-

T
ing. STOP, THINK, GO (TOW).
4.2 ylon tow ropes or chains must not be used. Nylon

N
braided (flat) tow straps with loop ends (no hooks)
are acceptable.
4.3 ehicles should be equipped with the manufacturers

V
specified towing hooks or properly mounted towing
hitch. A Ditch Hitch is a recommended towing
device which fits into the hitch receiver.
4.4 ulling force on the tow hooks must not exceed the
P
manufacturers specifications.
4.5 There should be constant tension on the tow strap
121
when towing, it should not be jerked.

4.6 P vehicles are not allowed to pull a trailer device
B
that is not company owned or leased.
5.0 Scope of Boosting and Jump Starting
5.1 When boosting or jump starting, both batteries must

be the same voltage and the vehicles must not be
touching.
5.2 The vehicles must be in park or neutral with park-

ing brakes on and both engines and all accessories
shut off.
5.3 ut the booster cables on the positive battery posts

P
first, then put the negative cable on the good battery
and finally ground the last cable to the engine block
of the vehicle with the dead battery.
5.4 Keep clear of the vehicles during the boosting opera-

tion and use the reverse procedure to remove the
cables.
5.5 Always wear eye protection when boosting or jump

starting a vehicle.
6.0 Scope of Vehicle Incident Reporting
6.1 All vehicle incidents must be reported to drivers

immediate supervisor immediately if possible but no
later than within 24 hours or next business day.
6.2 All vehicles incidents involving a third party, public

or private property must be reported to Kendal
Adjusters Inc. (John Bicknell 403-256-8400) within
122

24 hours. You will be required to fax a copy of the
Incident Report, copy of the Police Report and
any relevant cost estimates. Vehicles are not to be
repaired until authorized by Kendal Adjustors or BP
Fleet Management.
6.3 ll vehicles incidents over $1000 are to be reported

A
to the local Police authorities within 24 hours.
6.4 ehicles incidents that do not involve a third party

V
or public or private property should be handled as
follows:
< = $1000 damage 1 estimate required for repair

$1001 - $3000 damage 2 estimates required for repair
$3001 - $5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair
+$5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair
AND contact BP Fleet
Management for authorization
6.5 All vehicle incidents involving rental vehicles should

be reported to rental agency (Hertz) as soon as prac-
tically possible. The claim processing will be handled
by their representative.
7.0 Scope of Material Handling
7.1 Site-specific materials handling and transportation

procedures may be required.
7.2 ransportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG)

T
certificate, the TDG applicable permits and the
OMNIBUS permit must be carried in the vehicle
where applicable.
123
8.0 Scope of Safety Equipment
8.1 All company vehicles including rental vehicles will

have safety equipment that is appropriate for local
risk assessments and conditions The following is
suggested minimum equipment for vehicles going to
field locations. Vehicles not travelling to remote sites
or in adverse conditions may not require all of the
equipment listed.
- Regulatory acceptable first aid kit
- Reflective warning devices
- Bear kits where necessary
- Fire extinguisher
- Reflective clothing
- Extra clothing or blankets if applicable
based on geographic location
- Candle and matches if applicable based on
geographic - Non-perishable high energy
food
- Shovel. if applicable based on geographic
location
- Axe or a hatchet if applicable based on
geographic location
- Flashlight (explosion-proof is recommended
for field service vehicles)
- Extra batteries for flashlight
- Booster cables
- Tow strap
- Water, Caution Water may freeze.
Appendix 1- BP CGPU and NGLBU All Terrain Vehicle

Practice
Appendix 2- CGPU Winter Tire Reguirements
124

10.0 Reference Documents
GLOBAL DRIVING STANDARD :

http://HSSE.bpweb.bp.com/driving_safety/default.
asp?cat=147
gHSSEr MS 430 - HSSE Nonconformance and Incident
Reporting Procedure
gHSSEr MF 86001 Monthly Vehicle Inspection
Checklist
gHSSEr MF 86002 Licence Verification Form
APPENDIX 1
BP CGPU and NGLBU All-Terrain Vehicle Practice
1.1 This practice provides guidelines for the safe opera-

tion of All-Terrain Vehicles (ATV) defined as Quads
and snowmobiles.
1.2 is practice applies to all CGPU and NGLBU

Th
employees, contract employees and contractors who
operate all-terrain vehicles (Quads and Snowmobiles)
while working for the CGPU and NGLBU.
1.3 is practice addresses the practices, conditions and

Th
behaviors that have the largest impact upon safe driv-
ing. (Driving all-terrain vehicles is one of the highest
risk tasks performed by our staff.)
2.0 Training
2.1 All operators of all-terrain vehicles are required

to pass a recognized certified all-terrain
vehicles rider course.
3.0 Ground Rules
125
3.1 rivers will at all times adhere to the ground rules

D
provided in this section of the standard.
3.2 No horseplay while operating all-terrain vehicles.
3.3 S ite specific procedures must be developed to address

communication needed to meet working alone re-
quirements. This may involve radio/cellular contact,
check in location and times, travel routes, etc.
3.4 ll-terrain vehicles must not be overloaded with

A
personnel or equipment. Manufacturers guidelines
must be followeed for load restrictions.
3.5 ll-terrain vehicles must not be operated while under

A
the influence of drugs or alcohol.
3.6 Firearms will not be carried on all-terrain vehicles.
3.7 SA approved helmets must be worn at all times

C
while operating an ATV. DOT/Snell approval in the
US.
3.8 regular maintenance program following the manu-

A
facturers guidelines must be implemented to ensure
the ATVs reliability and safe operating condition.
3.9 Pre-trip checklists must be developed.
3.10 Operator must be familiar with the owners manual.
3.11 A
TVs must be operated in a manner so as to mini-
mize disturbance to all wildlife.
4.0 Licensing
4.1 rovincial Regulations require that all-terrain vehicles
P
must be licensed and insured while traveling on
public lands.
4.2 very All-Terrain Vehicle being operated by CGPU
E
and NGLBU employees, full time equivalent con-
126

tractors and contractors doing work for CGPU and
NGLBU must be licensed and insured.
5.0 Minimum Equipment
M
ounted winch for appropriate load ratings
(quads) where local management deems it ap-
propriate
Regulatory acceptable first aid kit
5Ib A B C fire extinguisher
Axe/Hatchet or folding pruning saw
Approved tow strap
Tire repair kit, air pump ( quads )
Operators manual
Mounted carrying case
Explosion proof flash light
P
epper spray, bear scare, air horn ( quads ) where
local management deems it appropriate
Water proof matches
S mall container of gas line antifreeze where ap-
plicable
Tool kit
Small tarp
Emergency food source
S pare drive belt and spark plugs where appli-
cable.
Whip flag antennae
6.0 Personal Protective Equipment

CSA approved helmet. DOT/Snell approved in US.
Goggles or safety glasses
Gloves
Appropriate CSA approved footwear
Reflective clothing
Transporting
6.1 Proper procedures must be developed and followed
127
BP Canada Energy Gas Performance Unit
PROCEDURE TITLE: QUAD LOAD-OFFLOAD PROCEDURE

PROCEDURE #: LOCATION: CGPU
DATE ISSUED: NOV. 11TH, 2005 DATE REVISED: JANUARY 21/06
PREPARED BY: ATV STANDARD COMMITTEE APPROVED BY: gHSSEr COMMITTEE
Job Steps Potential Control Statement(s) Control

Hazards/Loss Code
1 The following procedure has In-experienced quad All operators of quads MUST have certification of successfully
been developed to provide operators may not have passing a recognized all-terrain vehicle operators course.
operators of both quad and 6x6 knowledge of the proper
units a safe tool to load and use of a quad, its The Components of the training must be consistent with MS-860,
very hazardous task.
offload the units from a limitations etc and may Appendix 1, section 2.
transport unit (out of the back of not know the specific
T/S
128
a truck box, from a trailer unit or site specific tools and
MS-860
from a quad deck.) First and procedures to ensure
7.0 Transporting of quad units
foremost the operator of the safe operation of a quad

referred quad / 6X6 unit must
have successfully passed a
recognized all-terrain vehicle
course.
2 Ensure that the operator of the Same as above Must have reviewed and been trained in all the site specific
Quad has been trained in all site procedures involving quad use. Documentation of this must be in
specific procedures involving place.

the proper use and operation of T/S
the unit in his specific area. The Components of the training must be consistent with MS-860, MS-860
Appendix 1, section 2.
while loading and off-loading ATVs, which can be a

Hazards/Loss Code
3 If the quad has to be loaded onto The unit may not be The transportation unit must be of an approved type and must be T/S
a transport unit and moved to a designed to safely approved by the Foreman of the area, before its use. This approval MS-860
location prior to its use, the transport a quad due to must be documented.
operator must be trained in the its size, shape, layout The transport vehicle must meet the requirements with MS-860,
proper use of the transport unit, etc, and could result in Appendix 1, section 9, 10, or 11.
the minimum requirements of injury to the operator
the transport unit and the and or equipment.
procedure to load the quad onto
the unit.
4 Ensure that an adequate Due to the Ramps must be approved by the Area Foreman, who will ensure that T/E
approved ramp is available to transportation unit all users are aware of its proper operation and that they (the ramp
perform the loading task. design and the ramp users) properly inspect them prior to use to ensure that they are in
design they may not be good repair.
compatible and could Document inspection on the transportation unit checklist refer to
lead to personal injury MS-860, Appendix 1, section 9.90
129
or equipment damage. Recommendation is the Fulton Trifold Ramp (SR77) - refer to MS-
860, Appendix 1, section 12.2.
5 Position the transport unit as More angle of the Complete a site walk around prior to positioning the transport unit to T
best possible using the profile of ramps, the greater the load the quad (s). Ensure the ground is level and use the terrain to
the terrain to decrease the angle risk for an incident to lessen the slope of the ramps.
of the ramps. occur during the loading
operation.
6 Test the brakes on the quad Unable to stop the quad Brakes must be in good operation condition. T/ E
before attempting to load to when loading. Ensure the Quad Pre/Post Trip Inspection Check List (CH-A-0002) is
ensure adequate operation. An completed prior to operating the quad.

approved ATV helmet and work
boots must be worn whenever
the quad is in motion.
7 May cause unit to be The load area must be free of any material, tools or supplies and the T
Ensure the transportation unit is
unstable. deck must be clean of any slippery surfaces.
clear of any debris or other
equipment, prior to loading.


Hazards/Loss Code
8 Ramps may become de- Ensure the ramps are designed for the quad weight and size.
Install the ramps to the transport T
tached from the Ensure the ramps are in good condition with all securing mechanisms
unit ensuring that the ramps are
safely secured to the transporttransportation unit, or in place and in good repair.
unit. not be designed for the Refer to the Quad Pre /Post Check list referred to MS-860, Appendix
use that is required. 1, section 4.
9 Drive the quads to the ramps, A loading incident Operators must wear an approved helmet - refer to MS-860, T/E/S
stopping just short of ramps. could occur where the Appendix 1, section 6.
Ensure that the quad is in the operator could sustain
4X4 mode and in the lowest personal injury or the Low gear and in the 4X4 mode will ensure required power and
gear. Stand on the quads foot quad / ramps could be traction is available. Standing on the pegs and leaning forward, the
pegs and leaning slightly damaged. operator will have the best control of the quad. Proceeding slowly
forward with knees bent reduces the risk of not being able to stop in the desired position.
slightly; slowly proceed up the
ramp.
10 Once the quad has cleared the The unit could in- Park brake must be engaged and the unit left in gear and the engine T
advertantly move off shut off.
ramps and is on the
the transportation unit. Consider a cushion type device for the front of the truck.
130
transportation units deck,
slowly move the quad to its
desired location, stop, engage
the park brake and shut off the
engine.
11 Secure the quad with a Unit could leave the Use proper nylon tie-down straps and secure the straps to the quad T
transportation unit and and the transportation units tie-down points. The quad unit must be
minimum of four nylon tie-
cause damage. secured on all four corners.
down straps (ratchet type) to the
DO-NOT use the winch cable as a tie down.
transportation units deck.
12 Complete a walk around of the Other hazards could Complete a unit final inspection and an area walk around. Choose an T
impede the units egress path free of obstructions and hazards.
transportation device to ensure
movement resulting in
that the unit is properly secured
injury or equipment
and that the transportation unit
damage.
can be safely moved.
Hazards/Loss Code
13 Driving hazards, road Complete a safe journey management plan prior to starting the trip. T
Transport the quads via the
conditions, weather, etc.
transportation unit to its desired
location. may contribute to an Take the time to safely stop and check the secured load during the
incident and or injury transportation trip.
due to the unfavorable
conditions for the
transport vehicle.
14 Once at the desired location, Equipment damage may Prior to spotting the transportation unit, complete an area hazard T
choose a spot to offload the occur in spotting the assessment, choose a level location free of any hazards and with safe
quad, again using the terrain as transportation unit and access and egress.
an advantage to lessen the slope or during the offload
of the ramp(s) and to ensure the procedure.
unit is level. Complete a hazard
assessment of the offload area.
15 Once the transportation unit is Unit could inadvertently Ensure the quads park brake is engaged. T
secured (park brake set on the move causing personal
injury or equipment
truck), ensure the quads park
damage.
131
brake is still engaged and
prepare to offload.
16 Install the ramps to the Ramps may become Ensure the ramps are designed for the quad weight and size. T
transportation unit. detached from Ensure the ramps are in good condition with all securing mechanisms
transportation unit, or in place and in good repair.
not be designed for the Check the offload area and see if you require a stopping device
use that is required. (ensure the quad cannot free wheel into a stationary object or
hazard.) A stopping device could be a small log or a 4X4 post.
17 Check to see if the park brake is Quad unit could move Re-check the park brake and ensure that there are no obstructions in T
still engaged and shift the quad resulting in personal the quads path that will impede a safe offload.
injury or equipment
into neutral. Safely remove the
damage.
tie-down straps and store the
straps in an area that will not
impede with the safe offload of

the quad unit.


Hazards/Loss Code
18 Position yourself to the front of Worker could fall off of Ensure that you can safely get to the front of the quad (select the T
the quad and release the park the transportation unit easiest and safest route.) Ensure of good footing.
brake. Plant feet firmly and resulting in a personal
injury.
slowly push the quad toward the
ramps.
19 Once the quad is partially down Worker could fall off of Conduct this task slowly and if you loose control; let go of the quad T
the ramp and wanting to move the transportation unit and ensure that you prevent yourself from injury.
resulting in a personal
132
downward on its own, use the
hand brakes to slow the injury.
progress. Once the quad is
positioned about two thirds on
the ramp and you are still
standing well on the
transportation unit, release the
brakes and allow the quad to
descend the rest of the way on
its own (free wheel.)

8.0 Trailer Checks (Pre / post use)
T
railer decking must provide adequate unob-
structed surface area to provide safe load offload
of the ATV unit
H
itch safety chains and securing pin (lock, pin,
bolt)
Trailer ball / reciever compatability
Tire conditions
Spare tire
Trailer jack
Lights working condition
Licence plate and registration
General trailer condition
T
railer ramps must be checked for working
condition (cracks, ramp securing devices, welds,
hinge joints, damage, clean free of mud / ice)
Suggested manufacturer: Fulton Trifold Utility
model SR77
R
atchet straps and securing points are in good
working condition
T
railer must be regulary maintained to the
manufactures specifications such as (axle bear-
ings, wheel lug torque, hitch wear, suspension)
9.0 Truck Box
T
ruck box must provide adequate unobstructed
surface area to provide safe load / offload of the
ATV unit
T
ailgate cables and attachment points must be
inspected for damage, corrosion and wear
E
nsure that the tailgate hinges and latches are in
safe working condition
Ratchet straps and securing points are in good
133
working condition
P
ortable ramps must be checked for working
condition (cracks, ramp securing devices, welds,
hinge joints, damage, clean free of mud / ice)
Suggested manufacturer: Fulton Trifold Utility
model SR77
N
o ATV units are to be carried on the tailgate
due to the unrated load capacity of the tailgate
APPENDIX 2
BP CGPU Winter Tire Requirements
1.1 is policy applies to BP Canada Energy BP Canada

Th
Gas Performance Unit(CGPU) vehicles operated on
BP business within the November 1 to March 31
timeframe.
1.2 This policy provides requirements and guidance for

winter tire and studded tire usage for BP vehicles.
1.3 e purpose of this policy is to ensure that all BP

Th
vehicles are equipped with the most appropriate tires
for winter driving conditions.
1.4 ll BP owned vehicles operated within the Canada

A
Gas Performance Unit will be equipped with Winter
Tires during the winter months as described above.
1.5 It is also expected that long term contractors (those

working on our sites in excess of 30 days) will abide
by this policy.
2.0 Definitions
134

2.1 Snow Tire -These tires have tire tread composed of
special rubber compounds and tread designs that
enhance their performance in snow and ice condi-
tions. Studless winter tires (typically Q-rated with a
mountain-snowflake symbol shown below) are now
available to motorists as a substitute for studded tires.
2.2 S tudded Tire These tires are designed for ice and
snow conditions. They can be used alternatively to
Snow Tires.
3.1 I t is the responsibility of the manager at each site to

ensure that all of the BP owned vehicles are equipped
with snow or studded tires during the mandatory
period of November 1 through March 31. If driving
conditions deteriorate before November 1 it is rec-
ommended that snow or studded tires are installed
at that time. Also it is recommended that snow or
studded tires are kept on the vehicles until March 31
and until winter conditions subside.
3.2 S now tires are manufactured and supplied by a

number of manufacturers. CertainTire brands can be
purchased with the PHH card and these should be
used if possible. Any tire that displays the mountain
snowflake symbol on it is considered a snow and ice
tire and is acceptable provided it meets sizing and
rating requirements specified by the manufacturer.
Tires not baring this symbol are not considered a
snow tire. Only Snow Tires and Studded Tires are
considered acceptable.
135
4.0 Scope of Training and Qualification

Working at Heights
4.1 It is the responsibility of each area manager to

review the Winter Tire requirements with the work-
ing group in the fall before winter driving conditions
set in.
5.0 Snow Tire requirements and guidelines.
5.1 I nstall four winter tires To help maintain control

and stability of your vehicle in icy conditions, Trans-
port Canada and the Rubber Association of Canada
recommend that you install winter tires in sets of
four. At BP CGPU this is mandatory.
6.1 http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/
tirelist.htm
6.2 ttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/
h
menu.htm
WORKING AT HEIGHTS PRACTICE
1.1 This Practice applies to BP Canada Gas Performance

Unit (CGPU) employees, contract personnel con-
ducting work for or on behalf of BP, and, all other
visiting personnel who are participating in working
at heights activities on BP Canada premises or work
sites.
1.2 The purpose of the Practice is to eliminate or mini-
136
mize fall hazards and ensure personnel are protected
Working at Heights
while conducting working at heights activities.
1.3 e Working at Heights Practice states when fall
Th
protection is required and describes the necessary
expectations and responsibilities in the preparation
and execution of conducting work at heights.
2.1 Anchor Point: any point of attachment for the

purposes of fall protection, certified by a professional
engineer, commonly referred to as an anchor point.
2.2 Competent Worker: One who is adequately quali-

fied, suitably trained and with sufficient experience
to safely perform work with minimal or no supervi-
sion (Alberta OH&S SR 13.3).
2.3 CAN/CSA: Canadian Practices Association.
2.4 Deceleration Device: Any mechanism which serves

to dissipate the force of the fall which would
otherwise be imposed on the worker, for example an
OH&S approved energy absorber.
2.5 Engineered: Designed and/or approved by a Regis-

tered Professional Engineer.
2.6 Fall Arresting Device: A device that provides a

means of arresting the accidental vertical or near
vertical fall of an individual, and subsequent to the
arrest of the fall does not, by itself, permit the release
or further lowering of the individual.
2.7 Fall Arrest System: The system utilized to minimize

the chance for injury during a fall. It consists of
137
an engineered anchor point, connecting means and

Working at Heights
a full body harness body holding device and shock

absorbing lanyard. (Harness CSA Standard Z259.1
0-M90) (Lanyard CSA Z259.11-M92)
2.8 Fall Restraint System: A system of components

designed to eliminate the chance of an accidental
fall. This may be accomplished by use of barricades
and hand railing, or may utilize an anchor point, a
connecting means (such as a lanyard), and a body
supporting device (such as a full body harness).
2.9 Free Fall Distance: The distance a worker may fall

before a fall arrest system engages and begins to slow
the fall.
2.10 Personal Fall Protection Equipment: Any equip-

ment that is personally fitted issued and forms part
of the fall protection system. It is usually composed
of the safety harness. (Harness CSA Standard Z259.1
0-M90)
2.11 Safety Harness: A device used to transfer the forces

experienced during and after a fall to the torso or up-
per legs of a worker. The 5 point full body harness is
required. Belts or 3 point harnesses are not allowed.
2.12 Shock Absorbing Lanyard Shock Absorbing Devise

used in combination with safety harness designed
to limit the fall arrest forces so they do not exceed
the injury threshold of the human body. (Lanyard
CSA Z259.11-M92)
138
Working at Heights
3.1 ach worker has the responsibility to recognize fall
E
hazards and take corrective measures by ensuring this
Practice and the written fall protection program are
followed.

Th
must ensure that:
- Workers are trained and verified competent in

the hazards, use, care, and maintenance of fall
protection equipment and including established
procedures or practices relating to the use and care
of the equipment
- Emergency Response Plans are in place when fall
protection equipment is utilized
- Maintenance of an adequate inventory of Personal
Fall Protection Equipment meeting an OSHA,
ANSI or CSA Practice
- A documented fall protection plan is developed as
part of the task hazard risk assessment prior to the
work being performed
- All workers are trained in STOP-THINK-GO and
Time Out for Safety and feel comfortable being
able to exercise these tools
4.0 Scope of Training and Certification
4.1 ll workers working at heights must be trained and

A
competent in fall protection equipment application,
care, use, maintenance, and limitations. The training
shall be conducted by a qualified trainer. Recom-
mended Fall Protection training is OSSA Certified
(OIL SANDS SAFETY ASSOCIATION) as this
training is currently the best industry practice train-
ing for oil and gas.
139
4.2 ny worker responsible for performing rescue activi-

A
Working at Heights
ties must be trained in the proper techniques for the

rescue system.
4.3 raining or retraining is necessary when an employer
T
has a reason to believe a worker does not have the
necessary understanding and/or skill required.
5.1 General:
- All workers must ensure that a fall protection
system is utilized when work is to be conducted at
heights that are:
o At or greater than 2 meters, or
o At a height less than 2 meters if there is an
unusual possibility of injury from a fall
- Acceptable fall protection can be provided by
permanent, temporary, or personal CAN/CSA
approved fall protection equipment systems.
- Fall protection system is identified as:
o A personal fall arrest system
o A travel/fall restraint system
o A safety net
o A control zone, or
o A
nother system approved by a Director of
Inspection
Note: An employers first choice should require the use

of adequate guardrails to protect personnel. The guardrail
must meet the design requirements listed in AB OH&S
section 315 or, an OH&S approved travel restraint system
to prevent a worker from reaching an edge from which the
worker could fall.
140
5.1.1 When Personal Fall protection Equipment
Working at Heights
is utilized, personnel must wear a CAN/
CSA approved full body harness. (CSA
Standard Z259.10- M90)
5.1.2 When Personal Fall Protection Equipment
is used, these systems must be attached
properly to engineer approved anchor
points with an ultimate load capacity of at
least 22.2 kn. (5000 pounds) per person in
any direction the load can be applied, or
twice the maximum arrest force. Anchor
points used for the attachment of personal
fall protection equipment must be inde-
pendent of any anchorage being used to
support, suspend, or lift platforms or loads.
5.1.3 All Personal Fall Protection Equipment
must be connected and used in accordance
with manufacturers specifications and
instructions.
5.1.4 Personal fall arrest systems will be rigged to
minimize the free fall distance to less than
2 meters or the manufactures specification
with a shock absorber and, 1.2 m without
a shock absorber when added distance of
an extended shock absorber creates a greater
risk. The deceleration force will not exceed
8 Kn and the personal fall protection
system must allow for an unobstructed fall.
5.2 Permanent & Temporary Platforms

A written fall protection plan is required as part of the risk
assessment/pre-job task analysis for working at heights of
1.2 meters or greater from a permanent work platform
or 2 meters and greater from a temporary work area., or
if a worker could fall less than 1.2 meters and there is an
unusual possibility of injury because of additional hazards.
141
5.3 Lifts
Working at Heights
A fall restraint system is required when conducting work

at heights greater than 2 meters from Scissor lifts, vertical
aerial platforms, or Boomed Genie lifts if the platform
being using is operated on firm, substantially level surface
with the entire manufacturers guardrails and chains in
place and meet Alberta OH&S Sec 315. However, if the
manufacturers specifications require the use of a fall arrest
system when the vertical aerial platform is being used, then
the manufacturers specifications take precedence and must
be followed. An effective written Emergency Response Pro-
cedure using task hazard analysis / risk assessment must be
developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan as an alternate
to mechanical lift equipment failure.
5.4 Boomed Lifts

A worker working from a boomed Arial Platform or Genie
lift shall be protected from falling by using a personal fall
arrest system consisting of full body harness and shock
absorbing lanyard meeting CSA requirements and a
manufacturer engineered anchor point. The lanyard if at all
possible should be the length to prevent the worker from
being ejected from the platform but not restrict their work
or compromise the function of the fall arrest system. (CSA
Z259.10 M90 & CSA Z259.11-M92)
5.5 Man baskets

Under normal circumstances, a worker working from
a man basket shall be protected from falling by using a
fall arrest system such as a vertical lifeline and rope grab
combination or a self-retracting lifeline. The lifeline shall be
secured to an anchor point on the boom of the crane from
which the man basket is suspended. In the event that it is
impracticable to provide a personal fall arrest system for one
or more workers in a man basket, Alberta OH&S section
350 requires that:
142
A separate man basket support be attached
Working at Heights
between the suspended man basket and the hoist
line above the hook assembly and
e ach worker within the man basket wears a full
body harness with lanyard securely attached to
the man basket
The separate or secondary man basket support,
in combination with worker attachment to the
man basket, functions as a fall arrest system. To
limit a fall distance and the arresting force
experienced by a falling worker, the secondary
man basket support must be as short as possible
An effective written Emergency Response Pro
cedure using task hazard analysis / risk assess
ment must be developed as part of the Fall
Protection Plan as an alternate to Man basket
equipment failure
5.6 Above Water or Liquids

A fall protection system in combination with a life jacket
is required at any height if personnel are to conduct work
above/beside cold or moving water, or other liquids that
pose a drowning hazard to workers other than work from
a boat.
5.7 Vertical Lifelines

Vertical lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems
installed and utilized shall comply with the following:
I s made of wire rope or appropriate material suit-
able for all relevant work site hazards and secured
to an anchor point capable of withholding 27 Kn
and engineer approved
E
xtend to a least 1.2 metes from the ground or
safe work platform
H
as only one person attached unless other wise
designed by manufacture
143
I s effetely protected to prevent abrasion and

Working at Heights
secured to minimize swing

5.8 Horizontal Lifelines
Horizontal lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems
installed and utilized shall comply with the following:
- Is made of wire rope at 12 millimeters in thick-
ness, splice free, capable of withholding 89 Kn
and connecting hardware with a tensile strength
of at least 71Kn, the system must be engineer
approved
- The horizontal line should extend to no less than
6 meters and no greater than 18 meters and be at
least 2 meters above the working surface
- Secured to an anchor point capable of withhold-
ing 71 Kn and engineer approved
- Personnels free fall distance should be no more
than 1.2 meters with at least 3.5 meters of clear-
ance between the work surface and ground
- No more than three personnel shall be connected
to the same horizontal line at any time
6.0 Scope of Emergency Procedures
6.1 General:
A
written Emergency Response Procedure as part
of the task hazard analysis / risk assessment must
be developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan
and identified on the Pre-Job / permit process
A
s a minimum, the Emergency Response Proce-
dure will identify:
o Rescue equipment available
o Trained rescue personnel
o Job specific rescue procedures
o Requirement for procedure to be reviewed
during each Pre-job / permit issuance
144
Working at Heights
6.2 Man Baskets & Lifts
A written Emergency Response Procedure using task hazard
analysis / risk assessment must be developed as part of the
Fall Protection plan to retrieve personnel in case of equip-
ment failure when utilizing Man Baskets and mechanical lifts.
7.0 Scope of Inspection and Maintenance
7.1 I nspection: Fall Arrest Systems (FAS) must be

inspected by a trained and competent worker before
and after use in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
7.2 Storage: Fall protection equipment must be stored

according to manufacturers recommended practices.
Special attention must be given to temperatures,
clean, dry conditions and sunlight.
7.3 emoval from service: Any component of a fall pro-

R
tection system that has been involved in a fall arrest
must be removed from service and tagged as such or
destroyed.
7.4 leaning, repairing and maintenance: The compo-

C
nents of a fall protection system must be cleaned
repaired and maintained according to manufacturers
instructions.
7.5 Recertification and inspections of Fall arrest equip-

ment must be planned and conducted formally
according to manufacturers specifications.
8.0 Scope of Equipment Practices, Regulations

and References
145
8.1 All components of a fall protection system must meet

Working at Heights
the material and assembly specifications set forth in

local regulations and known Practices (see Alberta
OH&S Code 145 or British Columbia Occupational
Health and Safety Regulation and Guidelines 296/97
as amended). or Ontario Regulation 851 Industrial
Establishments and Regulation 213 Construction
Projects, as amended
8.2 CAN/CSA Practices include but are not limited to:

Safety Harnesses, Lanyards: Z259.1-95 (R1999)
Linemens Harnesses, Straps: Z259.3 M1998
Full Body Harnesses: Z259.10 M90 (R1998)
Fall Arrest, Descent, Lifeline Devices: Z259.2
Shock Absorbers: Z259.11 M92 (19998)
Vertical Lifeline: Z259.2.1 -98
Connecting Components: Z259.12.01
A
utomatic and manual decent device::
Z259.2.3.99
Self Retracting Devices: Z259.2.298
9.0 Forms
gHSSEr MF 34004- PreJob Risk Assessment
Maximum Tie Off Points
146
Atmospheric Monitoring
ASBESTOS
Asbestos
For information on asbestos contact your PU Industrial
Hygienist. Refer to gHSSEr MS 920 Asbestos Code of
Practice (BP Guidelines for Handling Asbestos and Man-
Made Vitreous Fibers)-
ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for providing a safe work environ-
ment through atmospheric monitoring.
APPLICATION:
Any area where the work environment is, or may become
hazardous due to the presence of combustible or toxic gas,
or when the oxygen content is less than 19.5%, or greater
than 23% by volume.
DEFINITION:
Atmospheric Monitoring includes:
O2 Monitors
H2S Detectors
Combustible Gas Detectors
Toxic Gas Detectors
Carbon Dioxide Monitors
PRECAUTIONS:
Some atmospheric monitoring equipment requires
minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to
manufacturer specifications. The O2 reading must be taken
prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read
properly.
147
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Lack of oxygen
Combustible Gas
Toxic Gas: H2S, benzene and other toxic
Substances
PROCEDURES:
Detection Equipment:
A
ll work locations must have combustible gas,
toxic gas and oxygen detection equipment
available, as required, for monitoring the
atmosphere, prior to and during work proce-
dures.
A
ll worksite locations that have portable
and permanent atmospheric monitor-
ing equipment must develop site specific
procedures that govern instrument use, care,
maintenance, function testing, calibration and
documentation, repairs and training.
A
ll survey equipment used for testing confined
spaces, hot work or any other permit required
testing should be function tested prior to each
use.
Combustible Gas Testing:
A combustible gas test shall be taken when Hot work
is performed within 8 meters of any well, process
vessel, tank or related equipment, where combustible
gas is, or may be present.
H2S Gas Detectors:
H2S gas detectors are used to measure the concentra-
tion of H2S in a work area. There are two basic types
of detectors:
D
rager and Gastec Sampling Tubes. NOTE:
When monitoring in an unknown concentra-
tion, SCBA/SABA must be worn by the
individual
148
[See: H2S Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection]
Th
is method is considered to be accurate
plus or minus 25% when proper sampling
procedures are used
E
lectronic Sensor. Electronic sensors measure
the airborne concentration of H2S on an elec-
tronic circuit. The signal, which can also be
used to set audible and visual alarms at specific
concentrations, identifies the H2S level on a
gauge. The advantage of this type of unit is
that monitoring can be continuous. The unit
may be carried on a belt (personal monitor),
or permanently mounted in areas where H2S
could accumulate
Monitoring Units:
ll buildings where H2S may exceed 100 PPM
A
should have fixed monitoring units set to give an
audible and visual alarm at 10 PPM. H2S visual
alarm will be a blue beacon and LEL / General visual
alarm will be a red beacon. Safe operating procedures
must be written and followed should circumstances
preclude such installation.
Confined-Space Entry:
ombustible gas, toxic gas, and oxygen-deficiency tests
C
must be performed prior to a confined-space entry and
at frequent intervals during the work period. Respira-
tory protection must be worn while the initial tests are
being performed.
[See: Confined-Space Entry]
[See: Respiratory Protection]
Hot Work:
ll hot work requires monitoring of the atmosphere for
A
combustible gas prior to and at frequent intervals dur-
ing the work. If the hot work is being performed within
a confined space, continuous monitoring is required
for combustible gas, toxic gas, and oxygen deficiency.
.If there is a potential for the atmosphere to change un-
149
predictably after a worker enters the confined space, the

atmosphere must be continuously monitored. Re-entry
to a worksite must be accompanied by gas detection
before work resumes.
[See: Safe Work Permits]
Precautions:
S ome atmospheric monitoring equipment requires
minimum oxygen content in order to perform accord-
ing to manufacturer specifications. The O2 reading
must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the
monitor can read properly. Equipment specifications
should be verified for equipment operating conditions
prior to installation and use.
Oil Spills:
dditional atmospheric monitoring may be required
A
at spill sites.
[ Contact Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for
advice, as necessary]
TRAINING:
All personnel that use or are responsible for atmospheric
monitoring equipment shall be properly trained in the
operation and use of the equipment and the site specific
procedures that were written for the particular equipment.
BENZENE:
For information on benzene, contact your P.U. Industrial
Hygienist. Refer to the sites-specific Code of Practice and
BP Guidelines for Handling Benzene.
150
CANADIAN NUCLEAR SAFETY COMMISSION

(CNSC) REGULATED ISOTOPES
CNSC Isotopes
PURPOSE:
To establish the requirements for the safe handling of
CNSC isotopes.
APPLICATION:
All worksites where Canadian Nuclear Safety Commis-
sion (CNSC) regulated isotopes may be handled, i.e.
radiographic inspection of vessels, piping and pipelines,
radioactive isotope use, wireline logging, etc
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Exposure to radioactive sources.
PREPARATIONS:
CNSC Certification:
Contractors must have a valid license issued by
the Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission to per
form all work involving CNSC regulated isotopes.
[See: BP Canada Welding Quality Control Manual
for radiographic inspection requirements]
Work Planning
ork planning for use of CNCS licensed isotopes
W
must include consultation with the CNCS licensed
Contractor.
Pre-Job Safety Meeting:
Must be conducted prior to commencement of
operation. [See: Safety Meetings]
[See: TDG-Packaging and Safe Transport of Radioac
tive Material]
[See: Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission Act and
regulations]
PROCEDURES:
151
Safe handling procedures should include:

CNSC Isotopes
Specific job procedures to be followed

A
certification of the type and quantity of CNCS
licensed radioactive sources furnished and used
Th
e expected effluent concentrations and meth-
ods of control if applicable
Th
e person in charge, responsible for the opera-
tion.
Equipment and worksite must be properly prepared (i.e.
isolated, depressured, made accessible, etc.) The worksite
should be roped off. Radiation warning signs must be
posted, and unauthorized entry of personnel banned, in the
area affected by the work.
In no event shall a pregnant employee be allowed in the

vicinity of CNSC Licensed radioactive operations.
CNCS licensed radioactive source shall not be left unat-

tended at the jobsite unless it has been isolated to prevent
any accidental exposure.
PRECAUTION:
Radioactive isotopes may affect some LEL monitors and fire
detection systems. Station shutdown could result when us-
ing a highly energetic radioactive source in the vicinity of a
detector. A risk assessment must be performed to determine
the scope and risk from radioactive sources. Fire detection
systems sensitive to radiation may have to be by-passed
when radioactive sources are in use in the immediate area.
Care must be taken to reactivate the detection system when
the work is completed.
[See: Equipment Shutdown Systems]
Radiation survey meters are not explosion proof, thus a Hot
Work Permit is required.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
152
Draining & Depressuring

The BP Canada Representative is responsible for ensuring
that only CNSC licensed operators are used when handling
CNSC licensed radioactive sources and that all procedures
are supplied and followed.
The CNCS licensed Contractor performing work with
licensed isotopes is responsible for ensuring that safe
handling procedures and contingency plans have been de-
veloped which comply with all government regulations. He
is also responsible for ensuring that all applicable protective
equipment, instruments, rescue and decontamination
facilities are on hand and in operable condition before the
job commences.
DRAINING AND DEPRESSURING
PURPOSE:
To provide safe precautions for the draining and depressur-
ing of toxic or combustible materials.
APPLICATION:
All plant and field operations.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Static Electricity- [See: Electricity]
Combustible and Toxic Fluids
Environmental Impact
PRECAUTIONS:
Draining and Depressuring should be carried out in a
controlled fashion. Valves should be opened slowly.
Depressuring:
aution should be exercised to ensure that any vessel,
C
line, or piece of equipment to be depressured, has been
completely isolated. Depressuring should be done
only by qualified personnel. Valves that are blocked in
should be tagged. Pressure gauges should not be relied
153
on for assurance of complete depressuring. [See: Energy

Isolation]
Draining:
Electrical
hen draining a vessel, certain precautions must be

W
followed:
1. Before draining, the worker must know where
the material is going, and the situation at that
area (i.e., welding in the vicinity, or if it is a
liquid, how it is being contained).
2. Pressured vessels should not be drained
through hose. Temporary, secured piping or
existing drain lines should be used.
3. When draining, the worker should not leave
the area. If it is necessary to leave, he should
close the valve.
ELECTRICAL
PURPOSE:
To provide a general understanding of the hazards associ-
ated with electricity.
APPLICATION:
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Static Electricity:
Sparks resulting from the accumulation of static electricity
often cause fires. A static charge can be generated from
friction resulting from the passage of oil through a pipeline,
the pouring of liquid from one container to another, or
steam passing through a hose. Static electricity can also be
caused by the flow of air, vapor, steam, water, moving belts
of flywheels or rubbing clothing. The hazard is more severe
in dry cold weather than in humid weather when most
surfaces are coated with a film of moisture, making them
154
good conductors and draining off static charges.
Electrical
Steam, a blast of sand, or hydrocarbons rushing through
hose or pipe, or issuing from open end pipes, can generate a
large static charge. The operator should refrain from open-
ing sample lines or drains any wider than necessary.
Another source of potential static electricity is the use of

portable plastic flammable liquid containers (1 - 5 gallon
containers used for removing, filling, storing on a plastic
pickup box liner).
PROCEDURES:
Most power tools and portable electrical test equipment are
not rated for use in hazardous areas, and are equipped with
standard U-ground plugs. It is necessary, in many instances,
to use a short cheater cord to adapt for explosion-proof
electrical receptacles, or extension cords to the non-explo-
sion-proof tool or test equipment. Due to the hazards of
arcing electrical equipment or connections, the following
procedures must be followed:
All
electrical equipment not approved for use in
hazardous areas, must be treated as hot work,
taking the necessary gas checks and obtaining
Hot Work Permits - [See: Safe Work Permits]
A
ll extension cords used must have explosion-
proof ends (connectors)
A
ll cheater cords must be less than 2 feet in
length with one male explosion-proof end and
one female standard U-ground plug, and must
be used only at the immediate location of the
tool or test equipment
A
ll connections at standard U-ground plugs
must be made and adequately taped (to prevent
them from pulling apart), before plugging into
the explosion-proof receptacles
When the job is completed, connections must be
155
broken at the explosion-proof receptacle first

A
ll portable electrical equipment that is approved
for use in hazardous areas (such as some pumps
Electrical
and air movers driven by explosion-proof mo-

tors) must have cords equipped with explosion-
proof ends. This cord must be rated for extra
hard usage as per the Canadian Electrical Code
(re: rule 18-122) Where an electrical hazard
exists because of dampness (i.e., boilers being
cleaned), portable lighting units should be used.
Portable lighting units must have heavy-duty
extension cords with ground fault interrupter,
or that permitted by local regulations. Suitable
guards must be provided for portable lamps
Grounding/Bonding:
The terms bonding and grounding should not be used
interchangeably, because the two processes have distinctly
different functions. Bonding eliminates a difference in po-
tential between objects, but does not eliminate a difference
in potential between these objects and the earth. Ground-
ing eliminates a difference in potential between an object
and ground. The usual precaution to avoid static electricity
sparking is proper bonding and grounding:
B
onding and grounding are effective only when
applied to conductive bodies. Bonding and
grounding systems should be inspected regularly
for good mechanical condition.
B
efore loading or unloading any fluid/material
by hose or piping, the truck/equipment must be
grounded and bonded.
W
hen samples are taken in a container, the
operator must ensure the container is in contact
with the filling nozzle or bonded by cable. When
drawing samples in a glass bottle, the filling
nozzle must be in contact with the liquid in the
bottle.
156
W
hen Draining or Depressuring fluid/material
into a container, the container must be bonded
to the drain and depressuring valve.
Electrical
A
ll equipment and buildings must be grounded
according to the applicable electrical regulations.
Cathodic Protection:
The nature of a cathodic protection system is to put an
electrical charge on the pipe or equipment in question, to
prevent external corrosion. As a result, the cathodic protec-
tion must be shut off or disconnected, and the equipment
bonded and grounded before work is started.
Work in the Vicinity of Underground Power Cable:

No person shall commence excavation work until the
vicinity has been checked and underground electrical power
cables located.
Electrical power cables should be shut-off whenever

possible, prior to commencing work. All underground
power cables shall be located by hand digging method or
Hydrovacing methods.
PRECAUTION:
Electrical Grounding:
Serious harm can result from electricity with rela-
tively low voltages if equipment is not properly
grounded.
Portable Lighting:
Where an electrical hazard exists because of damp-
ness (i.e., boilers being cleaned), portable lighting
units should be used. Portable lighting units must
have heavy-duty extension cords with ground fault
interrupter, or that permitted by local regulations.
Suitable guards must be provided for portable lamps.
157
Batteries:
atteries used and/or stored in enclosed spaces must
B
be vented to remove hydrogen gases. Sealed,
Electrical
maintenance free batteries are excluded from this

requirement.
Inspection:
ermography (infra-red scan) is a recommended
Th
practice on electrical equipment to locate potential
problems. This should be done on a routine basis or
before any major s hutdowns.
Identification:
All electrical panels should be identified as to the
equipment they control.
Appropriate signs should be posted on electrical
switch gear cabinets, sub-stations and rooms to warn
personnel of electrical danger.
anger An Equipment Starts Automatically sign
D
must be displayed on equipment which starts
automatically.
Above Ground Clearance:
PRECAUTION:
Minimum clearance from an overhead power line is as
follows:
The employer must accurately determine the voltage of any
energized electrical equipment or conductor and the mini-
mum distance from it required by 19.24 (2) subsection (1).
Safe limit of approach distances from overhead power lines

for persons and equipment
158
Alberta - Refer to OH & S sections 225, 226 schedule 4 for

further information
Electrical
Operating voltage between conductors of overhead Safe limit of approach distance for persons and
power line equipment
0-750 volts
300 millimetres
Insulated or polyethylene covered conductors
0-750 volts Bare, uninsulated 1.0 meter
Above 750 volts Insulated conductors 1.0 meter
750 volts 40 kilovolts 3.0 meters
69 kilovolts, 72 kilovolts 3.5 meters
500 kilovolts 7.0 meters
British Columbia - Refer to OH & S Table 19-1 for further

information
Voltage Minimum distance

Phase to phase Meters Feet
Over 750 V to 75 kV 3 10
Over 75 kV to 250 kV 4.5 15
Over 250 kV to 550 kV 6 20
Ontario:
Over 750 V to 150 kV: 3m
Over 150 kV to 250 kV: 4.5m
Over 250 kV: 6m
These clearances apply to any direction, vertical or hori-
zontal. If it is necessary to work closer than the minimum
distance, authorization shall be obtained from the utility
159
company. When utility company approval or authorization

is required, the operating line voltage must be verified by a
designated, competent individual from the utility company.
Electrical
The area directly under or adjacent to an overhead power

line shall not be used for storage of material, or equipment.
No excavations or similar operation shall be carried out in
the vicinity of overhead power lines that would reduce the
original support of the power line. Earth or other material
shall not be placed under or adjacent to an overhead power
line in such a manner that the minimum ground clearance
would be reduced.
Vehicle load clearance shall not be of a height that would
be in violation of the safe limits of approach from overhead
power lines.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
Only company-authorized personnel may work on electri-
cal equipment.
[See: Electrical Protection Branch Regulations]
TRAINING:
Only the following trained and BP authorized personnel
will be allowed to do Electrical work on BP Facilities and
Pipelines:
a) Journeyman Electricians
b) Electrician Apprentice
c) Refer to the Provincial Electrical regulations.
Only Journeyman Electricians or, Apprentices under the
direct supervision of Journeyman Electrician, may work on
equipment rated at more than 750 volts.
Any person who knows of a fire of electrical origin or sus-

pected electrical origin shall, as soon as practicable, report
the accident, contact or fire to a technical Administrator
for the electrical discipline or to a safety codes officer and
the safety codes officer shall notify a technical Administra-
160
tor for the electrical discipline. After an accident described

in subsection (1), no person shall remove or interfere with
anything in, on or about the place where the accident oc-
Electrical
curred until permission has been granted by a safety codes
officer in the electrical discipline, unless it is necessary to
do so to prevent death or injury, to protect property or to
restore service. Refer to Safety Codes Act Section 16 (1-3)
for further information.
ELECTRICAL STORMS
GUIDELINES TO STAY SAFE DURING ELECTRICAL

STORMS:
E
ach morning check local weather websites for
severe weather forecasts. Plan your day.
I f a potential electrical storm is approaching,
outside work must cease until safe to resume.
I f you can hear thunder you are still in the strik-
ing distance of lighting.
I f possible, go indoors or as a second option into
a non convertible vehicle...Most homes, office,
business and process buildings are grounded as
per regulatory requirements.
O
nce indoors, stay away from windows and
doors.
D
o not use corded telephones except for emer-
gencies.
I f possible unplug electronic equipment before
the storm arrives and avoid contact with electri-
cal equipment or cords during the storm.
A
void contact with plumbing, including sinks,
baths and faucets.
I f outdoors, go to a low point. Lightening hits
the tallest object. Get down if you are in an
exposed area.
Stay away from trees.
161
A
void metal objects such as golf clubs, fishing
Equipment Shutdown
rods, metal tools,...

I f you feel a tingling sensation or your hair
stands on end, lightning may be about to strike.
Crouch down and cover your ears.
Stay away from all sources of water or wet grass.
Dont stand close to other people - spread out.
V
ictims of lightning strikes should be given CPR
if necessary, and seek medical attention.
EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS, TEMPORARY

BY-PASS OF
PURPOSE:
To provide for the safe use of temporary bypasses of
shutdown systems.
APPLICATION:
All Production Equipment
DEFINITION:
Equipment shutdown systems are:
a) Electrical
b) Pneumatic
c) Mechanical
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
If equipment shutdowns are left disabled, the potential for
damage to equipment or injury to personnel exists.
PROCEDURES:
Equipment protection devices must not be altered, tam-
pered with, adjusted or repaired, except by qualified persons
designated by the supervisor in charge.
162
Equipment shutdown systems, whether electrical, pneu-
Eyewash Stations
matic, or mechanical should not be by-passed. The piece of
equipment should be taken out of service to make necessary
repairs. However, there are situations where it becomes
impractical or impossible to work with a piece of equip-
ment without some manner of by-passing or jumping the
shutdown system temporarily.
In all areas the potential hazards must be evaluated and a
site-specific procedure developed to maintain safe opera-
tion.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
Responsibility lies with the Supervisor and employees in-
stalling, operating, or repairing equipment, while shutdown
systems are by-passed.
EYEWASH STATIONS & DELUGE SHOWERS
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the provisions and placement
of eyewash stations and deluge showers in BP Canada
worksites.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada worksites where personnel exposure to
injurious chemicals exists.
PREPARATIONS:
Each worksite must be evaluated to determine the need for
emergency eyewash stations and safety showers. Minimiz-
ing exposure through the use of alternative chemicals,
enclosed systems or bulk storage should be the first line of
defense.
Where the exposure cannot be eliminated, the risk should
be categorized as high, moderate or low in accordance with
BC Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 5.88:
163
H
igh: risk of irreversible tissue damage to the
Equipment Shutdown
eyes or skin or of serious illness resulting from

rapid absorption of a toxic substance through the
eyes or skin, or where the risk of igniting cloth-
ing is present.
M
oderate: risk of irritation or other reversible
harm to the eyes or skin, or of illness resulting
from absorption of a toxic substance through the
eyes or skin.
Low: risk of mild eye or skin irritation.
Emergency eyewash and shower facilities must :
o B
e designed so that once activated, the flow of
water will continue without requiring the use
of the operators hands.
o Clearly identify their location and provide
directions for use.
o Be protected from all potential chemical
contamination, freezing and from high heat
exposure.
o Where specified, provide tempered water
(15 30C) unless non-tempered water is
recommended by a Doctor to reduce the risk
of worker injury.
Personal protective equipment must be supplied. The use of

this equipment is mandatory.
Note: Special care must be exercised in the selection of

personal protective equipment at worksites where large
volumes of water are not readily available.
PROCEDURES:
Location:
High Risk
Tempered continuous flow eyewash stations and deluge
showers must be placed within 5 seconds walking distance
164
but no greater than 6 m (20 ft) from high-risk areas. For
Eyewash Stations
high risk corrosive gases such as ammonia or chlorine, the
facilities must not be located in the gas storage or use area,
but rather adjacent to it.
Showers may be located further than 6m if:
A
non-tempered drench hose is within 5 seconds
walking distance but no greater than 6 m.
A
tempered shower facility can be reached within
5 minutes of the accident.
Moderate Risk
Tempered emergency eyewash and shower equipment must
be within 10 seconds walking distance but no further than
30 m (100 ft) unless:
F
irst aid services are maintained to start treat-
ment within 5 minutes of an accident.
A
drench hose is located with 10 seconds walk-
ing distance but no greater than 30 m.
Low Risk
Effective means to flush the eyes and skin within 10
seconds walking distance but no further than 30 m (100 ft).
Volume of Water Required:
S afety showers and/or emergency eyewash
stations must meet the requirements of ANSI
standard Z358.1-1981.
S afety showers, emergency eyewash stations and
portable self-contained units must be capable of
delivering sufficient water for not less than 15
minutes (or more if required by the nature of the
material).
E
yewash stations must be capable of delivering a
minimum of 1.5 L/min of water with a pressure
not exceeding 175 kPa (24psi) and with a spray
pattern designed to effectively flush both eyes.
Drench hoses must be capable of delivering a
165
minimum of 11.4 L/min.

Eyewash Stations
If potable water systems are available, eyewash and showers

should be permanently installed.
Where potable water systems are not available, approved
portable or self-contained safety showers and/or eyewash
units are recommended.
Eyewash Bottles:
As a minimum, emergency eyewash bottles, one liter size,
should be available at all worksites. This may require a
bottle in each vehicle.
Upon opening or breaking the seal of the one liter eyewash
bottle, the entire contents must be used or disposed. Only
bottles with an identified expiration date are approved for
use at BP Canada worksites.
Employees should immediately go to the nearest available
source of potable water to continue flushing for a minimum
of 15 minutes, and to obtain medical help as soon as
possible.
PRECAUTIONS:
Alarm devices should be considered for remote or large
worksites. This precaution will signal others that the shower
or eyewash unit has been activated. Back-up personnel can
then proceed to the location.
Eyewash and shower stations should be:
T
ested upon initial installation in accordance
with manufacturers instructions.
C
hecked weekly to ensure access is not blocked
by material or equipment.
Permanently plumbed eyewash stations should:
Use only potable water.
B
e flushed weekly (note BC requires monthly)
for a minimum of 5 minutes to completely flush
the branch of water line supplying the unit. This
will verify they are operational, and ensure a
166
clean supply of water.

P
ortable or self-contained eyewash or shower
Fire Protection
units should:
U
se only potable water or an isotonic saline
flushing solution.
H
ave the water replaced regularly or as per
manufacturers specifications, to ensure a clean
supply of water.
All operational checks and flushes should be recorded.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Supervisor in
charge, and all employees, to assess the need and provide
emergency eyewash or safety shower units where required.
TRAINING:
Employees in charge of handling or working with injurious
chemicals must be instructed in the proper use and location
of all emergency eyewash and safety shower units.
FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
PURPOSE:
To provide information on reliable fire suppression equip-
ment, specific work areas with the proper type of protection
relative to classification, and a method of inspection and
training to ensure that equipment is properly maintained
and functional at all times.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada field locations.
PROCEDURES:
Classification of Fires:
Class A Fires Occur in ordinary combustible
167
materials such as wood, cloth, and paper. Extin-

guishing agents most commonly used are water
Fire Protection
and type ABC dry chemical agent (Ansul Foray).

C
lass B Fires Occur in the vapor-air mixture
over the surface of a flammable liquid such as
grease, gasoline, or oil. BC type dry chemical
(Ansul Purple- K), foam, carbon dioxide, and
water fog may be used as extinguishing agents.
C
lass C Fires Occur in electrical equipment.
Non-conducting extinguishing agents must
be used. Carbon dioxide is the most suitable
extinguishing agent. Dry chemical agents can
be used, but require extensive clean-up of equip-
ment after the fire.
C
lass D Fires Occur in combustible materials
such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium, and
sodium. Specialized techniques, extinguishing
agents, and extinguishing equipment have been
developed to control and extinguish fires of this
class. The most commonly used agent is MET-L-
X.
Location and Placement of Extinguishers:

Fire extinguishers must be placed in accordance with
local fire regulations, National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) guidelines, and the guidelines included in the chart
later in this section.
Recharge:
All fire extinguishers must be recharged with the proper
chemical immediately after use. Only a certified technician
can recharge a fire extinguisher in non emergency situ-
ations. Chemicals must never be mixed, as the resulting
chemical reactions may damage the extinguisher, as well
as create a safety hazard. Fire extinguishers that are of the
external cartridge type or wheeled units must be recharged
by personnel trained in recharging. Chemicals used for
168
recharging must be of the type used by the manufacturer of

the extinguisher.
Fire Protection
ABC Extinguishers Foray
BC Extinguishers Purple-K
LOCATION AND PLACEMENT OF FIRE EXTIN-
GUISHERS RECOMMENDED
Inspection and Maintenance:

All maintenance must be performed by a competent person
in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. (A
competent person is one who has been trained in the re-
quired maintenance procedure.) The following inspections
are the minimum requirement. The findings of inspections
must be documented and retained on file at each BP
Canada location.
Monthly Inspection Requirements:

1. All units must be in the designated location and
visible.
2. All units must be checked to ensure operational
reliability (i.e., seals in place, nozzle and hoses
unobstructed, easy access to units).
Annual Inspections must be performed as per manufactur-
ers specifications and applicable government regulations.
TRAINING:
The effectiveness of fire-fighting equipment may increase
by as much as 40% when it is used by a trained employee.
Regular fire training is a requirement under occupational
health and safety legislation, and is also in the companys
best interest to prevent loss to people, property, and process.
[See: Training]
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of BP Canada to ensure that
169
adequate, properly maintained fire protection is available at

Fire Res. Workwear
each worksite.
The contractor is responsible for the proper operation,
inspection and maintenance of their fire protection equip-
ment according to Government Regulations.
FIRE RESISTANT WORKWEAR PRACTICE
1.0 Scope
1.1 Th
is practice applies to all BP Canada Gas Perfor-
mance Unit (CGPU) and Canadian Natural Gas
Liquids BU employees, contracters, and other visiting
personnel doing work on BP premises and work sites.
2.0 Purpose
2.1 The fire resistant workwear (FRW) program is designed

to emphasize and enhance employee safety, through
ensuring the use of appropriate personal protective
workwear in potentially hazardous areas, by reducing
the risk of thermal burns.
3.0 General Provisions
3.1 ire resistant work wear must not be used as a substi-

F
tute for proper job planning or minimizing potential
hazards.
3.2 is policy is based on material contained within

Th
the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB
155.20, Work Wear for Protection Against
Hydrocarbon Flash Fire and **CGSB 155.21,
Recommended practices for the Provision and Use
of Work Wear for Protection Against Flash Fire, and
the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers
170
(CAPP), Consumer Guideline for the Selection of
Fire Res. Workwear

Fire Resistant Work Wear for Protection Against
Hydrocarbon Flash fires.
3.3 e outermost garments must be fire resistant and
Th
shall have reflective striping as per the specifications
outlined in Appendix IV of this policy. BP Canada
requires that all employees, contractors wear fire
resistant/retardant outerwear with reflective striping
while working on BP worksites. Visibility is a safety
requirement. See Alberta OH&S GSR Section 18,
or B.C. WCB OH&S regulations section 8.24,
8.31., and Saskatchewan and Ontario Applicable
Regulations. FRW coveralls are prone to damage
from sparks, welders and welders helpers may wear
FRW CarHarts or Leathers but the recommended
garment for welders is FRW Excel Brown Duck.
Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments section 84,
and Regulation 213 Construction Projects, sections
21 and 25
4.0 Limitations of Fire Resistant Work Wear:
4.1 The protective garments addressed in **CGSB 155.20,

and outlined in Appendix II of this policy, provide a
measure of protection against unplanned exposure to
hydrocarbon flash fire (approximately 84 kw/m2) for
relatively short periods of time, typically three seconds
or less. Protective garments may serve to reduce the
severity of burn injury as a result of a flash fire and
may not completely prevent an injury. Garments
that continue to burn after a flash fire incident are
hazardous.
5.0 Use of Protective Work Wear
5.1 e protective work wear should provide a good

Th
functional fit for maximum protection and comfort
171
on the job. Users should be aware that the fit of the

Fire Res. Workwear
garment could have a direct influence on how much

protection can be provided by a particular garment.
For example, a garment that is too loose or too tight
will not offer maximum FR protection.
5.2 e protective work wear must be worn properly.

Th
The zipper must be worn closed and sleeves and cuffs
worn down and secured. For maximum protection
collar should be worn closed.
5.3 Single layer protective garments are more effective

when worn over an additional layer of clothing (See
Appendix I)
5.4 Protective neck, head, hand and foot coverings

should be worn if the occupational hazard warrants
their use.
5.5 ertain synthetics or synthetic blends worn as

C
undergarments may not be appropriate for use under
fire resistant work wear, as the transferred heat from
a flash fire may cause them to melt. Undergarments
with melt resistant properties are required (e.g. cot-
ton, aramid, wool). See Appendix I.
5.6 Rainwear, high visibility vests and garments shall

be in accordance with applicable sections of
**CGSB155.20.
5.7 Applications where disposable garments could be

used are to protect regular FRW from extremely dirty
jobs (e.g., tank cleaning, equipment tear down), or
other fabric degrading jobs (e.g., painting).
WARNING: Disposable garments shall only be worn over

fire resistant garments and must meet the flame resistant
172
test and be approved as outlined in**CGSB 155.20. They
Fire Res. Workwear

are not intended to be the primary garment for workers.
NOTE: The outer most primary garment in any protective
ensemble shall not be made of any fabric that burns, melts,
or drips. The use of a garment that burns, melts, or drips
that is worn over a Fire Resistant garment may contribute
to the severity of a burn injury.
6.0 Where Fire Resistant Workwear Is Required
6.1 Fire resistant work wear shall be worn whenever an

employee enters a BP worksite where there is foresee-
able exposure for a hydrocarbon flash fire or an
explosion from combustible gas or natural gas liquids
is present.
6.2 These foreseeable hazardous areas include but are not

limited to:
Service rig operations
Gas plants
Pipelines, pump stations
Oil batteries
Natural gas liquids facilities
Aircraft refueling operations
Laboratories
Wellheads
Construction sites
Drilling rig operations
6.3 If, following a documented (e.g. MOC) site-

specific hazard evaluation, by the BP representative
or designate in charge, it is determined that there is
no foreseeable exposure to an accidental release of
explosive, or flammable mixtures, (e.g. an office set-
ting or while driving company vehicles), these areas
173
or tasks of exception where fire resistant work wear is

Fire Res. Workwear
not required, will be exempt.
7.0 Fire Resistant Work Wear Material Selection

and Ordering
7.1 BP Canada identifies the preferred material and gar-

ment selection for its workers, through contractual
agreements with a garment manufacturer. (See
Appendix II).
7.2 All fire resistant work wear selected for use must
meet or exceed the requirements established in
the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB
155.20, Work wear for Protection Against Hydro-
carbon Flash Fire.
7.3 se form GHSSER MF 90001 to order work wear.

U
Obtain appropriate approval prior to faxing to sup-
plier.
8.0 Fire Resistant Work Wear Provisions
8.1 Management, either local or within a Performance

Unit, must develop a site specific policy that ad-
dresses the following points:
Employee eligibility for FRW
Type of garments (See Appendix II)
Quantity of garments
Frequency of replacement and process for handling
Approval process for purchasing FRW garment(s)
How garments will be repaired in their area
Handling of garment maintenance, and
Other sections of this policy as applicable
174
9.0 Employee Responsibilities
Fire Res. Workwear

9.1 Ensures that all work is conducted in accordance with
approved procedures, equipment and training.
9.2 Maintains assigned fire resistant work wear in a proper
manner, e.g. sleeves rolled down, to ensure maximum
protection.
10.0 Employee Training
10.1 s an important part of using personal protective

A
equipment employees must be familiar with:
When and why FRW is required to be worn
The capabilities and limitations of FRW use
Proper garment care
The proper wearing of the garments
Th e potential hazards associated with the use of
non-fire resistant work wear in a flash fire sit
tion
10.2 s with all employees training, this should be

A
documented on individual training records or safety
meeting attendance minutes.
11.0 Contractor and Visitor Requirements
11.1 C
ontractors are required to wear fire resistant work
wear at all times and under the same conditions as
that of BP staff.
11.2 F
ire resistant work wear worn by contractors must
meet or exceed the requirements of **CGSB 155.20,
or as outlined in local area site-specific requirements
for contractors.
11.3 Unless prior contractual arrangements are made with
BP, contractors are required to have a fire resistant
175
work wear policy that complies with the applicable

Fire Res. Workwear
safety regulations as detailed in Operating Policy.

11.4 Unless defined in the site-specific fire resistant work
wear policy, a visitor is defined as a person who nor-
mally is not employed at the specific work location.
11.5 Visitors unless otherwise instructed by a local area

site specific fire resistant work wear guideline, must
wear fire resistant work wear at all times.
12.0 Maintenance of Protective Work Wear
12.1 T
o ensure proper repair and maximum garment
longevity, repairs and approved alterations to fire
r esistant work wear will be handled on a local basis,
as required, at company expense.
12.2 Repairs should only be made with components,

which comply with the original garments specifica-
tions and construction.
12.3 A
dequate decontamination of protective work wear,
according to the manufacturers recommendations,
by laundering or dry-cleaning is imperative in order
to maintain flame resistance and thermal protection.
Where oily soil is present, periodic dry cleaning of
garments may be necessary in order to remove flam-
mable contaminants or contaminants which may
impair the flame resistance. The site-specific FRW
policy should also address this item.
12.4 W
hen laundering protective garments, launder suf-
ficiently to prevent build up of hard to remove stains,
which could reduce flame resistance. Pre-treat oily
stains by either rubbing liquid detergent or powdered
detergent mixed with water into the stain or use a
176
pre-wash product recommended for oil stains. Use
Fire Res. Workwear

a heavy-duty liquid or powdered laundry detergent
and the hottest water recommended on the garment
label. It is harder to remove oily soil with cool wash
water
12.5 Follow all laundry precautions on the garment.

There are products which will lessen the effectiveness
of the flame resistance, in particular:
a) W
hether the use of chlorine bleach is advised
or should be avoided
b) Whether a heavy-duty soap can be used or
laundering must be limited to a heavy-duty
synthetic detergent
12.6 Unless otherwise decided by local management, the

responsibility for keeping issued FRW reasonably
clean and free of flammable or combustible materials
that could degrade the fire resistant characteristics
of the clothing will remain with the employee. All
cleaning must be done in accordance with manufac-
turers specifications.
12.7 S ee Static Electricity section for additional mainte-

nance recommendations.
13.0 Static Electricity
13.1 The major static hazard is the body which can store a
large static charge. It is imperative that in situations
here static electricity poses a significant hazard that
w
the body be grounded regardless of the type of cloth-
ing worn. Clothing can generate static electricity of
sufficient energy to ignite combustible atmospheres.
It is important to minimize the build up of static
electricity on workwear in order to prevent the
177
clothing from becoming a source of ignition for a

Fire Res. Workwear
flash fire.
13.2 Workers should be grounded before entering a

high-risk area to minimize the possibility of static
build-up and discharge.
13.3 W
orkers should also avoid removing any garments
while in the high-risk area. Friction of one fabric
against another may contribute to the generation of
electrical charge.
13.4 O
ne approach to reduce the static build up on
garments is to use an antistatic treatment during
laundering. This treatment works by trapping water
on the fabric to distribute the static charge through
conductivity. The antistatic treatment must be added
during each laundering according to the manufactur-
ers directions.
13.5 O
ver drying in the dryer should be avoided to mini-
mize static build up.
Appendix I
Clothing Worn Underneath Fire Resistant Work Wear
Other material worn in conjunction with fire resistant work
wear (e.g. clothing worn underneath) should not contribute
to the injury of a worker in a hydrocarbon flash fire situa-
tion. While the outermost layer of work wear worn must
be of fire resistant material clothing worn underneath shall
be of a nonfusible type. That is, clothing that does not
melt.
Examples of acceptable nonfusible materials that can be
worn underneath fire resistant outerwear include:

178
Fire Res. Workwear

Cotton Linen Wool
Kermel Viscose Leather
Nomex Proban
Appendix II
Fire Resistant Work Wear Supplier
Bulwark Protective Apparel Inc., located in Edmonton,

Alberta supplies all Fire Resistant Work Wear to BP Canada
Gas PU and NGL BU employees. Use form gHSSEr MF
90001 to order work wear.
The material garment selection (see below) and contractual

arrangements have been approved by BPs Fire Resistant
Work Wear Committee (see Appendix III).
Approved Material and Garments

Listed below are the Blue colored garments that can be
purchased as standard issue garments. Any other garments
purchased must have management approval.
179
Product Style Fabric

Fire Res. Workwear
One Gas Monitor Pocket Mesh or Solid

Unlined Coverall CLB6RB Excel FR Royal
Unlined Coverall CNB6RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Insulated Coverall CLC8RB Excel FR Royal
Insulated Bib Coverall BLC8RB Excel FR Royal
Button Front Shirt SLU2LB Excel FR Light Blue
Button Front Shirt SLU2NV Excel FR Navy
Button Front Shirt SND6RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Button Front Shirt SND6NV Nomex IIIA Navy
Pant Jean Style PLJ8NV Excel FR Navy
Pant Jean Style PNJ8NV Nomex IIIA Navy
Pant Jean Style PNJ8RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Insulated Parka JLP8RB Excel FR Royal
Insulated Bomber Jacket JLR8RB Excel FR Royal
Insulated Bomber Jacket JNR8RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Lined Bomber Jacket JLJ8RB Excel FR Royal
Lined Bomber Jacket JNJ8RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Mens Navy Fleece Hooded Jacket SEH6NV Excel FR Navy
Insulated Vest LNS2NV Nomex IIA Navy
Shopcoat KEL2LB Excel FR Light Blue
Hard Hat Hood HLH2RB Excel FR Royal
Hard Hat Liner HNL2NV Nomex IIIA Navy
Hard Hat Face Mask HNM2NV Nomex IIIA Navy
Balaclava HNB2NA Nomex IIIA Natural
Brown Duck Unlined Bib Overall BLF8BD Excel FR Brown Duck
Brown Duck Lined Bib Overall BLN4BD Excel FR Brown Duck
Brown Duck Linemans Coat JLC2BD Excel FR Brown Duck
Traffic (orange) or Visitor (blue) vest KNV20RB Nomex IIIA Royal
Mock styled neck long sleeved FRW SEL2NV Excel FR Navy
shirt
Regular Style Neck Long Sleeved SEK2NV Excel FR Navy
FRW Shirt.
Appendix III
BP Canadas Fire Resistant Work Wear Committee:
Chairman Dennis Steciw
Office 403-233-1292
Cell 403-803-3085
Members - Jason Groot
Office 403-233-1981
Cell 403-815-7215
Bill Adam
Office 403-233-1426
Cell 403-874-4375
180
Appendix IV
Fire Res. Workwear

Refer to the table below for the minimum configuration for
reflective striping on outermost garments for use by workers
working for BP or on behalf of BP.
Type of Worker: Minimum Striping Requirements based on legislation below:

Alberta BP Employee Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia
Alberta Full Time Equivalent Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia
Contractor working in BC Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia
Contractor working in AB Occupational Health and Safety
Worker in Ontario: Regulation 213 Construction Projects,

section 69.1
BC WCB Standard Protective Equipment Standard 2-1997
High Visibility Garment -
http://www2.worksafebc.com/Publications/OHSRegula-
tion/WCBStandards.asp?ReportID=30947
AB OH&S Personal Protective Equipment Flame Resis-
tant Clothing Part 18-
http://employment.alberta.ca/documents/WHS/WHS-
LEG_ohsc_2006.pdf
Welders
Ontario Regulation 213 Construction Projects, section 69.1
- Retro-reflective and fluorescent garment requirements
http://www.e-laws.gov.on.ca
Due to the fact that welders wear leathers on the upper
portion of the chest, their garments will need to have an
additional band of striping around the waist of their gar-
ments. This will ensure that the minimum required amount
of striping shows when they are wearing leathers.
181
FIRST AID EQUIPMENT AND MEDIC

First Aid Equipment
PURPOSE:
To establish practices and provide equipment and emer-
gency conveyance to ensure that adequate medical first aid
treatment is available at all BP worksites.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada worksites where employees or other workers
are present on a temporary or permanent basis.
PROCEDURES:
Equipment:
S tandard first aid equipment requirements must
be available and maintained for each worksite in
accordance with provincial regulations
E
mergency conveyance must follow provincial
regulations
E
ach worksite should have access to occupational
medical advice, i.e., off-site communications
Th
e attendant must not be assigned or undertake
activities that will interfere with the attendants
ability to receive and respond to a request for
first aid
Th
e attendant should be present in the area
served, during all working hours
Th
e service and attendant should be accessible
where the attendant can reach injured workers
within 10 minutes walking time or driving time
to render first aid. (BC First Aid Regulation
G3.18(2))
RESPONSIBILITY:
It is the responsibility of the BP Employee in charge to
ensure that adequate First Aid Equipment is available, and
strategically located for ease of availability. As per provincial
regulations employees must be familiar with their location
182
Gas & Liquid Sampling

and adequately trained as per provincial regulations to
render first aid. In Ontario, minimum requirements are
set out in Regulation 1101 First Aid, under the Workplace
Safety and Insurance Act.
GAS AND LIQUID SAMPLING
PURPOSE:
To provide a guide for the safe sampling and handling of
gas and liquids samples.
APPLICATION:
All facility and field operations.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
The sampling of gases and liquids represents a danger to
personnel and equipment due to the nature of the fluids
and the conditions of temperature and pressure present.
Static Electricity [See: Electrical]
PRECAUTIONS:
P
rior to sampling, the approved container
must be checked to ensure that it is of suitable
construction for the gas or liquid being handled,
and has a pressure rating sufficient to handle the
working pressure.
S pecific procedures are necessary when sampling
propane and butane in special sampling
bombs. They must not be completely liquid-
filled, as they are not designed to withstand the
extreme pressures of liquid expansion.
All sample containers must be properly labeled.
A
pplicable personal protective equipment shall
be worn while sampling.
W
hen sampling or checking is being done at a
bleed valve, the valve should be opened slowly.
183
If no flow occurs, a blockage could blow loose

when the valve is opened wide, resulting in a
sudden release of energy. This could result in fire
Guards
and/or injury due to the escape of gas at high

pressure.
S ite-specific procedures shall be developed to
identify the hazards associated with sampling.
(i.e., sour gas)
[See: Personal Protective Equipment]
[See: Permits]
[See: Safety Standby]
Transportation and Handling:
Th
e handling and transportation of samples must
comply with Government regulations for the
transportation of dangerous goods (TDG) and
the requirements of WHMIS.
TRAINING:
Only properly trained personnel should be taking samples.
GUARDS
PURPOSE:
To provide safe work practices for protection of personnel
from rotating equipment and heat sources.
APPLICATION:
All plant/field activities and equipment.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
All rotating equipment, belts, pulleys, grinder, etc., that
present a hazard to personnel must be guarded.
Any openings that could present a hazard to personnel must
be guarded.
184
All piping and equipment operated at a temperature that
Hand Protection
could cause personnel injury, must be insulated, clad,
guarded or otherwise protected.
PREPARATIONS:
Before any guards are removed from rotating equipment,
the equipment must be locked out and tagged.
[See: Energy Isolation]
PROCEDURES:
The guarding requirements and design for various aspects
of oil and gas operations are covered in Provincial OH&S
Regulations.
Guards should be re-installed prior to start-up.
PRECAUTIONS:
Under some maintenance circumstances, equipment may
have to be operated without guards in place. In this case,
the equipment must be marked and suitably illuminated to
identify and minimize the hazard. Guards must be replaced
as soon as possible.
HAND PROTECTION PRACTICE
1.1 This practice is applicable to all Canada Gas Perfor-

mance Unit employees, contractors, sub-contractors
and visitors to CGPU work sites.
1.2 The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all

reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the
safety of personnel who are or may be required to
work with their hands.
1.3 The requirement set forth in this practice will act
as the minimum requirements. Specific contractors,
185
manufacturers or plants may have more stringent

Hand Protection
requirements. In event of any discrepancies, the more

stringent requirements will prevail.
2.0 Purpose
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is intended to
protect, shield or isolate personnel from chemical and
physical hazards. This practice outlines the type of gloves
that personnel must wear when performing jobs that expose
the hands to absorption of harmful substances, cuts or
lacerations, abrasions, punctures, chemical or thermal burns
and harmful temperature extremes. Other types of PPE for
hands include barrier creams, finger guards, thimbles, cots
and palm pad mitts alone or in combination with Gloves.
This practice addresses the proper selection of gloves for
activities. Selection of hand protection is based on evalu-
ation of the task being performed, conditions present,
and duration of exposure, potential hazards identified and
performance characteristics of glove material.
3.0 Glove Selection

General Purpose - Leather Palm Gloves
For general construction work, not including any
hot work (i.e. welding), chemical handling, sheet
metal handling and electrical work, leather palm
gloves will serve as the minimum requirement
for all (BP Canada) employees, contractors,
subcontractors and visitors on any (BP Canada)
controlled sites. Leather palm gloves will provide
protection against abrasions, scrapes and cuts
associated with the day-to-day activities on
construction sites. Drilling and Well Service
activities are granted an exception to use cotton
Green King gloves.
Chemical Resistant - Neoprene/Nitrile Gloves/
Natural Rubber/Polyvinyl Alcohol PVA / Polyvi
nyl Chloride PVC/Viton
186
When working with chemicals, ensure that the
Hand Protection
applicable Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
is available, has been read, understood and the
protective measures as prescribed by the Manu-
facturer is followed. Important things to keep in
mind when selecting gloves are cuff style, length,
lined vs. unlined, chemical compatibility and
gauge. Additional information on the proper
selection and use of chemical resistant gloves is
available from the chemical manufacturer, glove
manufacturer and occupational hygiene.
A
brasion/Cut Resistant - Kevlar/Kevlar- Com-
posite Gloves
In applications where the potential for cuts and
abrasions to the hands are high, i.e. sheet metal
handling and insulating, use of utility, banana,
or lock blade knives, abrasion and cut resistant
gloves shall be worn. (jack knife blades that do
not use a lock blade mechanism are not allowed).
Electrical Work - Rubber Gloves
Important to ensure the gloves being used has
the correct voltage rating for the specific task.
Heat/Temperature Resistant - Welding Gloves
Important considerations when selecting welding
gloves are not only the heat protection it pro-
vides, but also the dexterity and sensitivity that
the gloves provide.
NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material) -

When working in areas where NORM could be present
gloves should provide protection from physical hazards not
chemical and most importantly must be disposable.
Other
Some specific tasks might require special and specific
protection i.e. jack hammering, requires gel padded anti-
vibration gloves.
187
Table 1 gives examples of job tasks and the proper selection

Hand Protection
of gloves for that task
Table 1 Glove Selection

Chemical Welders / Cut
Example Job Tasks / Work
Resistant Thermall Resistant Voltage Rated
Activities Requiring Hand Leather
(per y (e.g., (per NFPA 70E)2
Protection
MSDS)1 Insulated Kevlar)
Abrasive Blasting
Biological Substances
Chemical Handling (e.g., paints,
solvents, additives, lubricants,

engine oils, hydrocarbons,
& fuels)
Compressor / Pump / Engine /

Crane Maintenance
Chipping, Chiseling, Grinding,

or
Hammering, Scraping
Electrical Work on Energized

Equipment
Heaters / Reboilers Lighting

of
Housekeeping (moving

equipment & debris)
Ladders Use of
NORM Exposure to
Pigging - Launching / - If

Retrieving retrieving
Pipe / Tubing Handling,

Cutting, Threading
If using
Pressure Washing chemical
additives
Process Equipment
Modifications
x Pressuring / de-pressuring
lines & line breaking

x Inserting / removing blinds,
sight glasses, & gauges
x Operating valves, orifice
meters & controllers
4.0 Tasks not normally requiring hand protec-

tion
While this practice requires the use of hand protection
while conducting work it is recognized that some job tasks
must be performed without an individual wearing hand
protection. Although a thorough evaluation of the types
of hand protection available should be carried out prior to
making this decision.

188
Table 1 Glove Selection

Chemical Welders / Cut
Example Job Tasks / Work
Hand Protection
Resistant Thermall Resistant Voltage Rated
Activities Requiring Hand Leather
(per y (e.g., (per NFPA 70E)2
Protection
MSDS)1 Insulated Kevlar)
Respirable Fibers Handling of
Rigging
Scaffolding Erection and use

of
Sharp Objects / Materials

or
Exposure to
Tank Gauging
Temperature Extremes
or
Exposure to
Tool Use (non-powered and

powered)
Fitters
Welding / Cutting / Brazing Welders
& Helpers
The justification is two fold. First the task being performed

is considered low risk with respect to hand/finger injury
potential. Second the task being performed requires micro/
precise movement of hands fingers and the use of gloves
cause a loss of dexterity.

In order to comply with this practice, the minimum
required hand protection defined in this practice must be
worn by all employees, contractors and visitors to (CGPU)
sites unless a properly performed and documented hazard
assessment shows that hand injury hazards can be elimi-
nated or controlled.
Examples of job tasks that may not require the use of gloves
are listed in Table 2
Table 2: Example Job Tasks / Work Activities
Specific Examples
Not Normally Requiring Hand Protection
Activities conducted inside of living quarter,

office work, eating, smoking, etc.
control room and break room settings
bolts/nuts/screws/pins, tube fittings and ferrules,

Working with small hardware and equipment Teflon tape, wiring connections, adjusting
programmable flow meters, etc.
multi-meters, Pride Route meters, gas meters,

Using fine instruments and electronics
cameras, two-way radios, computers etc.
hearing protection, fall protection, cleaning safety

Donning PPE
glasses, SCBA's, respirators, etc.
189
5.0 Hazard Assessments

Hand Protection
OH&S Regulations require that an employer shall ensure

that a known hazard which cannot be readily controlled or
eliminated and that has the potential for causing serious
injury be identified and brought to the attention of workers
who may be exposed to the hazard.
Hazard Assessments may be performed on tasks to deter-

mine if hazards may be present that necessitates
the use of specific hand protection.
For individual jobs the hazard assessment may be approved

by the permit issuer.
For repetitive jobs the hazard assessment will be approved

by the plant/facility supervisor.
Step 1 - Determine what specific job tasks hazards
are present.
Step 2 - Develop procedures that will eliminate
or control identified hazards to the hands. If identified
hazards cannot be adequately addressed, the minimum
required hand protection must be worn by all affected
personnel.
Step 3 - Document and maintain the hazard assess-
ment at the work site (Attachment 1 or similar forms may
be used for the assessment).
Complete hazard assessment below and maintain document on site

Location: Date:
List the tasks to be performed:
Identify and list the hazards associated with the task:
List the control measures (if any) taken to reduce the risk of hand injuries:
List the hand protection required:
List of personnel performing task(s), attach a list if necessary:
Name, signature and title of personnel conducting assessment:
Reviewed by BP Project Manager or Designate:

Date: Approved Not Approved
190
6.0 Key Responsibilities

Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and
Field Visits
enforcing this practice, whereas all personnel are responsible
for complying with it. It is the responsibility of the job
team lead to reference this practice while developing and
reviewing Job Safety and Environmental Analyses.
7.0 Scope of Forms
7.1 gHSSEr MF34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment
GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS
1.1 This procedure identifies the steps needed to pro-

mote HSSE issues during field visits by CGPU staff.
1.2 This procedure applies to all Gas Performance Unit

activities.
2.0 Responsibility
2.1 I t is the responsibility of each team leader or his/
her designate to review this procedure as part of
employee training and awareness.
2.2 It is the responsibility of each employee to follow this

procedure when preparing for a field visit.
3.0 General Procedures
3.1 SSE issues at a site location will vary based on the

H
daily activities. Communication topics should be
adjusted to focus on the scope of work for the day
and the site specific HSSE issues associated with the
project.
191
3.2 rior to the visit, contact the relevant HSSE coor-

P
dinator and/or project manager and/or OCM and/
Field Visits
or foreman to identify any functional group HSSE

issues, site specific gHSSEr notifications or alerts and
any current HSSE.
3.3 rior to the site visit ensure all people traveling to

P
the site have the appropriate PPE, HSSE tools (SOC
cards if trained in SOC, HSSE opportunity cards),
safety training tickets as required (e.g.H2S alive) and
proof of indoctrination. Take time to ensure familiar-
ity with HSSE awareness programs (e.g. stop, think,
go; green hand; ISO 14001).
3.4 I t is recommended to review the 8 golden rules of

safety and identify relevant issues for the scope of
work at the location before proceeding to the loca-
tion.
3.5 hile at the site, dont stop the regular flow of work.
W
If you wish to participate in a meeting with the work
group, consult the person in charge of the site prior
to your visit to determine what time pre-job opera-
tions or HSSE meetings are held.
3.6 ogether with the foreman or the site supervisor,

T
conduct a site walk around that can include any of
the following components:
Evaluate housekeeping
Talk to workers about their activities
Carry out Safety Observation Conversations (SOCs)
R
eview compliance with one or two practices or
relevant HSSE issues as identified by the group
HSSE coordinator
R
eview status on follow up of actions on gHSSEr
notifications and alerts for that location
192
R
eview compliance with applicable permit
conditions
Housekeeping
3.7 old a debrief meeting with the foreman or site
H
supervisor to discuss your findings and suggestions
before leaving the site.
3.8 eave completed HSSE opportunity cards and SOC

L
cards with the foreman or site supervisor or provide
to the HSSE representative in Calgary to ensure
inclusion in the monthly HSSE statistics.
3.10 P
resent your findings to the functional group man-
ager or OCM as appropriate upon returning to the
office.
4.0 Documentation
4.1 S afety Observation Conversation (SOC) cards

(C-15) and HSSE Opportunity cards (C-1518)
should be utilized during field visits. They are avail-
able through all HSSE representatives in Calgary.
HOUSEKEEPING
PURPOSE:
To outline the requirements for housekeeping from the
point of view of safety of workers.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada employees, contractors and facilities
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Slipping
193
Tripping
Fire
Housekeeping
Falls
Crushing
Caught Between (Pinned)
PROCEDURES:
oor housekeeping practices are responsible
P
for many accidents in the work place. With a
little effort, this problem is easily eliminated
Good housekeeping practices include keeping
tools, materials, equipment, buildings, and
properties clean and in good order
Good housekeeping is the day-to-day respon-
sibility of all employees and is a continual
process. Periodic cleanups, or cleanups when
time permits, is not considered to be adequate
Tools and materials shall not be scattered
around the walking or working surfaces while
the job is in progress. Haphazardly scattered
tools, equipment and materials are an invita-
tion to an accident
No job is complete until tools have been
cleaned and properly stored, scrap and waste
materials disposed of, and the equipment and
work location is in good orderly condition,
and approved for continued operation
S harp and pointed tools shall be stored prop-
erly. Leaving such tools lying around loose
creates an unnecessary hazard
S lick spots on the walking surface caused by
water, oil or other substances shall be cleaned
up immediately. Allowing this condition
to exist, even for a short period of time, is
dangerous
aste rags, trash, etc., must not be permitted
W
to accumulate. All of it should be properly
disposed of as soon as possible
194
aterials or equipment delivered to the job

M
Hot & Odd Bolting

site shall be kept well away from the working
area until needed
rotruding nails, straps, or wire shall not be
P
permitted to exist in the work place. They
shall be removed immediately when found
aterial which is to be stacked, shall be
M
cross-tied or otherwise secured so it will not
fall over. Rolling stock such as pipe should be
secured so it cannot roll onto an employee
isleways and walking surfaces shall always be
A
kept clear of materials and equipment
I t is each workers responsibility to take action
and manage slipping hazards including that of
mud, ice and snow build up. Workers must
use caution in these conditions and apply
immediate mitigating hazard controls such as:
keeping walkways and stairs clean, spreading
de-icer / sand / nut plug to improve traction
and or barricading off unsafe areas to prevent
workers from entry.
HOT AND ODD BOLTING PRACTICE
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of this document is to describe the require-
ments and limitations for hot bolting and odd bolting in
E&P operations for the North American Gas SPU.
1.1 General
The removal and replacement of flange bolts on live equip-
ment is practiced for several reasons including:
Repairing corroded or damaged bolts
Upgrading the material specification/grades of
bolts
M
inimizing time spent freeing bolts during plant
shutdowns
195
Note: Hot and Odd bolting can be performed safely if

Hot & Odd Bolting
planned, engineered, and executed properly. The risk as-

sociated with performing Hot and Odd bolting should be
evaluated against the risks associated with the start-up and
shut-down of process equipment that would be required to
depressure the flange in question and the lower risk option
selected.
1.2 Potential Hazards

1.2.1 Hot Bolting
In hot bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by:
R
educed gasket compression during bolt
removal
G
asket failure from over-tightening of bolts
on replacement
F
ailure of bolts due to the increased stress
resulting from adjacent bolt removal
1.2.2 Odd Bolting
In odd bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by:
R
removal
Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement
I nadvertent re-pressurization of the equipment
during and subsequent to odd bolting.
Note: The scope of application is covered in Section 3.0 of
this document.
Warning: Removing, replacing or retightening bolts on
live piping and equipment is potentially hazardous but
can be performed safely. Extreme caution needs to be
exercised when assessing, planning, and carrying out these
operations. Due to the potential risk, Performance Unit
Leaders should carefully consider whether to allow Hot and
Odd Bolting in their operating areas and retain the right to
prohibit Hot and Odd Bolting.
2.0 Definitions
Accountable Person is the person in the organiza-
196
tion that has the ultimate responsibility. This
Hot & Odd Bolting

person is usually the Operations Center Manager
or the Decommissioning Manager
C
ompetent Person (CP) is the on-site BP
representative that is competent to supervise the
Hot/Odd Bolting operation. The CP shall have
a demonstrated knowledge and understanding of
the process system that is to be Hot/Odd Bolted.
The CP shall be designated by the Accountable
Person
D
ocument Control Management System is an
established means of controlling the issue, use
and updating of documents used in the manage-
ment of a site
H
ot bolting is the sequential removal, cleaning,
lubrication and refitting, or replacement of one
bolt at a time in a flanged joint, when the system
is pressurized or if the flange acts as secondary
containment
O
dd bolting is the sequential removal of alter-
nate bolts from a flanged joint when the system
is shut down, isolated and at low pressure or
depressurized but not necessarily gas-free
Th
e words bolt(s) or bolting includes bolts, stud
bolts, studs, nuts and washers, as appropriate
R
esponsible Person is a suitably trained and
experienced individual who has been formally as-
sessed as competent in Hot/Odd Bolting and has
been given specific actions or areas of responsibil-
ity by an Accountable Person
S ubject Matter Expert is an acknowledged expert
in mechanical engineering. This person is usually
the SPU Mechanical Engineering Technical
Authority
T
echnical Reviewer is a facility engineer or
subject matter expert competent in the design,
maintenance, and operation of mechanical pres-
sure systems
197
3.0 Applicability
Hot & Odd Bolting
3.1 Applicability
This procedure applies to hot and odd bolting
activities on piping systems and piping connections
at vessels that:
A
re standard joint types on weld neck flanges
such as raised face (RF) or ring type (RT)
joints in accordance to Tables 1 and 2
H
ave steel flanges meeting the applicable
ANSI or API specifications
M
eet the pipe size, pressure rating, flange
type, and bolt count specified in the Tables 1
and 2. Older flanges may have a lower rating
than those in Tables 1 and 2, and for these
flanges the lower rating shall be used
H
ave an operating temperature greater than
0F(-18C) and less than 140F(60C)
C
ontain hydrocarbon liquids, sweet natural
gas, produced water, glycol, or other non-
toxic gases
3.2 Specific Exclusions

is procedure specifically excludes hot and odd
Th
bolting activities on piping systems and piping con-
nections at vessels that:
C
ontain steam, toxic oil or gas (sour gas),
toxic chemicals, or asphyxiates
Are in cryogenic service
I nvolve clamped flanges (e.g. Grayloc, Victau-
lic, etc.)
A
re non-standard flanged joints and/or all
those found on heat exchanger head, tube
sheet or shell joints. These joints shall be
subjected to a full engineering assessment
Are associated with transmission pipelines or
198
regulated gathering lines due to regulatory
Hot & Odd Bolting

restrictions and the potential for high external
loadings
3.3 Restrictions
O
nly one hot bolting operation may take
place in a facility at a time unless approved
by the Accountable Person or his designee.
An approved SIMOPS plan and MoC system
must be in place
I f the flange has an insulating kit, a replace-
ment kit must be available onsite prior to the
commencement of work, in the event of an
insulation washer / sleeve failure
F
langes that have been sealed or patched shall
not be hot or odd bolted
N
o hot bolting shall be done at pressures
higher than those listed in Tables 1 and 2
4.0 Control of Work and Exception Process
4.1 Control of Hot Bolting Work that Conforms to the

Allowable Guidelines within this Practice
e overall practice of Hot and Odd Bolting is
Th
prohibited in a PU until approved by the Perfor-
mance Unit Leader (PUL) using the Management of
Change process. A PUL may decide to prohibit Hot
and Odd Bolting in their area.
e Hot / Odd Bolting Work Form in Attachment

Th
1 shall be used to verify and approve work in confor-
mance with this practice.
4.2 Approval for Hot Bolting Outside of the Guidelines
or any Odd Bolting
I n circumstances where the Accountable Person
believes that hot bolting might be safely performed
199
outside of the applicability criteria in Section 3.0

Hot & Odd Bolting
and/or outside of the requirements specified within

Section 5.0 and where there is no other practicable
alternative, an MoC is required that includes:
A full engineering assessment of the flange
A
Risk Assessment outlining rigorous control
measures must be conducted (i.e. SIMOPS
plan, mitigation measures, drains, emergency
response plan, fire hoses etc.)
A
recommendation from the Subject Matter
Expert and approval from the Accountable
Person
5.0 Procedure/Process
Hot Bolting allows for the replacement of one stud at a

time until all the studs have been replaced on a weld neck
flange. Prior to removing any studs, all existing studs shall
be checked for tightness by torquing the flanged joint to
the manufacturer specifications. Bolts should then be
removed and replaced one at a time in accordance with
a specified cross bolting sequence/pattern. All new studs
and nuts shall be torqued according to the manufacturer
specifications.
Careful consideration must be given to corroded studs,
nuts, and flanges. Degradation due to corrosion must be
assessed by the Subject Matter Expert before the procedure
is allowed to continue.
Hot bolting of corroded nuts and studs is prohibited. Hot
bolting and hot work are not allowed within 100 ft (30 m)
of each other.
A BP Competent Person shall be present during all hot
bolting activities.
Working on live piping and equipment should normally
only be contemplated when the advantages have been as-
sessed against the risk. The risk assessment should include:
a) As-built design of the flanged joint including
200
bolting and gasket specifications.
Hot & Odd Bolting

b) C
ontents of the piping or equipment (e.g. the
flammability and/or toxicity of the process fluid).
c) D
esign and actual operating pressures and
temperature conditions - check that the pressure
in the piping/equipment will be at the specified
reduced value and that the process conditions
can be held stable for the duration of the hot
bolting operation.
d) Th
e possibility of process upsets occurring, the
consequences of the upset and control measures
that can be put in place to minimize/eliminate
process upsets.
e) Th
e location and condition of the nearest up-
stream and downstream isolation valves relative
to the joint should be identified, documented
and discussed with all involved personnel prior
to commencing the work.
f ) P
osition and functionality of pipe supports
relative to the flanged joint - From a mechanical
standpoint, it must be established that there
are no unacceptably high external loads and/or
bending moments acting on the joint. There
should be no significant vibration of the piping
at the joint.
g) P
osition and type of flexible expansion joint
affecting the flanged joint.
h) Maintenance history of the joint.
i) P
ersonnel access and egress as part of a com-
pleted Emergency Response Plan for this work
activity.
j) M
ethod of removing seized nuts - Hot work
cutting or burning of seized bolts is prohibited
on flanges in hydrocarbon service due to the
flammability hazard and/or the toxic fumes
hazard when cadmium or zinc coated fastenings
are burned. Cold cutting is permissible with the
201
appropriate permit to work.

Hot & Odd Bolting
k) P
ossible degradation of the bolts, e.g. corrosion,
stress corrosion cracking, fatigue.
l) Possible degradation of the gasket.
m) Hidden or unseen anomalies or corrosion.
otential Hazards In hot bolting there is a potential
P
risk of leakage caused by:
R
removal
Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement
G
asket failure from over-tightening of bolts
on replacement
The practice of hot bolting shall only be allowed for those
flanges indicated in Table 1 (ANSI class flanges) and Table
2 (API class flanges).
NOTE: Some flanges require a decreased pressure rating
during hot bolting (from 9% to 72% less than normal
pressure rating) or are not allowed at all (ANSI 150 class
flanges). Use Table 1 and Table 2 in conjunction with local
hot-bolting safety practices to enhance personnel safety and
insure code compliance.
5.1 Hot Bolting Procedure

Cold cutting of bolts on non-hydrocarbon lines can
be used, but the blowout potential of the gasket and
its ability to be retightened should be considered and
included in the work plan.
Bolt removal, examination, and replacement shall be
as follows:
(1) Before the work starts, authorized personnel shall
check that:
a. All necessary materials, equipment, and
personnel are onsite
b. All relevant procedural requirements have
been met including all relevant HSSE require-
ments.
202
c. Appropriate safeguards are in place
Hot & Odd Bolting

d. The pressure in the piping and equipment is at
the specified pressure and that process condi-
tions are stable.
e. Th
e work form for Hot /Odd Bolting is
prepared (see Attachment 1).
(2) The authorized personnel shall check that:
a. E
ach of the existing bolts is tight to the correct
torque to ensure that bolts have not relaxed in
service.
b. Any abnormal conditions, such as loose bolts,
shall be reported to the Competent Person.
(3) Hot bolting shall be carried out on only one bolt
at a time, in a sequence specified in Figure 1, or
by other approved job-specific instructions.
(4) Each bolt complete with nuts will be removed
and examined. Nuts and bolts found to be in re-
usable condition shall be cleaned and lubricated
prior to reuse. Damaged bolts and nuts will be
disposed of and replaced by new items of the
correct specification. If there is any doubt as to
the integrity of the bolting, it shall be replaced.
Exposed flange surfaces must be cleaned and the
area under the nuts thoroughly lubricated.
(5) The bolt shall be correctly tightened and
tensioned to specified torque figures obtained
prior to starting the task. The torque figures shall
be consistent with the flange design, bolt type,
material, and condition. Initial retightening of
the bolts shall not introduce additional local
compression of the gasket.
(6) After all the bolts have been replaced, a final
tightness check will be carried out in the se-
quence specified in Figure 1.
(7) The Competent Person shall inspect the com-
pleted job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting form
and other required permits. Any comments shall
203
be attached to the form.

Hot & Odd Bolting
(8) On completion of work, the completed Hot/

Odd Bolting form should be filed within the
Document Control Management System.
5.2 Odd Bolting Procedure

Bolt removal, examination, and replacement shall be
as follows:
(1) Before the work starts, authorized personnel shall
check that:
a. All necessary materials, equipment, and
personnel are onsite
b. All relevant procedural requirements have
been met including all relevant HSSE require-
ments.
c. Appropriate safeguards are in place
(2) Normally, odd bolting is preceded by hot bolting
(to ensure that bolts to be removed are in good
condition and reasonably free to move). The
Competent Person should check the signed Hot/
Odd Bolting form for any comments that could
be relevant to the odd bolting activity.
(3) The Competent Person shall ensure that:
3.8.1 The pressure in the piping and equipment
is at the specified pressure and that process
conditions are stable.
3.8.2 Each of the existing bolts is tight to the
correct torque to ensure that bolts have not
relaxed in service.
3.8.3 Any abnormal conditions, such as loose
bolts, shall be reported to the Competent
Person.
(4) olt removal shall be carried out according
B
to the methods specified in the approved job
procedure.
(5) The sequence of bolt removal will be specified
204
as in Figure 2 or other job specific instruc-
Hot & Odd Bolting

tions.
(6) e Competent Person shall inspect the
Th
completed job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting
form. Any comments should be attached to
the Hot/Odd Bolting form.
(7) n completion of work, the completed
O
Hot/Odd Bolting form should be filed within
the Document Control Management System.
Table 1 (ANSI Class Flanges)

Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1)
(Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3)
Under Operating Pressure)
Normal ANSI Flange Normal Normal Hot Hot Comments

Pipe Class Type Bolt Count PSI Max Bolt Bolt
(4)
Size PSI Allowed
Max
2 150 RF 4 285 - No Insufficient gasket-seating force
2 300 RF 8 740 740 Yes
2 600 RF 8 1480 1480 Yes
2 600 RJ 8 1480 1480 Yes Not available. Use 2ANSI 1500
2 900 RJ - - - -
2 1500 RJ 8 3705 2850 Yes 23% pressure reduction
3 300 RF 8 740 740 Yes
3 600 RF 8 1480 1325 Yes 10% pressure reduction
4 300 RF 8 740 740 Yes
4 900 RJ 8 2220 2220 Yes
4 1500 RJ 8 3705 3705 Yes
6 300 RF 12 740 740 Yes
6 600 RF 12 1480 1480 Yes
6 600 RJ 12 1480 1480 Yes
6 900 RJ 12 2220 2220 Yes
6 1500 RJ 12 3705 3705 Yes
8 300 RF 12 740 740 Yes
8 900 RJ 12 2220 2220 Yes
8 1500 RJ 12 3705 3705 Yes
10 300 RF 16 740 740 Yes
10 600 RF 16 1480 1480 Yes
10 600 RJ 16 1480 1480 Yes
12 300 RF 16 740 740 Yes
12 600 RF 20 1480 1480 Yes
12 600 RJ 20 1480 1480 Yes
205
Table 1 (ANSI Class Flanges) -Continued

Hot & Odd Bolting

Normal ANSI Flange Normal Normal Hot Hot Comments
(4)
Size PSI Allowed
Max
16 300 RF 20 740 740 Yes
16 600 RJ 20 1480 1480 Yes
18 300 RF 24 740 740 Yes
18 600 RJ 20 1480 1480 Yes
20 300 RF 24 740 740 Yes
20 600 RJ 24 1480 1480 Yes
24 300 RF 24 740 740 Yes
24 600 RJ 24 1480 1480 Yes
1. Ratings are for ANSI B16.5 flanges made of

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
A-105 material at
-20 F to 200 F, and with A193 Grade. B7 bolts.
Calculations are in accordance with ANSI B31.3.
2. T
emporary is defined as no more than 10 hours
at any one time and no more than 100 hours per
year, per ANSI
B31.3 code for Occasional Variations.
3. Only a single flange bolt can be removed at a
time.
4. RF is raised face type and RJ is ring joint type.
All flanges are weld neck.
206
Table 2 (API Class Flanges)
Hot & Odd Bolting

Normal API Flange Normal Normal Hot Hot Comments
(4)
Size PSI Allowed
Max
1-13/16 10K RJ 8 10000 4100 Yes 59% pressure reduction
1. Ratings are for API 6B & 6BX flanges made of

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
A-105 material (for API 6B flanges 5K rating or
less) or AIS 4130 (for API 6BX flanges 10K &
15K rating) at -20 F to 200 F, and with A193
Grade B7 bolts. Calculations are in accordance
with ANSI B31.3.
2. T
emporary is defined as no more than 10 hours
at any one time and no more than 100 hours per
year, per ANSI
B31.3 code for Occasional Variations.
3. Only a single flange bolt can be removed at a time.
4. RJ is ring joint type. All flanges are weld neck.
6.0 Key Documents, Tools, References

BP GoM Safe Practices Manual
UKCS-SOP-075, Hot and Odd Bolting Procedure (April
2005, Issue 2)
D/UTG/054/00, BP Amoco Piping Joints handbook
207
Hot & Odd Bolting
Figure 1: Hot bolting removal and tightening sequence.
208
Hot & Odd Bolting
Figure 2: Odd bolting removal and tightening sequence.
209
al Standard
Standard SafetyPractices
Safety Practices Manual
Manual
Attachment 1
Hot & Odd Bolting

Attachment 1
Hot & Odd Bolting
HOT / ODD BOLTING WORK FORM

HOT / ODD BOLTING WORK FORM
(1) DESIGN CONDITIONS (from P&IDs, Piping Specs, Maintenance History, Current Operations)
Line/Vessel Number Line/Vessel Contents

Normal Operating Pressure Normal Operating Temperature
(psig) (C/F)
Line/Vessel Service/Fluid Flange Standard/Rating
Joint Location(s) Piping Specification
Location Sketch Attached: YES /
Gasket Type/Specification NO
Number of Joints to be Hot
Bolted Grade of Bolt Material
Number of Bolts in Flange Torque Loading (max/min
Bolt Diameter
(2) SITE INSPECTION

(If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items, then a full Engineering Assessment shall be completed as per
Section 4.1 of the Procedure with the appropriate approvals prior to proceeding. The BU Management of Change Procedure shall be
followed to document the exception process required by Section 4.1.
YES NO YES NO
Number of bolts as per Table in Section Pipe supports inspected and found
5.0 satisfactory
Joint inspected and found satisfactory and Adequate access for safe work
free from leaks. (No visual damage or
signs of bending stress in joint)
Joint free from vibration Pressure of system at or below specified
value as per Section 5.0
Operating Temperature <140F (60C) Operating Temperature > 0F (-18C)
Flange type as per Section 5.0 Ambient Temperature > 0F (-18C)
Flange rated as per Section 5.0 Risk assessment completed as required by
Section 5.0
Applicability requirements in Section 3.1 Applicability exclusions in Section 3.2 are
are met not violated
3) PREPARATION CHECKLIST (If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items, the work shall NOT
proceed)
YES NO YES NO
Bolt removal sequence issued Provision for bolt cutting (if allowed) Hot
cutting is NOT permitted on
hydrocarbon service.
Bolt removal methods issued Emergency Response Plan prepared
Bolt tightening procedure issued Equipment/materials available at site
All requirements of Procedure met
(4) CONDITION CONFORMANCE TO SPU HOT / ODD BOLTING PROCEDURE
TECHNICAL REVIEW COMPLETE:

TECHNICAL REVIEWER
Signature Date
APPROVAL TO PROCEED: RESPONSIBLE
PERSON
Signature Date
FINAL INSPECTION: COMPETENT PERSON

Signature Date
213
210
HYDRATES, IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL
Hydrates
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the proper identification and safe
removal of gas hydrates.
APPLICATION:
All BP plant and field facilities.
DEFINITION:
Gas hydrates are solid compounds formed by the reaction
of a gas with water. Some of the light hydrocarbons that are
components of natural gas, form hydrates under pressure at
temperatures above 0 degrees Celsius. These hydrates form
as crystals and look like snow. In pipelines, they can pack
solidly to form a restriction resulting in partial or no flow.
This is referred to as line freezing.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Caution must be exercised when a line where hydrates are
suspected, is being de-pressured and opened; the hydrates
may plug the line and trap pressure as well as dissolve and
release hydrocarbons and toxic gases after de-pressuring:
High pressure
Propelled solids
Explosive forces
Flammable fluids
Toxic products
NOTE:
1. Hydrates may occur as single or multiple plugs.
2. Hydrated lines should never be totally depres-
sured. Pressure should only be reduced to a point
below the hydrate curve.
211
PROCEDURES:
Identification:
Hydrates
Static pressure spiking on pipeline systems is the first indi-

cation that hydrates are beginning to form. A drop in flow
should not be solely attributed to liquid hold-up; hydrates
must be considered as the possible cause. The same applies
to flowing wells, particularly if the wellhead temperature
and pressure are dropping.
A pipeline system should not be run when hydrates are
forming, unless methanol is being injected or the flowing
temperature is being increased over a short period of time.
Removal:
Prior to removal, a site specific procedure must be devel-
oped following the Canadian Association of Petroleum
Producers guidelines for the safe handling of hydrates.
Site specific procedure must include, but not be limited to
the following:
1. All hydrates must be considered to be safety
hazards.
2. Supervisor or designate must be notified when a
hydrate is identified.
3. A
ll piping/equipment used for de-pressuring
will meet BP Process Piping specifications; all
threaded piping is to be no more than 1/2 NPT.
Depressuring valves must be needle or globe
valves.
4. W
hen de-pressuring, the hydrate must be de-
pressured from both ends with the differential
pressure on both sides of the hydrate not to
exceed 10%. If pressure is relieved on only one
side of the hydrate, a potential exists for sudden
rapid movement of the hydrate which may result
in damage to piping or vessels.
212
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) SAFETY
Hydrogen Sulfide
PURPOSE:
To set out safe work practices for the safe handling of
hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas by identifying the potential
sources, training of employees, and developing and apply-
ing special work procedures.
APPLICATION:
All personnel who may be exposed to Hydrogen Sulfide gas.
PROCEDURES:
Properties and Toxicity of Hydrogen Sulfide:
A
ll personnel entering a facility where H2S may
be present must be aware of the properties and
toxicity of hydrogen sulfide gas. They must be
able to recognize its presence, and know how to
protect themselves from its lethal effects. The
two tables on the following pages show the
properties and toxicity of hydrogen sulfide
Identification of Sour Sites:

A
t each BP Canada work lease, all sources and
concentrations of H2S must be identified. All
areas where concentrations may exceed 10 PPM
must have a sign posted at the lease entrance
showing the poisonous gas symbol. A sign stating
the legal description of the surface location,
name and telephone number of the licensee or
operator must also be posted. The lease must be
fenced in accordance with the applicable govern-
ment regulations. Entrance roads to the lease
must be considered part of the lease for posting
purposes.
A
ll leases where H2S exists must have a form of
wind direction indication.
213
PROPERTIES:
Hydrogen Sulfide
Color - Colorless
O
dor - Very offensive, similar to rotten eggs in
small quantities
V
apor - Density 1.189 (air 1.0) H2S is heavier
than air (thus low-lying areas may be more
severely contaminated)
Boiling Point -60 Degrees C
E
xplosive Limits: 4.3 46.0 percent by volume
in air
Auto Ignition Temp 260 Degrees C
W
ater Soluble Yes (4 volumes gas in 1 volume
water at 0 Degrees C)
F
lammability Forms explosive mixture with air
or oxygen
TOXICITY
Indoctrination Requirements for Work on Sour Sites:
A
t locations where H2S is present, H2S Alive
certification is required.
214
Entry to Sour Work Sites:
Hydrogen Sulfide
B
efore any person enters the immediate area
where a system contains H2S in sufficient con-
centration such that the occupational exposure
limits could be exceeded, all of the following
conditions must be satisfied:
1. The atmosphere in and around all buildings
and equipment located on a worksite must be
controlled within the occupational exposure
limits. The exposure limits are as follows:
1 5 PPM ceiling exposure limit. This limit
cannot be exceeded at any time without respi-
ratory protection
2. All employees who work in operations where
they may come in contact with hydrogen sul-
fide gas in excess of the occupational exposure
limits should be equipped with a personal
hydrogen sulfide gas detector that is capable of
alarming at 10 PPM unless continuous atmo-
spheric monitoring is conducted or checked
according to a site-specific procedure.
3. Continuous monitoring equipment is present
in all buildings to be accessed, or it has been
checked according to a site-specific procedure.
4. Any duties other than routine shall be accord-
ing to a site-specific procedure.
5. Communication monitoring, entry and work
procedures are in place.
Complete risk assessment to determine if
respiratory protection and emergency back-up
personnel are required.
H2S TRAINING DEVIATION

Workers that are required to perform work in potential
215
H2S atmospheres require current H2S Alive training.

Incident/Accident
Workers that are part of tours / inspections that want to

enter potentially low risk conditions for H2S exposures and
are not expected to engage in physical work activities may
be provided with a temporary deviation to enter the site
without having H2S Alive Training.
A completed hazard and risk assessment with deviation

form must be filled out in its entirety and signed by the
OCM or his / her designate prior to entry. The worker
being provided with the deviation is required to be ac-
companied with a BP representative for the duration of
time on lease. The deviation must also be supported with
the individual being escorted 100% of the time on site with
a worker with valid H2S training.
Refer to Form MF 91001 Deviation from Standard/

Practice Form
INCIDENT/ACCIDENT REPORTING
PURPOSE:
To provide incident/accident reporting requirements. (Refer
to BU specific reporting guidelines)
APPLICATION:
All employees involved in, or witness to, an incident
resulting in, or having the potential to result in injury or
property damage.
PROCEDURES:
When an incident occurs, the employees involved in, or
witness to the incident, are responsible to:
P
revent further injury and property damage if
this can be accomplished without endangering
their safety
216
Report immediately to supervisor or designate
Ladders/Scaffolding
L
og all pertinent data for inclusion in inci
dent/accident report
Secure evidence
If the BP Canada Supervisor or designate in charge of

the worksite believes further action is needed to prevent
loss of life or property, he/she will initiate the Emergency
Response Plan.
Site-Specific Procedure:
E
ach Performance Unit/Service Unit shall have a
written incident/accident reporting procedure.
[See: gHSSEr MS 430]
Note: Contact your HSSE representative for assistance with

incident investigation and report preparation.
LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING PORTABLE
PURPOSE:
To outline precautions for the safe usage of portable ladders
and scaffolding.
APPLICATION:
All plants, field, pipelines facilities or work locations where
work is being conducted on behalf of BP Canada.
PROCEDURES:
Storage:
L
adders must be removed and properly stored
after each use. Leaving ladders leaning against
equipment, vessels, etc., is not acceptable.
217
Inspection:
Ladders/Scaffolding
L
adders and scaffolding shall be inspected prior
to each use. Defective ladders or scaffolding in
need of repair must be removed from service,
tagged and replaced.
Maintenance:
L
adders and scaffolding must be properly main-
tained to allow safe and trouble-free use.
PRECAUTIONS:
Portable Ladders:
A
n employer must ensure that a portable ladder
complies with:
o C
SA Standard CAN3-Z11-M81 (R2001),
Portable Ladders
o A
NSI Standard A14.1-2000, American Na-
tional Standard for Ladders Wood Safety
Requirements
o A
NSI Standard A14.2-2000, American Na-
tional Standard for Ladders Portable Metal
Safety Requirements, or
o A
NSI Standard A14.5-2000, American
National Standard for Ladders Portable
Reinforced Plastic Safety Requirements
o L
adders must be equipped with non-slip feet
and be secured against movement
o E
xtension ladders must be equipped with suit-
able extension locks
o Wooden and fiberglass ladders may be used
only when working near or with electrical
circuits. Metal ladders must not be used in
this application
o When in use, the ladder must extend 1 meter
past any platform or landing, and be secured
from movement. It must be positioned so that
218
it is no more than one quarter of its height
Ladders/Scaffolding
away from the well or structure against which
it stands, and is secured and placed on a base
that is level and stable
o The ladder should be moved as the work
progresses
o When on ladder the worker muster ensure
three-point contact while climbing or station-
ary
o When working from a ladder at a height over
2 meters, the top must be secured, and the
worker must have fall protection
o Both hands should be free when climbing up
or down ladders. If material must be trans-
ported, it should be handled with a rope
o Only one person shall be on a ladder at a time
F
or heights over 6.5 meters, a ladder must not be
used; scaffolding must be in place
A
worker may not work from the top 2 rungs,
steps or treads of a stepladder unless:
(a) The stepladder has a railed platform at the
top, or
(b) The manufacturers specifications for the
stepladder permit
A
constructed portable/temporary ladder will
meet all material and construction specifications
outlined in the Alberta OH&S Code Section
134
Scaffolding:
Standards and Applications:
o C
AN/CSA S269: approved scaffolding must
be used when constructing and erecting scaf-
folding structures to work from.
o In applications between 2 and 6.5 meters,
scaffolding is recommended as an alternative
219
to a ladder.
Ladders/Scaffolding
o S caffolding must be constructed/installed in

accordance with all applicable regulations and
as outlined in OH&S Code Part 23.
o S caffolds must be constructed in accordance
with the manufacturers specifications.
o S caffolds must be tagged appropriate to the
current inspected usable condition, with ap-
propriate documentation and time of inspec-
tion
o N
o person shall utilize a scaffolding unit that
does not indicate by tagging safe for use or,
tagging has expired, or there is no tagging
present.
o S caffold must be equipped with acceptable
access and egress.
o A
ll Work conducted from scaffolding will
require Toe boards, top rails, midrails and
ladder well protection specifications prior to
work commencing.
o S caffold erection and construction will be
conducted by a certifier competent person.
[See: Working from heights]
[See: BP Golden Rule Working at Heights]
LADDERS, STAIRS AND PLATFORMS - FIXED
PURPOSE:
To provide direction for the design and installation of fixed
ladders, stairs and platforms.
APPLICATION:
All plant, pipeline, rigs and field facilities.
PROCEDURES:
220
The design and usage of fixed ladders, stairs and platforms
Ladders/Scaffolding
shall comply with government regulations.
and BP Engineering Specifications. Prior to the design of a
permanent installation these documents should be
consulted.
[See: Canadian Standards Association]
[Occupational, Health and Safety
Regulations]
[See: BP Engineering Specifications]
Lease Spacing Requirements (Reference only)
PURPOSE:
To outline the guidelines for working with fixed ladders and
platforms on all facilities.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Stairways:
o Facilities with Stairways utilized for access must
ensure:
a. The width of the treads and the height of the
rise of a stairway are uniform throughout its
length, and
b. The treads of a stairway are level.
c. A stairway with 5 or more risers has the ap-
propriate handrail required by this Code, and
d. A stairway with open sides has a handrail and
an intermediate rail or equivalent safeguard to
each open side.
o Facilities utilizing stairs with 5 of more risers
must ensure the stairway is equipped with a
handrail that :
a. Extends the entire length of the stairway
b. Is between 800 millimeters and 920 millime-
ters above the front edge of the treads, and
c. Is substantial and constructed of material with
221
properties the same as or better of lumber 38

Ladders/Scaffolding
millimeters by 89 millimeters
d. Post supporting a railing are spaced not more
than 3 meters apart at their vertical centers. A
fixed walkway, service stair or stile shall be at
least 55 cm in width.
Fixed Ladders:
o Design criteria:
a. Fixed ladder shall meet the requirements of
PIP Standard STF05501 (February 2002),
Fixed Ladders and Cages, published by the
Construction Industry Institute.
b. If a fixed ladder is made of a material other
than steel, the facilities must ensure that the
design is certified by a professional engineer
as being as strong as or stronger than that
required by PIP Standard STF05501.
c. Facilities shall ensure that a self-closing double
bar safety gate, or equally effective means, is
provided at ladder way floor openings and
platforms of fixed ladders, this does not apply
at landings.
Work Platforms:
o Covering Openings :
a. When working on a platform with an open-
ing or hole through which a worker can fall
personnel shall be protected by:
a. A securely attached cover designed to
support an anticipated load, or
b. Guardrails and toes boards.
b. If personnel remove a cover, guardrail or toe
board, or part of them, protecting an opening
or hole for any reason, then they must ensure
a temporary cover or other means of protec-
222
tion replaces it immediately.
Ladders/Scaffolding
c. If a temporary cover is used to protect an
opening or hole, an employer must ensure a
warning sign or marking clearly indicating the
nature of the hazard:
a. Is posted near or fixed on the cover, and
b. Is not removed unless effective means of
protection is immediately provided.
Guardrails:
o Facilities must ensure that a guardrail required by
this Code has:
(a) A horizontal top member installed between
920 millimeters and 1070 millimeters above
the base of the guardrail,
(b) A horizontal intermediate member spaced
mid-way between the top member and the
base,
(c) Vertical members at both ends of the hori-
zontal members with intermediate vertical
supports that are not more than 3 meters apart
at their centers, and
(d) Despite subsection (1), a temporary guardrail
does not require a horizontal intermedi-
ate member if it has a substantial barrier
positioned within the space bounded by the
horizontal top member, toe board and vertical
members that prevents a workers falling
through the space.
(e) A guardrail is secured so that it cannot move
in any direction if it is struck or any point
comes into contact with a worker, materials or
equipment.
Toe boards:
o An facility must ensure that:
(a) A toe board required by this Code is not less
223
than 140 millimeters in height above the

Ladders/Scaffolding
surface of the work area, and

(b) The space between the bottom of the toe
board and the surface of the work area is not
more than 6 meters high.
o An facility must ensure that toe boards are
installed at the outer edge above the work area
if a worker may be under a permanent floor,
mezzanine, walkway, ramp, runway or other
permanent surface where guardrails are installed,
or materials can fall more than 1.8 meters
o A facility must ensure that toe boards are
installed at the outer edge above the work area of
temporary scaffolding or a temporary work plat-
form if materials can fall more than 3.5 meters
o A facility must ensure that toe boards are
installed around the top of a pit containing a
machine with exposed rotating parts if workers
may be working in the pit
o This section does not apply to the entrance of a
loading or unloading area if the employer takes
other precautions to ensure that materials do not
fall from the permanent surface while loading.
Rest platform exemption:

o If each worker working on a drilling rig or
service rig on a fixed double ladder is equipped
with and wears a climb assist device that com-
plies with the manufacturers specifications or
specifications certified by a professional engineer,
an employer is not required to:
a) Provide the ladder with rest platforms, or
b) To have the side rails extend not less than
1050 millimeters above the point at which the
workers go on or off.
224
LINE THAWING PRACTICE
Line Thawing
1.1 Th
e purpose of this practice is to establish a safe means
to provide a sufficient heat source to thaw frozen
liquids inside of steel piping.
1.2 Th
is practice is applicable to all Canada Gas Perfor-
mance Unit employees, contractors, sub-contractors
and visitors to CGPU work sites.
1.3 The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all rea-

sonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety
of personnel who are or may be required to participate
in these types of activities.
1.4 The requirement set forth in this practice will act as the
minimum requirements. Specific contractors, manufac-
turers or plants may have more stringent requirements.
In event of any discrepancies, the more stringent
requirements will prevail.
2.0 Purpose
Thawing of frozen liquids in steel pipe is a high risk task

that should never include the use of an open flame such as a
tiger torch to transfer direct heat to the steel pipe. Frozen
hydrocarbon lines may have reduced pipe wall integrity and
when the frozen hydrocarbon is heated and changes state
to a gas; may provide a most dangerous fuel source for an
open flame. This practice outlines the types of safer heat
mediums available to assist in thawing lines and the hazards
associated with each application. Also included in the prac-
tice are considerations to prevent freezing in steel piping as
225
well as options to consider during construction to assist in

thawing lines once the lines are put into winter service.
Line Thawing
3.0 Pre-work required prior to heating of frozen

steel lines
P
rior to applying a heat medium to a frozen
line; workers must ensure that the line does
not have a differential pressure greater then
2800 kpa(g)
O
perations should attempt to carefully depres-
surize both sides of the frozen section of the
line
U
sing methanol carefully pressurize (manually
operated Baker pump) the upstream side of
the ice plug without exceeding the MOWP
of the line or 2800 kpa(g) differential across
the ice plug. Consult the methanol MSDS to
verify proper PPE
C
onsideration must be made to allow for liq-
uid and vapor expansion as the ice plug begins
to change state. If at all possible the upstream
product feed valve should be isolated
Th
e work area must be flagged off to prevent
unauthorized workers from entry
S ensitive instrumentation and non steel fit-
tings must be protected prior to applying heat
to a steel line
4.0 Type of heat mediums available for thawing

frozen lines
Electrical Heat Trace Portable generator or purchased

power
A good option is to strip insulation off of the frozen
line and install electrical heat tracing. The heat trace
226
must be installed as per both CSA and the Electrical Code

requirements. There are different options with the types
Line Thawing
of electrical heat trace being that it is available in both AC
and DC supplies. After the installation of the electrical
heat trace the line is wrapped with insulation to maintain
the heat to the pipe wall. Hazards include electrical energy,
sharp or damaged insulation, insulation fibers (glass foam,
fiberglass or silicate), and if using a portable generator
maintaining to the hot work permit and 8 meter rule for
potential ignition sources. When utilizing purchased power
the electrical connections must be explosion proof for a
Class 1 Division 1 area.
Prior to construction, selective piping should be
evaluated during the HAZOP study to consider installing
electrical heat trace lines before to the insulation is installed.
If the heat trace is installed it does not have to be put into
service and will provide an excellent option for assisting in
thawing the line in the event of future freezing. There is
minimal cost of doing this at the time of construction ver-
sus having to remove the insulation to apply a heat source.
Saturated steam utility low pressure
With the availability of mobile steamer units (field

operations / well servicing) and onsite low pressure boilers
(drilling rigs / large service rig operations) provide a good
option to provide heat for the thawing of frozen lines.
The frozen line must have the insulation removed prior to
applying steam to the bare pipe. Caution must be used if
applying steam vapor near insulation as moisture directed
inside the insulation may in fact lead to external pipe
corrosion. A recommendation rather then applying steam
directly to the pipe is to use heat conduction by strapping
stainless steel tubing to the suspected section of frozen pipe,
re-bundle the coupled lines with quick-wrap insulation, and
connect the stainless tubing to the steam supply and then
carefully controlling the discharge out of the tubing with a
control valve. Caution with regards to hot burner surfaces
227
and steam burns must always be controlled in addition to

the hazard of the open flame ignition source of the boiler
Line Thawing
(hot work permit and adhering to the 8 meter rule.)

Hot air - supplied by a Herman Nelson type of heater
Another option for heat medium is using hot air

directed from a gas fired heater unit. The hot air is directed
off of the discharge of the heater with the utilization of a
series of flexible heater ducts. With this option it is more
challenging to direct heat directly to the surface of the pipe
without wasting heat. Hazards include: hot surfaces of the
heater and open flame ignition sources as well as refueling
requirements. The heater unit must again be positioned a
minimum 10 meters from any process piping or building.
Operations must maintain a continuous LEL monitor
upstream of the unit (when the heater is in operation.)

Hot engine exhaust Internal combustion engine

Another option that may be available is using the
hot exhaust off of an internal combustion engine such as
a field technicians truck. A flexible rubber exhaust hose is
connected to the tailpipe and directed to the frozen line.
This type of application is dangerous and can only be used
in open spaces and never used inside buildings due to the
carbon monoxide concern. An additional hazard is ensur-
ing that the vehicle is safely parked outside of the 8 meter
minimum.
5.0 Hazard Assessments
OH&S Regulations require that an employer shall ensure

that a known hazard which cannot be readily controlled or
eliminated and that has the potential for causing serious
injury be identified and brought to the attention of workers
who may be exposed to the hazard.

Step 1 - Determine what specific job tasks
228
hazards are present.

Step 2 - Develop procedures that will
Manual Lifting
eliminate or control identified hazards
when required to
thaw frozen lines.
Step 3 - Document and maintain the hazard
assessment at the work site.


Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and
enforcing this practice, whereas all personnel are responsible
for complying with it. It is the responsibility of the Area
Authority to reference this practice while developing and
reviewing Job Safety and Environmental Analysis.
7.0 Scope of Forms
7.1 gHSSEr MF34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment
MANUAL LIFTING AND HANDLING HEAVY OR

AWKWARD LOADS
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for lifting, moving or handling of
any item.
APPLICATION:
This policy applies to all BP employees, contractors and
third parties who have a responsibility for ordering or carry-
ing out manual handling activities.
DEFINITION:
The identification of manual handling activities that pose a
risk to health and safety and the development of workplace
229
modifications are achieved through implementation of the

procedure Identifying and Assessing Manual Handling
Manual Lifting
Risk.
Manual Lifting and moving forces should not exceed 20

kg or 4.5 kg during seated work. However, this maximum
force limit standard may be lowered to account for indi-
vidual physical characteristics. These weight restrictions
only apply to ideal lifting conditions such as smooth lifts,
weight held close to the body, unrestricted lifting posture
and a good grip.
PREPARATIONS:
All work involving manual lifting or moving must be
evaluated before work begins. The evaluation should
include identifying any manual lift or carrying tasks that
have a potential to injure, perform a risk assessment and
identify risk control measures that includes considering job
redesign, mechanical lifting equipment and/or training.
PPE should also be considered such as gloves, protection
from chemicals, etc.
For help on identification, risk assessments and risk mitiga-
tion, refer to Guidance for Assessors Manual Handling
Programme: HSSE Group Resource Occupational Hygiene
and Environmental Health Team.
PROCEDURES:
SOCs and/or Critical Task Analysis should have been com-
pleted for common and routine manual lifting and moving
tasks. Examples of common, routine tasks are: barrel
moving, small pump lifting, valve replacements, furniture
moving, shipping and receiving goods on pallets. Refer to
the site specific procedure, if available.
If it is not a routine task and procedures are not available,

perform a risk assessment before commencing work and
detail risk reduction methods on the Safe Work Permit.
230
Answer the following questions:

Is the item to be moved greater than 20 kg?
Manual Lifting
I s it an awkward shape or have rough or sharp
edges?
D
oes it have to be carried greater than 10 me-
ters?
Does it involve twisting of the body?
D
o you have to bend down or reach for it when
picking it up or putting it down?
If the answer is yes to any of the questions, consider using
the proper moving equipment. If circumstances are such
that is not possible to use equipment to lift heavy or
awkward loads, then an alternative documented plan using
a hazard assessment and site specific procedure must be
developed to ensure an adequate level of safety to prevent
injuries.
PROPER LIFTING TECHNIQUES:

All workers should use mechanical means to lift objects
heavier than 20 kg.
Safe manual lifting requires the following steps:
1. Plan the lift. Get help for difficult loads.
2. Check your path is clear to where the object will rest.
3. Bend your legs half way, as if to sit.
4. K
eep your back straight but inclined forward far
enough so that your arms can lift vertically.
5. K
eep your feet flat and 30-40 cm apart for a
solid stance.
6. Grasp the object firmly.
7. Take a deep breath.
8. To lift, straighten legs and body, moving arms to
a comfortable position. Do not twist your back
while lifting the load.
9. K
eep the object close to your body. Know your
limits.
231
NOTE:
A
ll manual lifts should be planned to elimi-
Meter Proving
nate any twisting of the back during the lift.

W
hen in doubt, use mechanical means to
make the lift or move.
METER PROVING
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for safe Meter Proving operations.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada Plant and Field locations.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Static Electricity [See: Electricity]
Combustible/Toxic Fluids
PREPARATIONS:
S afe work Permits should be issued for all meter
proving
A
ttention should be paid to lease lay-out to pro-
vide safe and accessible prover connections.[See:
Lease Design]
U
nder most conditions, respiratory protection
will not be required. However, the meter prover
operator must wear breathing apparatus when
crude or products containing poisonous gases
are handled, if tests indicate such protection is
needed. A safety standby may be required.[See:
Respiratory Protection Equipment], [See: Safety
Standby]
A
ppropriate personal protective equipment must
be worn. [See: Personal Protective Equipment]
P
roving lines and connections must be properly
identified according to government regulations,
232
i.e., WHMIS. TDG
Manual Lifting
PROCEDURES:
1. E
ach portable meter prover must be equipped
with a minimum of 1 30# LTK B.C. dry
chemical fire extinguisher. When proving meters,
the fire extinguisher should be removed from its
holder and placed on the upwind side, and in
position for immediate use.
2. A bonding and grounding cable shall be pro-
vided for each meter prover. In order to protect
against the build-up of static electricity, the
bonding and grounding cable shall be properly
placed so that the meters and prover are bonded
together and grounded. This shall be the first
thing hooked up at the beginning of a proving
and the last thing disconnected at the end of the
proving operation.
3. W
hen using flexible hoses to connect the prover
to the meter unit, be sure the hoses are rated to
stand the operating pressure. They must be visu-
ally inspected prior to use and replaced if their
condition indicates a possibility of failure.
4. I t is recommended that the vehicle should not be
left idling while proving operations are under-
way. Also the wheels shall be chalked with park
brake set.
5. Always open the proper valves to relieve the pres-
sure on dust covers before attempting to remove
these covers. Extreme care should be used when
breaking connections or purging hoses and pip-
ing. [See: Draining and Depressuring]
6. Connections should not be drained on the
ground. Catch all drainings in a suitable con-
tainer for proper disposal.
7. In all cases, when using a prover that employs an
electronic counter system, all electrical connec-
233
tions shall be made before the power is turned

Mobile Steamers
on. After the meters have been proved, the power

shall be turned off before the electrical connec-
tions are disconnected.
PRECAUTIONS:
When meter prover leveling jacks are used, they should
be supported with blocks or firm footing, so that the ad-
ditional weight of the liquid will not unbalance the trailer
frame, making it a possible hazard to the operator.
RESPONSIBILITY:
1. The BP Canada employee in charge is re-
sponsible for ensuring that safe meter proving
operations are conducted.
2. For BP Canada-owned proving units, the
prover operator is responsible for the safe
operation of the meter proving unit.
3. The Service contractor is responsible for ensur-
ing that equipment, personnel, and job proce-
dures adhere to all applicable government and
BP Canada regulations and practices.
TRAINING:
Meter Prover Unit operators must be properly trained in
the safe operation of their equipment.
MOBILE STEAMERS
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for safe use of mobile steaming
equipment.
APPLICATION:
All BP Field facilities and leases.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
234
Combustible Fluids
Mobile Steamers
Steam Burns
C
hemicals Hazards: Any chemicals used with the
water must have the applicable MSDS available
on-site and the appropriate labeling requirements
must be met, i.e., WHMIS.
Static Electricity [See: Electrical]
PREPARATIONS:
Where steaming could generate a hazard to personnel or
equipment, an authorized BP Canada Representative must
be on-site. He must conduct and document a pre-job safety
meeting, and an appropriate work permit must be obtained.
[See: Permits]
PROCEDURES:
1. The steamer must be positioned a minimum of
25 meters from any wellhead, tank, or process
vessel, and pointed towards the access road for
quick exit. Any operation within 25 meters must
be treated as Hot Work.[See: Service Rig Safety]
2. The Steamer should be upwind of any potential
source of combustible gas, where possible.
Caution must be exercised with respect to the
expansion of metals and trapped fluid.
PRECAUTIONS:
1. All protective equipment required by govern-
ment regulations and BP Safety Requirements
must be worn during all steaming operations.
2. Caution must be exercised to ensure that cata-
lytic heaters, gas, fire and H2S detection heads,
instrument recorders, instrumentation panels,
and electrical or sensitive equipment are not
steamed. This equipment should be protected
prior to steaming to prevent damage.
235
Moving Heavy Equip.
MOVING HEAVY EQUIPMENT ON BP WORKSITES
PURPOSE:
This safety practice provides guidelines for the safe moving
of heavy equipment on BP Canada worksites.
APPLICATION:
BP Canada Plants, Field Operations, Construction Sites
and areas of heavy traffic.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
S erious injury or death [See: Personal Protective
Equipment]
C
ontact with piping or stationary equipment
[See: Ground Disturbance]
C
ontact overhead power lines [See: Electrical
Equipment]
L
ack of co-ordination with other operations [See:
Permit to Work]
DEFINITION:
1. H
eavy Equipment includes pump trucks, rig
trucks, pickers, tracked equipment (i.e. Dozers),
graders, etc.
2. Heavy traffic areas include highways and second-
ary roads and construction sites.
PREPARATIONS:
All routine job procedures and practices must be followed
before the heavy equipment is moved on to BP property.
PROCEDURES:
1. Face to face communication with the person in
charge of the site must occur before the pick up
or unloading of equipment on the job site. If
no one is at the site, the supervisor in charge or
236
designate must be notified.
Moving Heavy Equip.

2. The pre-job meeting and a safe work permit
must detail the specific instructions of where the
equipment is to be loaded or unloaded on the
job site and the potential hazards on the job site
i.e. power lines, pipelines, wellhead, etc.
3. Th
e right of way or lease boundary must be
well flagged or otherwise defined such that the
equipment operator will not enter into a trespass
situation.
4. I f unloading or picking up equipment in
darkness, all lights on the equipment must be
operational or there is an alternate light source
available.
5. Before operating powered mobile equipment, the
equipment operator must complete a visual in-
spection of the equipment and the surrounding
area to ensure that the powered mobile equip-
ment is in safe operating condition and perform
inspections periodically in order to ensure the
continued safe operation of the equipment.
6. E
quipment operators must wear provided seat-
belts in equipment when equipment is in motion
or engaged in an operation where the equipment
may become unstable.
7. If the equipment operator is using a ground
guide, the communication hand signals at the
end of this section should be used (See: Heavy
Equipment Hand Signals at the end of this sec-
tion.) and the ground guide must be visible at all
times.
8. All employees must establish eye contact and
have conformation of contact from the equip-
ment operator (i.e. nod, hand wave, call on a
radio) prior to entering the hazard area
9. Every piece of moving equipment shall have only
ONE individual directing it on the work site.
This person will be wearing distinguishable PPE
237
PRECAUTIONS:
Moving Heavy Equip.
1. W orkers on the worksite must wear reflective

striping on the FRC that are visible day and
night while working around heavy equipment.
2. Heavy equipment operators should be able to
prove their competency operating the equip-
ment.
3. Equipment must maintain 8 meters separation
form wellheads and facilities, unless under the
direction of a ground guide.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
Responsibility lies with the BP supervisor on site to ensure
the above procedures are followed.
Heavy Equipment Hand Signals
1. Raise Attachment 2.Lower Attachment

(bowl, blade) (bowl, blade)
Fingers Curled with Fingers Curled with
Thumb Pointing Up. Thumb Pointing
Down.
3. Push 4. Pull
First of One Hand Both Fists Clenched
Smacking into the Together Initially.
palm of the Other. Move Fists Apart in
a Lateral Motion.
5. Lower the Load 6. Raise the Load
Elbow at 90 Index Elbow at 90 Index
Finger Pointing Finger Pointing Up
Down Making Making Circular
Circular Motion. Motion.
7. Slow Down 8. Unload

Palms of Hands Quick Motion of the
Turned Down with a Arm with Fingers
slight Up and Down Curled and Thumb
Motion Extended.
9. Stop 10. Emergency Stop
Raise Hand to Head Hands Spread
Heights with the Sideways.
Palm of Hand
Towards the
Machine.
Note: These signals are Intended for All Heavy Equipment
Other Than Cranes. Standard Riggers Signals are to be
Used for Cranes.
238
NOISE EXPOSURE & HEARING CONSERVATION
Noise Exposure
PURPOSE:
To prevent the occurrence of occupational noise induced
hearing loss. All employees whose noise exposures equal
or exceed the allowable exposure levels shall be included
in the Hearing Conservation Program. Refer to the BP
Canadian Gas Hearing Conservation Code of Practice for
more details.
APPLICATION:
All BP operating facilities and associated personnel
S elected contractors may be included in audio-
metric testing and noise exposure monitoring
A
ll other contractors are expected to comply
with provincial regulations regarding Hearing
Conservations Programs
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
N
oise levels in excess of the allowable 85 dBA
time-weighted average (TWA) for an 8-hour
shift or 82 dBA TWA for a 12-hour shift
Key Performance Indicators
Th
e hearing loss rate target for each work group
is zero confirmed abnormal shifts and 7% con-
firmed early warning shifts
PROCEDURES:
1. Area Sound Surveys: (Format Section)
A
ll facilities will have an initial sound level
survey conducted to establish a baseline. The
sound level data shall be plotted on a diagram
to generate the noise map of the surveyed area
which includes buildings and outdoor areas.
This noise map must be reviewed with onsite
personnel and be posted at a prominent loca-
239
tion and accessible for worker review.

Noise Exposure
A
reas shall be re-surveyed at a minimum of
every five years or shortly after a change in
production process, equipment or controls
which may increase/decrease the noise levels.
2. Employee Dosimetry Monitoring:
A
representative sample of employees, whose
work tasks may be exposed regularly to high
noise sources, may be monitored to determine
the time-weighted average (TWA) noise
exposure of a work shift.
I f the employees exposure equal or exceed the
8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or 12-hour TWA of
82 dBA, the employee shall be included in the
Hearing Conservation Program.
D
osimetry monitoring shall be repeated
whenever a change in production, process,
equipment or controls increases the noise
exposures.
3. Identification of High Noise Sources:
W
here noise level in any location (buildings,
units, etc.) or outdoor areas that exceeds 82
dBA, must be marked with signs that identify
it as a high noise area and requiring the use of
appropriate hearing protection.
A
ll employees or contractors who enter areas
where the sound levels are 82 dBA or greater
shall wear appropriate hearing protection.
Areas where sound levels equal or exceed 100
dBA, appropriate double hearing
protection devices (earmuffs over earplugs) are
required.
4. Temporary Worksites:
I t is the responsibility of the BP Canada su-
pervisor in charge, or his designate, to ensure
adequatehearing protection is worn on all
temporary worksites where noise levels exceed
240
82 dBA, i.e. rig operations.
Noise Exposure
N
oise Reduction Reviews:A formal, docu-
mented Noise Reduction Review must be
conducted for all existing areas where noise
levels exceed 100 dBA. A formal review must
be completed for all new facilities expected to
have noise levels exceed 100 dBA in the facil-
ity design phase. This review must include
representatives from operations, engineering
and HSSE. An acoustical engineer must also
be included.
5. Hearing Protection Equipment:
E
ar plugs and/or ear muffs must be made
available at all worksites. Contact Safety
Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist to ensure
appropriate hearing protectors are selected,
fitted and used.
Audiometric Testing:
A
ll new employees must have a baseline
audiogram (hearing test) in conjunction with
their pre-employment medical or, at the latest,
within six months of their hiring date.
A
ll employees who are included in the Hear-
ing Conservation Program and are exposed to
noise levels equal to or exceed 82 dBA TWA
for a 12-hour shift or 85 dBA TWA for an
8-hour shift must have an audiometric testing
every two years, or as per jurisdiction regula-
tions.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
I t is the responsibility of each supervisor and
site Safety Coordinator to ensure that noise
controls and hearing conservation are imple-
mented and enforced
Contractors are required to comply with these
241
Personal Protective Equip.
noise controls and hearing conservation mea-

sures with the exception of the Audiometric
testing and noise monitoring. These should
be part of their Safety Program
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
PURPOSE:
To outline the requirements for the selection, care, and use
of personal protective equipment.
APPLICATION:
All personnel working on BP Canada worksite.
POTENTIAL HAZARD:
E
xposure to physical and chemical hazards
can occur through contact of the skin, eyes,
inhalation, and ingestion
A
ll workers on BP Canada worksite must wear
approved personal protective equipment as
identified as needed in the hazard assessment
that is appropriate to the work being done,
and the nature of the hazards involved. [See:
MSDS for hazardous material requirements.]
PREPARATIONS:
The Local Area Manager may exempt certain offices,
control rooms, vehicles, other non-hazardous areas, field
tours, and casual visitors from some provisions of this
section. These exemptions must be communicated to all
applicable worksites, as required and a deviation from
standard completed.
PROCEDURES:
242

Head Protection:
Approved industrial protective headgear must be worn by
all personnel on field worksites. For further information see
applicable provincial regulations.
NOTE:
Metal hard hats must not be worn
I f hair is deemed to be of excessive length and
may constitute a safety hazard, a hair net or
other means of confinement for the hair must
be used
Eye Protection:
C
.S.A.-approved safety glasses with C.S.A
approved side shields must be worn by all per-
sonnel at BP worksites where required. When
the nature of the work might result in an eye
or facial injury, additional protection, such as
a face shield or goggles, is required. Prescrip-
tion glasses must meet C.S.A. specifications.
Types of eye protectors are shown in the table
at the end of this section
E
mployees wearing contact lenses must
wear all applicable safety eye protection. An
employer must ensure that, if wearing contact
lenses poses a hazard to the workers eyes dur-
ing work, the worker is advised of the hazards
and the alternatives to wearing contact lenses.
Permeable contact lenses are recommended
over non-permeable
Respiratory Protection:
An employer must determine the degree of
danger to a worker at a work site and whether
the worker needs to wear respiratory protective
equipment if:
(a) a worker is or may be exposed to an airborne
contaminant or a mixture of airborne
243
contaminants in a centration exceeding their

occupation exposure limits, or
(b) the atmosphere has or may have an oxygen
concentration of less than 19.5 percent by
volume.[See: BP Canada Respiratory Protec-
tion Program]
Hearing Protection:
Whenever noise hazards exist at BP Canada
worksites, all personnel entering will be pro-
vided with and must wear appropriate hearing
protection.
[See: Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation]
Fire Resistant Clothing:

Fire resistant work wear shall be worn on all
BP worksites. See FRW Practice.
Whenever special clothing is required for han-
dling dangerous chemicals or for fire-fighting,
it will be provided by BP Canada and worn
only by trained and competent personnel.
Hand Protection:
See Hand Protection Practice.
Chemical Protective Clothing:
C
hemical Protective Clothing (CPC) includes
chemically resistant gloves, aprons, boots and
suits (both partially and fully encapsulating).
CPC shall be selected specifically to provide
protection for the particular chemical or
chemical material in use. Refer to Material
Safety Data Sheet for recommended CPC
I n situations where CPC is required, decon-
tamination procedures must be utilized that
enhances the removal of the particular chemical
Procedures should reflect the type of CPC needed
W
orksites should determine, in consultation
with the CPC manufacturer, when CPC
244

should be replaced
Foot Protection:
C
.S.A.-Grade 1 (green triangle) approved
footwear must be worn by all workers entering
field worksites.
B
oot style is recommended minimum 150mm
(6) high, from the bottom of the heel to the
top of the boot to provide ankle support.
A
n aggressive tread designed for snow/ice or
the use of boot grippers are required in winter
conditions to reduce the risk of slipping on
ice or snow pack. The use of boot grippers is
only required for Operations. Drilling and
Completions move onto and off of metal
surfaces very frequently and are permitted to
use sanding.
Sole puncture protection is required
S afety footwear must be maintained in good
safe working condition. (i.e. no holes in upper
material or soles, no steel toes exposed)
JEWELRY
Wearing exposed jewelry on BP worksites is prohibited with
the exception of office buildings. Rings, bracelets, watches,
neck chains and exposed body piercing are considered
jewelry. Medic Alert devices are not considered jewelry.
Personal Floatation Device:

A
ll personnel working from a boat, barge, or
in an area where a fall into water could result
in drowning must wear a personal floatation
device, i.e. life jacket that meets the Canadian
General Standards Board Specifications 65.7-M88 or
65.11-M88. Additional safety equipment such
as safety harnesses and lifelines should be used
when working on ice or near cold, fast moving
water
245
Task Chemicals Glove Material Type of Glove Brand Name

Acklands Order Number
Fine work requiring light x Lube oil 1. Vilton Thin glove x Best N-Dex Gloves(Nitrile)
gloves x Glycol 2. Nitrile (4-5 mil) (BEM 723)
x Engine overhauls x Condensate 3. Viton/Neoprene x Ansell Edmont Touch and
x Head changes x Gasoline/Diesel Fuel Tuff (Nitrille powder
x Piston/liner replacement x MIDEA/DEA free)(ANL 92-600-10)
x Seal changes/pump x Frac Oil/Inver Muds
repairs x Methanol 1. Vilton Thin Glove x Ansell Edmont Duratouch
RESPONSIBILITY:
x Sample collection 2. Butyl Natural (5 mils) Sheer (latex) (ANL 34-525)

x Orifice plate changes Rubber (latex)
contractors and visitors).
Rough or abrasive work x Lube oil 1. Vilton Summer x Best Answer Nitrile laminated
requiring heave gloves x Glycol 2. Nitrile (BEM 2735)
x Manual material x Condensate 3. Viton/Neoprene x Best Nitri-Pro Nitrile coated
handling x Gasoline/Diesel Fuel (BEM 7166)
246
x Pulling or stringing x MDEA/DEA x Ansell Edmont Hycron
joints x Frac Oil/Invert Muds General Purpose gloves Nitrile
x Line pigging coated (ANL 24-805-10)
x Vac trucking x Ansell Edmont Hycron Nitrile
x Frac or will completions Winter coated jersey lining Winter
(ANL 52-590-10)
x Methanol 1. Vilton Summer x Best Nitty Gritty natural
Chemical Protective Glove Selection Chart
2. Butyl Natural rubber coated (BEM 65NFW)

Rubber (latex)
ate protective equipments are worn by all (i.e. employees,

potential exposure hazards are identified, and the appropri-

It is the responsibility of all BP Canada employees to ensure
Submersion of hands into x Lube oil x Vilton Fluid at room x Ansell Edmont Solvex Soft
chemical x Glycol x Nitrile temp Lined Chemical Resistant
x Filter changes x Condensate x Viton/Neoprene Gloves Nitrile (ANL 37-175)
x Parts washing x MDEA/DEA x MAPA Stansolv Nitrile Heavy
x Piston/liner replacement x Frac Oil/Invert Muds Weight Z Grip (PIP 480420)
x Varsol (good for solvent wash)
Fluid at x MAPA Stansolv Knit Lined
x Gasoline/Diesel
hot/cold temp Nitrile Gloves cold/hot temp
(PIP 381410)
247
x Methanol 1. Vilton Fluid at x Ansell Edmont Lined Natural
2. Butyl Natural hot/cold temp Latex Chemical resistant
Rubber (latex) Gloves (ANL 208-10)
Chemical Protective Glove Selection Chart

PIGGING OF PIPELINES AND FLOWLINES

Pigging of Pipelines
PURPOSE:
To provide safe practices for pigging operations of pipes,
pipelines, and flowlines for the removal of wax, other solid
deposits, and trapped fluids.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada Field operations are affected.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
M
ay have Toxic Vapour [See: Benzene, Hydro-
gen Sulphide]
M
ay have NORM, depending on product line
[See: Radioactive or Normal Occurring Radioac-
tive Materials (NORM)]
High Pressure
Static Electricity [See: Grounding and Bonding]
Hydrates [See: Hydrates]
PROCEDURES:
1. A safe work permit must be issued before pigging
begins.
2. Pigging operations in gas and oilfield operations
represent a serious hazard.
3. I n all areas a site-specific procedure must be used
and it must address the following:
4. Characteristics of the fluid to be pigged.
5. Proper isolation and depressurization.
6. Draining and ventilation.
7. Th
e hazard of potential plugging of the bleed-off
valves and gauges.
8. Proper receiving and launching techniques,
248
stressing potential hydraulic shock.
Positive Air Shut-off

9. Routine inspection of the cap, barrel and seals.
10. Individual marking or identification of pigs and
logging with respect to launching and receiving
times.
11. Purging [See: Purging]
NOTE: Proper disposal methods must be used for pigging

wax and fluids. [See: BP Environmental Guidelines]
PRECAUTION:
a. Where the receiver is vented to a proper drain
or flare system, the barrel must be vented to
atmosphere prior to opening the receiver or
launcher. Ensure vent valve is free and clear by
some means.
b. No worker shall position themselves in front of
the pig launchers or receiver at any time during
the pigging operation. All quick opening closures
on pig launchers and receivers must be equipped
with a pressure interlocking warning device with
a safety catch.[See: ASME Code VIII, Paragraph
UG .35]
POSITIVE AIR SHUT-OFF REQUIREMENTS (PASO)
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the requirement of positive air
shut-offs on diesel powered equipment.
APPLICATION:
A
ll diesel powered equipment, Contractor or BP
owned, including those used to load or unload
flammable liquids or gases at all BP Canada sites.
All diesel powered equipment includes pick up
249
trucks, and diesel powered heavy machinery

Positive Air Shut-off
used within 25m of a wellhead OR where there

are piping, process vessels or tanks containing
combustible fluids or gasses that may release
hydrocarbons to atmosphere within 25 m of
diesel powered equipment. (E.g. they are open or
being worked on or with)
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
U
ncontrolled engine operation resulting in an
explosion.
P
ersonal injury from exploding engines or
exploding hydrocarbon mixtures.
Equipment damage because of engine overspeed.
DEFINITION:
A positive air shut off (PASO) is a device that cuts the
air supply to diesel engines resulting in immediate engine
shut down.
PROCEDURES:
W
hen loading or unloading flammable liquid
or gas products at all BP facilities using diesel-
powered equipment, this equipment must be
equipped with a PASO.
A
ll positive air shut offs must be in good work-
ing condition and tested monthly.
P
ASO operation may be either automatic or
manual.
M
anual PASOs must have the capability to be
operated from normal workstations around the
vehicle, e.g. pump control panels.
R
equirements for PASOs should be included in
pre job meetings.
250
Combustible Gas Envir.

RESPONSIBILITIES:
R
esponsibility for installation, maintenance and
testing of PASOs lies with the owner of the
equipment with a PASO.
A
ccountability for verification is with the BP site
supervisor or designate.
PRACTICE FOR WORKING IN A COMBUSTIBLE

GAS ENVIRONMENT
1.1 is practice applies to all BP Canada Energy

Th
Canada Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) employees,
contracted employees, contractors and other visiting
personnel doing work on CGPU premises and work
sites.
1.2 This practice applies to any work area where person-
nel have the potential to be exposed to combustible
gas.
1.3 The purpose of this practice is to:
1.3.1 T
o establish practices for providing a safe work
environment while working with or around
combustible gas.
1.3.2 Provide requirements for the training and
qualifications of personnel conducting com-
bustible gas tests, as well as regulatory require-
ments for the maintenance and calibration of
portable gas test equipment.
2.1 Competent person - one who has completed

training, as per manufacturer specifications and site
specific procedures.
2.2 Function (Bump) Test - A test conducted by
251
introducing a known concentration of gas (Pentane)

to the sensor of the combustible gas detector. The
detector must read within +or-20% of known con-
centration and to ensure that the 10% LEL alarm on
the detector is functioning properly.
2.3 EL - The Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) is the
L
lowest concentration of combustible gas in air at
which an explosion could occur. The percentage
of LEL represents the amount of combustible gas
present between 0 and 100, 100% being the Lower
Explosive limit. With Methane approximately 5% in
air is equal to 100% of the LEL.
2.4 tmospheric Release - For the purpose of this Prac-
A
tice an atmospheric release is defined as 20 % LEL
8 inches (20 cm) from the source as per the GCBU
Reporting Practice gHSSEr MS430.
3.1 proper functioning approved combustible gas

A
detector will be used for every task being performed
on a BP CGPU site that has potential exposure to a
combustible gas environment.
Th
must ensure that:
R
egular documented surveys (sweeps) are
conducted annually of all facilities including
wells and pipeline risers to detect excessive
LEL levels and meet EUB Directive 60 LDAR
requirements.
A
ny excessive atmospheric release greater than
or equal to 10% is detected, roped off and
will be repaired as soon as possible following a
proper risk assessment
F
or any LEL reading greater than or equal
to 20%, the equipment should be shutdown
until repaired
252

A
ny LEL reading exceeding 20% LEL is an
incident classified as an Atmospheric Release
under CGPU Reporting Practice gHSSEr
MS430 and followed up with an incident
investigation to prevent re-occurence. Oth-
erwise, any gas release exceeding 10% LEL is
reported as an HSSE opportunity
A
ll workers have read and follow a safe build-
ing\lease entry procedure. (See Sample Lease
entry procedure)
All workers have received instruction in the
use of combustible gas detection equipment
and understand the hazards associated with
combustible gases. (Appendix 2 Training and
Exposure sections of this document)
4.0 Scope of General Expectations
4.1 nly personnel who are trained or have received

O
instruction may conduct gas tests.
4.2 e person conducting the gas testing for permiting
Th
must sign or initial the permit and the results must
be kept on file for a minimum of 1year (see Permit to
Work Practice gHSSEr MS 880).
4.3 nly CSA approved combustible gas detection
O
equipment (see appendix 1) shall be used.
4.4 ontinous gas tests will be conducted where ever
C
CGPU employees, contracted personnel, contractors
and other visiting personnel will be entering an area
that has the potential for the atmosphere to contain
combustible gas.
4.5 e gas detection devices must have a documented
Th
Function (Bump) Test at the beginning of each shift.
If the detector fails the bump test, the detector must
be taken out of service, tagged as defective and sent
for calibration. The detector must have a current
calibration sticker to be in use. Detectors must be
253
calibrated as per manufacturers specifications.

4.6 ombustible Gas Monitoring must be conducted
C
before any work taking place within 8 meters of any
well, process buildings, vessel, tank or related equip-
ment, where combustible gas is, or may be present.
4.7 ortable Combustible Gas Detector alarms must be
P
set at: Low alarm 10% LEL and High Alarm 20%
LEL. Fixed combustible gas detectors should alarm
at 10% LEL and shutdown at greater than or equal
to 20% LEL.
4.8 If while working, the combustible gas detector alarms,
personnel must leave the area immediately to
determine the appropriate action.
4.9 efore entering a lease where combustible gas may
B
be present, a gas test must be done (see attached lease
entry procedures). The test must also be done before
and during entry into lease buildings. The detector
is to be kept in the work area while personnel are
conducting their work to ensure that personnel are
not exposed to over 10%
5.0 Scope of Occupational Exposure Limits
LEL (Lower Explosive Limit) Hazards
% of Lower Explosive Guidelines

Limit
LEL 0% Area may be entered.
Other toxic contaminates such as benzene or H2S may
exist in concentrations above the exposure limits
LEL >0 - <10% Entry into these areas is permitted. A risk assessment must
be conducted to determine appropriate action.
LEL>10% Evacuation of personnel, no entry into area permitted.
254

C
ombustible gas containing light hydrocar-
bons may cause symptoms such as dizziness,
headaches, and errors in judgment and in
some cases loss of consciousness. These symp-
toms known as a narcotic effect may occur at
10 % of the LEL
C
ombustible gas concentrations may contain
other potentially harmful substances such as
hydrogen sulfide H2S and benzene. If the
stream concentration is greater than 0.2 0.4
% H2S the greater health risk is H2S as the
exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL
concentrations reaches 10%. If the stream
concentration is greater than 0.1% benzene
the greater health risk is benzene as the
exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL
concentration reaches 10%
L
EL detection equipment must not be used to
try to determine H2S or benzene concentra-
tions
APPENDIX 1- Equipment Type and Care

APPENDIX 2- Training
APPENDIX 3- Lease Entry Procedure
7.1 Alberta General Safety Regulations AR 448/83 as amended

7.2 B.C. Occupational Health and Safety Regulations and
Guidelines 296/97 as amended
7.3 gHSSEr MS880- Permit to Work Practice
8.0 Forms
gHSSEr MF 34004- Pre-job Risk Assessment
g HSSEr MF 88001- BP Canada Energy Company-
Cold Work Permit/Hot Work Permit
255
Appendix 1
Equipment Type and Care
Approved Equipment
Gas detection equipment must include a LEL detector and
oxygen sensor and should include a carbon monoxide and
hydrogen sulfide sensor.
All gas detection equipment must be CSA approved.
Equipment Testing and Care

Each area must ensure that an inspection and testing
program is implemented whereby all combustible gas
detection equipment is inspected by a qualified technician
on a frequency consistent with manufacturers requirements
and with prevailing regulation requirements (minimum
every three (3) months. A tag must be attached to the gas
detectors showing the latest inspection/due date. Records of
all calibrations must be maintained.
Gas detection devices must be Bump Tested before each
daily use and documented in a bump test log, and after 12
hours of continuous use. A test would also be required if
the detector comes in contact with water is over ranged or
suffers trauma ie: dropping the detector.
Precautions:
The bump test must be conducted by introducing a known
concentration of gas (Pentane) to the sensor of the combus-
tible gas detector. The detector must read within +or-20%
of known concentration and to ensure that the 10% LEL
alarm on the detector is functioning properly
All gas detection equipment requires a minimum oxygen

content in order to perform according to manufacturers
specifications. The oxygen reading must be taken prior to
an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly
256

Appendix 2
Training
All employees and contractors must be knowledgable on

the hazards of combustible gas and the use of detection
equipment being used.
Each area in the CGPU is responsible to ensure that all
BP and Full Time Equivalence workers have a satifactory
course available to teach the proper methods in the use of
combustible gas detection equipment including:
Operation
Calibration
Storage
Limitations
Alarm settings
Site specific procedures
Personnel training records will be maintained on site.
Training is to be conducted every (3) years and is expected
to include passing a documented test to ensure personnel
are qualified.
257
LEASE ENTRY PROCEDURE
Step Hazard Control
1. Verify personal monitoring H2S or hydrocarbon exposure. - Bump test personal monitoring equipment
equipment is operational once per prior to the beginning of the shift.
shift. - Calibrate multi-head gas monitor as per
manufactures instructions
2. Stop at lease entry and conduct a High H2S or LEL Before entering lease:
Lease Entry Procedure
visual inspection of area concentrations, oxygen 1. Visual inspection

deficiency, explosions, fire or 2. Check wind direction
spills 3. Check for H2S and LEL alarm and
258
flashing beacon
3. Register personnel entering the H2S or hydrocarbon exposure - Ensure that system accepts the input or
Appendix 3
site though the use of an automated that control room staff records the time of
system (VMS) or by notifying the entry in the log.
control room. STOP-THINK-GO
4. If safe for vehicle entry, proceed High H2S or LEL Before entering lease:
to the MCC / RTU (Scada) building. concentrations, fire, explosions 1. Visual inspection
(IF NO RTU OR MCC IS PRESENT or spills 2. Check wind direction
GO TO STEP 6.) 3. Check for H2S alarm and flashing
beacon
Step Hazard Control
5. Use multi-head gas detector to H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
check for high LEL or H2S gas deficiency, explosions or fire. - Multi-head Gas Monitor
levels in the vicinity of MCC/RTU. H2S > 10 ppm - Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
Evaluate risk of other atmospheric LEL > 10% - Benzene, SO2, CO monitoring equipment
hazards such as benzene, sulfur 19.5 % > O2 > 23% (if applicable)
dioxide or carbon monoxide. SO2 > 2 ppm
CO > 25 ppm
Benzene > 1 ppm
259
6. If H2S or LEL gas limits are within H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
Practices, vehicles may now deficiency, explosions or fire - Multi-head Gas Monitor
proceed onto the lease and park - Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
appropriately. - park vehicle facing the lease exit for ease
of egress
- the vehicle can be driven directly off the site
- comply with the 8 meter rule from process
equipment and piping

- Check wind direction and park upwind
- Check beacons or alarms


Step Hazard Control
7. When exiting vehicle, static High levels of H2S or LEL's - Ground bare hand to metal surface to
electricity should be considered and resulting in explosion discharge static electricity.
person should ground themselves to
metal object before opening
buildings.
8. Open building door while using Oxygen deficiency, LEL or H2S, - Approach building using caution & take
multi-head monitor. exposure explosions or fire hesitation step after opening doors
- check entrance area using Multi-head
head monitor to ensure required O2, H2S &
LEL limits
260
- Personal monitor
- Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
9. If H2S or LEL limits are exceeded H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
- DO NOT ENTER. deficiency, explosions or fire - Multi-head Gas Monitor
- open doors and vents using caution
10. If levels do not clear contact H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
back up personnel and notify deficiency, explosions or fire - Multi-head Gas Monitor
supervisor. - Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
11. Once backup has arrived on H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - breathing air equipment donned
location, gas leak can be deficiency, explosions or fire - Personal monitor
investigated and/or repaired - Multi-head Gas Monitor
Step Hazard Control
12. If gas levels can not meet H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
Practice requirements after deficiency, explosions or fire - Multi-head Gas Monitor
investigation and/or repair, - Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
equipment should be shut-in. - shut in using site specific shut down
procedures.
13. If no gas level present proceed H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - Personal monitor
into building using caution, while deficiency, explosions or fire - Multi-head Gas Monitor
monitoring gas levels with multi- - Continuous Gas Monitor (if applicable)
261
head gas monitor. Proceed through
the entire building sweeping for gas
before commencing work.
14. When leaving lease notify BP H2S or LEL exposure, oxygen - ensure VMS or manual login system clears
personal and log out of automated or deficiency, explosions or fire personnel for site
off vms system. Register personnel

exiting the site though the use of an
automated system (VMS) or by
notifying the control room.

Pressure Safety valves
PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES
PURPOSE:
o provide instructions for adequately protecting all pres-
T
sure systems.
APPLICATION:
All pressure systems.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
System Overpressure.
Toxic/Combustible fluids.
Pressure on flare system (where applicable).
Explosion: Air in flare system and/or piping.
PREPARATIONS:
S ite-specific procedures are required for
removal and installation of all PSVs. The pro-
cedures must be discussed and documented
prior to carrying out the work, and before the
applicable work permit is issued. [See: Permits
and BP PSV handling and servicing procedure
(Part of owner inspection program)]
A
ll block valves on the upstream and/or
downstream side of a PSV must be sealed or
padlocked in the open position.
A
ll pressure safety valves (PSVs) must be
maintained in operable condition, in accor-
dance with Provincial Regulations (Ref: Qual-
ity management system for Boilers, Pressure
Vessels and pressure piping Section 6).
A
ll PSVs will be checked as per provincial
regulations.
262

PROCEDURES:
Pressure safety valve repair shops require certification ap-
proval from applicable government agency per CSA B51.
All PSVs are to remain in service while the equipment that
they are protecting is in service, except for repair as noted
in ASME Code.
PRECAUTIONS:
aking a PSV out of Service for Repair on equipment in
T
operation:
1. No PSV may be taken out of service at any time
without approval from the Supervisor responsible
for that facility.
2. No PSV may be taken out of service unless
adequate protection is maintained by adjacent
equipment, or by being continuously manned
by a designated Operator to control the working
pressure of the equipment as per ASME Section
VIII Div.1 Appendix M.
3. All PSVs removed from service must be im-
mediately logged and documented on the PSV
handling and servicing procedure tracking sheet.
4. Repairs to the PSV must be made as quickly as
possible with an emergency priority designation.
5. The PSV must be replaced immediately after the
repair is complete.
6. When transporting a PSV for service or return-
ing it to the facility the PSV must be transported
in the vertical position. [See: Energy Isolation]
7. Returning a Pressure Safety Valve to Service
8. After Repair on Operating Equipment:
9. All block valves must be opened, sealed or
padlocked.
10. The Supervisor in charge, or his designate, must
witness the installation of the seals or padlocks
on the block valves connected to the pressure
safety valve.
11. It is then to be logged that the PSV is in service.
263
RESPONSIBILITY:
The BP Canada Representative in charge of the job is
responsible for ensuring that safe work procedures are
developed and followed.
REFERENCE:
B
P Quality management system for Boilers
and Pressure Vessels and process piping.
ASME Code Section VIII, latest edition.
C
SA B51 Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure
Piping Code.
BP PSV Handling and servicing Procedure.
PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING
PURPOSE:
To establish pressure and leak testing safe work practices for
vessels, piping, and pipelines.
APPLICATION:
New installations, repairs and replacements of
vessels, piping, and pipelines.
DEFINITION:
ere are two types of pressure tests of which
Th
hydrostatic is the preferred method. Pneumatic testing
is only permitted under special conditions, Engineering
Authority (EA) and Regulatory Approval is Required.
PREPARATIONS: [See: Purging]
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:[See purging]

O
verpressure operating above the system
MAWP.
264

L
eaks Test medium leaking during test, envi-
ronmental, stored energy and combustible issues.
E
xplosion Through overpressure or ignition of
flammable gas.
Methods:
Hydrostatic:
This is the preferred method because energy release
causes minimal concern:
W
ater/glycol preferred hydrostatic test medium
(minimum danger).
H
ydrocarbon based fluid the potential for
explosion, fire, toxicity, environment damage
must be assessed and documented.
Pneumatic:
When leaks or ruptures occur energy release can be
extremely dangerous and prolonged:
Inert gas preferred pneumatic test medium
A
ir/Flammable Gas mixing these two test
mediums can result in explosion and fire.
Pneumatic testing is not recommended
Leak Check:
Combustible Gas can be used for Leak Check test on
piping, equipment or vessels only after the system has been
properly purged.
PROCEDURES:
1. A
ll mechanical/integrity work on the system
should be complete before the system pressure
test commences.
2. When pressure testing, a low pressure test must
be performed before the high pressure test to
prevent failure of a component at high pressure
and the resultant danger of this situation. The
265
pressure set points for these tests should be stated

in the procedure along with the systems MAWP.
3. S ite-specific procedures should be developed for
all hydrostatic pressure tests.
4. A
n approved site-specific procedure must be
developed for all pneumatic pressure tests.
SIGNS:
Warning signs must be positioned prohibiting the presence
of workers in the immediate area of the vessel or lines while
pressure testing.
Consideration of the following sections may be required:
WHMIS
Purging
Blinding and Blanking (Energy Isolation)
Draining and Depressuring
Pre-job Safety Meeting
Permit to Work
PRECAUTIONS:
1. All non essential personnel should be removed
from the area being tested.
2. Pressures intended for hydrostatic test must not
be used for pneumatic tests. When changing
from hydrostatic to pneumatic testing, the test
pressure must be recalculated.
3. D
isposal of test mediums should be in accor-
dance with environmental guidelines.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
The BP Canada Representative in-charge is responsible for
ensuring that safe pressure testing practices are followed.
NOTE: For pressure test design, [See: Applicable Govern-
ment Regulations:]
ASME Pressure Vessel Code
Provincial Boilers Branch or equivalent
EUB or equivalent
266
PURGING
PURPOSE:
Purging
To provide guidelines for safely removing combustible,
chemical, toxic or other hazardous materials from vessels
and piping systems.
APPLICATION:
Any vessels or piping systems being prepared for inspection,
construction, repair, or returning to service.
DEFINITION:
Purging is the removal of any undesirable medium from
vessels or piping systems.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Leaks from uncontrolled points.
T
oxic vapor /Inert gas oxygen deficiency:
simple/chemical asphyxiation
C
ombustible material: explosion the system
contents could be in the zone between the
LEL and UEL
Static Electricity:
D isplaced fluids
Explosion due to combustible material being
vented to atmosphere
Operating the system outside its design condi-
tions (Pressure/Temperature/Combustible gas
in inert systems)
PREPARATIONS:
a. A
ll mechanical/integrity work should be com-
plete before the purging operation commences.
b. Steam, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or water or
combustible gas may be used as a purging me-
dium. If using combustible purge medium, the
explosive risk associated with the transition zone
267
of incomplete purge must be recognized, and all

potential ignition sources must be eliminated. If
combustible gases are used for the purge medium
Purging
the Engineering Authority (EA) must approve

the procedure.
c. The worker must know where the displaced
fluids (i.e., combustible, toxic) are going, and the
condition area is suitable to receive the fluids.
d. A site-specific procedure must be developed for
each purging operation.
Safety Equipment:
a. The necessary safety equipment must be on hand
(e.g. breathing apparatus, fire extinguishers, etc.)
b. Purge warning signs should be posted as
required.
Isolating:
a. Vessels or piping must be isolated before purg-
ing.[See: Energy Isolation, Golden Rule]
b. Associated instrumentation must also be isolated.
c. Flare pilots/igniters might have to be isolated.
PROCEDURES:
a. Purge gas should be introduced into the system
very slowly. Inert gas should be used where pos-
sible. Velocities should be kept very low to sweep
the undesirable medium out of the system with
as little mixing as possible, and should be done
at atmospheric pressure. Low point drains should
be checked periodically for water removal. When
purging for start-up, air must be completely
displaced from the system to a level that the
system is no longer operating in the flammable/
explosive zone, before attempting to pressure up
the system.
b. If the hydrocarbon is heavier than the purge
medium, purging should be from top to bottom.
If it is lighter, from bottom to top.
268
PRECAUTIONS:
Radioactive (NORM)
a. All non-essential personnel should be removed
from the purge area.
b. Some combustible gas detectors require oxygen
for analysis of the sample, and therefore will not
give a true indication when a vessel or piping
is checked for the removal of hydrocarbons, if
the detector is inserted in an oxygen-deficient
atmosphere.
c. Creating or pulling a vacuum on piping or vessel
(i.e., introducing air), when using steam.
d. M
ake sure there are no dead legs in the vessel or
piping to be purged.
e. Tests must always be made to determine if purg-
ing has eliminated the undesirable medium from
the vessel or piping system. SCBA/SABA must
be worn when performing atmospheric monitor-
ing prior and during Confined Space Entry.[See:
Confined Space Entry], [See: Atmospheric
Monitoring]
f. V
essels or equipment may still contain toxic and/
or combustible sludge or scales after purging.
Consideration should be given to the removal
of this material to maintain and ensure a safe
atmosphere.
g. Purge medium temperatures must be considered
for affect on the system to be purged.
RADIOACTIVE OR NATURALLY OCCURRING

RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM)
PURPOSE:
To establish the requirements for the safe handling of Natu-
rally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM).
Contact your PU Industrial Hygienist.
269
APPLICATION:
Radioactive (NORM)
All worksites where NORM contamination may occur.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Exposure to NORM.
PREPARATIONS:
a. A
n ENFORM trained and qualified NORM
Control Coordinator must be assigned for all
worksites where there is or likely to be NORM
contamination.
b. All personnel performing work that involves
NORM contaminated equipment must be
trained in personal protection and safe handling.
Refer to the Code of Practice and contact your
NORM Control Coordinator, Safety Coordina-
tor or Industrial Hygienist for advice on training,
specific monitoring and PPE.
Survey:
All sites that may have NORM contamination
must have completed a NORM survey of the applicable
equipment performed before work planning commences to
ensure all hazards are identified.
Work Planning:
W ork Planning for NORM contaminated
equipment must include provisions to ensure
the personnel are trained
the necessary equipment and PPE is available
the need for personnel decontamination facilities
possible facilities for equipment decontamination
ventilation
filtering exhausted air or waste water and
waste storage, recordkeeping, analysis and
disposal of NORM materials and/or NORM
contaminated equipment and PPE
270
Radioactive (NORM)
M
ust be conducted prior to commencement
of operation. The NORM Control Coordina-
tor must attend all pre-job safety meetings.
[See: Safety Meetings], [See: TDG-Packaging
and Safe Transport of Radioactive Material,
[See: Canadian Guidelines for the Manage-
ment of NORM; Guidelines for the Handling
of NORM in Western Canada]
C
ontact the NORM Control Coordinator,
Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for
advice before any work proceeds.
PROCEDURES:
Safe handling procedures should include:
Specific job procedures to be followed
Th
e expected effluent concentrations and
methods of control if applicable
Th
e person in charge, responsible for the
operation
Storage, testing and disposal of NORM wastes
E
quipment and worksite must be properly
prepared (i.e. isolated, depressured, made
accessible, etc.) The worksite should be roped
off. Radiation warning signs must be posted,
and unauthorized entry of personnel banned,
in the area affected by the work
A
ll women who are pregnant or are con-
sidering pregnancy must declare this to the
Occupational Health Centre prior to work
commencing so that an exposure risk assess-
ment can be completed. The risk assessment
may include restricted work with NORM
contaminated materials.
271
PRECAUTION:
Radioactive (NORM)
H
ighly energetic NORM may affect some
LEL monitors and fire detection systems.
Station shutdown could result when using
a highly energetic radioactive source in the
vicinity of a detector. A risk assessment must
be performed to determine the scope and risk
from NORM and radioactive sources. Fire
detection systems sensitive to radiation may
have to be by-passed when radioactive sources
are in use in the immediate area. Care must
be taken to reactivate the detection system
when the work is completed.[See: Equipment
Shutdown Systems]
N
ORM survey meters are not explosion
proof, thus a Hot Work Permit is required.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
Th
e BP Canada Representative is responsible
for ensuring that all procedures are supplied
and followed.
Th
e BP NORM Control Coordinator is re-
sponsible for ensuring that all NORM control
procedures meet regulations, the BP Codes of
Practice and that all procedures are followed.
The Contractor performing work on NORM
contaminated equipment and waste is
responsible for ensuring that safe handling
procedures and contingency plans have been
developed which comply with all government
regulations. He is also responsible for ensur-
ing that all applicable protective equipment,
instruments, rescue and decontamination
facilities are on hand and in operable condi-
tion before the job commences.
272
RAIL CAR LOADING
Rail Car Loading

PURPOSE:
To provide procedures for the safe loading of tank cars.
APPLICATION:
Tank car loading at plant and field locations.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Static Electricity
Combustible Fluids
Tank Car Movement
PREPARATIONS:
a. L
oading racks and loading rack trackage must be
securely and adequately grounded and bonded.
All ground and bond connections should be
frequently inspected.[See: Electrical]
b. Before loading tank cars, the loader shall check
the derail, ensure that it is in a closed position,
and erect the required warning signs.
PROCEDURES:
a. Tank car loading encompasses similar concerns
and problems as transferring fluids by truck.
However, a site-specific procedure is required,
and the following general guidelines apply. [See:
Tank Truck Loading/Unloading]
b. Car wheels must be chocked to prevent the car
from accidentally rolling.
c. The loader must attach the ground cable to each
car before connecting the loading hoses.
d. Tank cars must be inspected prior to loading.Tank
cars found in bad order must be reported to the
supervisor immediately, and must not be loaded
273
until repairs have been made.

Rail Car Loading
e. The loader must label loaded cars with the

proper placards designated for this purpose and
required by regulations. Proper documentation
is also required.[See: TDG]
f. L
eaking valves or loading hoses must be repaired
or replaced immediately.
g. The loading rack must never be left unattended
while loading or offloading a tank car.
h. When using a top loading spout, the spout must
be chained to the tank car during loading.
i. Tank cars must be filled to the proper level as
instructed, and the loader should stand by to shut
off the loading valves when this level is approached.
j. When loading is complete, the block valve on
loading hose and tank car must be closed, and
liquid petroleum gas vented to the vent stack
before loading hoses are disconnected.
k. The loading hoses must be hooked back to the
loading rack when loading has been completed.
PRECAUTIONS:
a. No part of the body shall be positioned over the
slip tube gauge.
b. Walkways and platforms must be inspected
frequently and kept in good condition.
c. Workmen must refrain from jumping from the
loading rack to the tank car or from car to car.
d. Company employees must stay away from tank
cars when the train crew is coupling, switching,
and spotting cars.
e. All loaders must be familiar with the location of
fire-fighting equipment and must be trained in
its use.
f. Extension cords with lights attached must not
be used at the loading rack. Only approved
flashlights for hazardous locations are permitted.
274
Respiratory Protection
RESPONSIBILITIES:
I t is the responsibility of the BP Canada
employee in-charge of the operation; to ensure
that safe loading procedures are followed.
Th
e train crew is responsible for ensuring that
safe tank car coupling, switching and spot-
ting procedures meet applicable government
regulations.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
PURPOSE:
To provide safe work practices for workers in areas where
there is a respiratory hazard.
APPLICATION:
All personnel who are required to or may use respiratory
protection to mitigate inhalation risks. This also applies to
visitors to field locations who may use respiratory protec-
tion.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Toxic atmospheres
Oxygen deficient atmosphere
DEFINITION:
*IDLH Immediately dangerous to life or health. Any
atmosphere where the concentration of oxygen, flammable
or toxic air contaminants would cause a person without
respiratory protection to be fatally injured, or cause irrevers-
ible and incapacitating effects to that persons health.
PROCEDURES: [See: BP Canada Respiratory Protection

Program]
Equipment for IDLH* Environment:
275
Self-contained or supplied-air breathing apparatus

(SCBA/SABA) must be worn.
where danger exists from reduced oxygen content
of the air (less than 19.5% oxygen), or toxic contaminants
exceed the allowable exposure limits, The limitation and use
of SCBA/SABA are outlined in the BP Canada Respiratory
Protection Program and the Canadian Standards Associa-
tion CSA Z94.4-02 (Selection, Use, and Care of Respira-
tors), and CSA Z180.1-00 (Compressed Breathing Air and
Systems).
Equipment for Non-IDLH Environment:

Air-purifying respirators filter and remove specific
contaminants from the air. These respirators are never to be
used in oxygen-deficient IDLH atmospheres.
There are two main types of air-purifying respirators:

1. P
articulates filters (P100 or HEPA High Ef-
ficiency Particulate Air filters)
2. Chemical cartridge
These respirators are limited to the uses outlined in
the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program and the
Canadian Standards Association CSA Z94.4-02 (Selec-
tion, Use, and Care of Respirators), and CSA Z180.1-00
(Compressed Breathing Air and Systems). The BP Canada
Respiratory Protection Program also includes a selection
chart for the type of respiratory equipment required for
specific hazards.
Fitness to Wear Respirators:

All personnel required to wear respirators must be
evaluated by a Health Professional to ensure pre-existing
health conditions are not affected by respirator use. BP Oc-
cupational Health Centre will perform the assessment on
BP employees and full time contactors.
Contract companies must provide documentation
that demonstrates contract employees are fit to wear respira-
tors.
276
Fit Testing:
All BP Canada employees, contracted employees,
contractors, and visitors doing work on BP premises or
operating sites who are required to wear appropriate respira-
tory protective equipment must have quantitative or quali-
tative fit testing records available for review. A quantitative
or qualitative fit test shall be performed on new employees
and long-term contractors within the first three months of
commencing work. Repeat testing is recommended annu-
ally thereafter, or not to exceed 2 years.
Individuals who are required to wear respiratory

equipment must be clean-shaven where the face piece of the
respirator seals with the skin of the face. Conditions such
as unusual face contours, scars, skin eruptions, eyeglasses,
facial surgery, injury or missing dentures might interfere
with the seal. For this reason, the seal must be positive and
negative tested and a satisfactory fit obtained prior to each
use. Most manufacturers provide instructions for fit testing;
if these are unavailable, refer to BPs Respiratory Protection
Program or contact your Safety Advisor or Industrial Hy-
gienist for guidance on how these tests should be performed
and documented.
Maintenance, Cleaning, and Storage of Respiratory

Protection Equipment:
Immediately after use, the equipment must be
cleaned, the face piece sanitized, and the equipment stored
in the proper location. The maintenance, cleaning, and
storage of respiratory protection must be consistent with
the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program. The user of
the equipment should perform this task.
Inspection:
A competent worker must inspect respiratory protec-
tive equipment that is not used routinely, but is kept ready
for emergency use, at least monthly. The inspection must
277
ensure that the equipment is in satisfactory working condi-

tion, clean, and in its proper location. Written documenta-
tion of this inspection must be retained at the worksite and
must include the name of the inspector and the date the
inspection was performed. The supervisor in charge of the
work location must designate a trained worker to complete
the monthly inspection. The inspection must follow those
established in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection
Program.
Contractors using their own respiratory equipment
on BP sites must have documentation available regarding
the testing, inspection and maintenance of respirators.
PRECAUTIONS:
C
ompressed breathing air must meet quality
specifications for breathing air specified by
CSA Standard Z180.1-00.
A
ir from respiratory air compressors must
be tested annually by a qualified person to
ensure analysis includes particulate and oil
mists. This analysis must be performed on
site. Taking an air sample in a bomb and the
sending the sample to a laboratory for analysis
is prohibited.
TRAINING:
All workers entering a BP Canada field worksite where a
respiratory hazard may exist must be:
1 Educated on the hazards present.
2 E
ducated on the reason a particular piece of
respiratory equipment was chosen, and its capa-
bilities and limitations.
3 T
rained in the proper use, care, maintenance,
and fitting of the respirators they will be using.
The frequency of training will be determined by the par-
ticular job requirement. Repeat training is recommended
annually, or not to exceed 3 years (see BP Respiratory Pro-
tection Guidelines). Documentation of training frequency,
278
type, and session attendance must be retained on file at
each area office.
For each confined-space entry, training in the use of self-

contained, supplied-air respiratory protective equipment
will be a requirement of each site-specific pre-entry safety
meeting.
Task Hazard Assessment:

All tasks requiring respiratory equipment must be
identified and assessed to ensure all hazards have been
identified and mitigated. The mitigation measures should
be documented in Work Orders and Safe Work Permits.
RESPONSIBILITY:
The Supervisor in charge of the work location must ensure
that:
E
mployees and full time Contractors have
been deemed fit to wear respirators by the
Occupational Health Centre;
C
ontractors have performed fit testing and
fitness to wear respirators medical assessment
has taken place;
A
ll tasks which have respiratory hazards
are identified, evaluated, documented and
included in work orders or Safe Work Permits;
p
ersonnel are trained in the use, maintenance
and inspection of the respiratory equipment,
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
1. Industrial Hygiene Manual
2. Respiratory Protection Program
3. Site specific code of practice
279
HSSE MEETINGS
HSSE Meetings
PURPOSE:
To describe the composition, responsibilities, and meetings
of the Joint Worksite Safety, Health and Environment
Committee; describe meetings; and identify the require-
ments of the pre-job meetings, to be attended by both
contractor and BP Canada personnel before any potentially
hazardous activity is started.
APPLICATION:
Worksites and workers within a Department/Area as desig-
nated by the Department/Area Manager.
PROCEDURES:
Joint Worksite Health, Safety, Security and Environment
Committee:
1. A
Joint Worksite Safety, Health and Environ-
ment Committee is a group of worker employee
representatives working together to identify and
solve safety, occupational health, and environ-
mental problems at the worksite. The Operating
Centre Manager is responsible for the formation
of the committee at each worksite. The commit-
tees will hold regular meetings.
2. The committee shall consist of an adequate num-
ber of members to provide representation for all
workers, and shall include at least one supervisor
or equal numbers of workers and supervisors.
The term of a committee member will usually be
a minimum of one year.
3. Th
e committee will address the safety, occupa-
tional health and environmental concerns of
both management and workers. The committee
members will either address these concerns
immediately or bring them to the attention of
the committee at a meeting. Members of the
280
committee will inspect the worksites regularly

and report their findings to the committee.
HSSE Meetings
4. C
ommittee concerns and recommendations
must be documented and filed.
Committee Meetings:
The committee will hold meetings on a regular
basis, at least once a month. A suggested meeting format is
included at the end of this section.
General Meetings:
The BP Canada Supervisor in-charge of the work
area is responsible for ensuring safety, health and environ-
ment meetings are held. In most areas, there will be one
meeting per month. Employees should attend all health,
safety, security and environment meetings but must attend
a minimum of four meetings a year. An attendance record
must be signed by the attendants and retained at the work-
site with the minutes of the meeting.
The agenda will follow that of a regular business meeting:

1. D
iscussion of all incidents and near misses
within the area.
2. D
iscussion of incidents, and near misses
throughout company and industry.
3. H
ealth, Safety, Security and Environment com-
mittee concerns and recommendations.
4. Discussion of all bulletins and safety information.
Education programs such as:

Review of regulations
Review of safety practices and site-specific
procedures
Seminars on new equipment
Hazard identification and training.
(e.g. WHMIS)
281
The minutes of the meetings must be recorded and

distributed, as follows:
HSSE Meetings
A copy posted at the facility

A copy sent to appropriate personnel
Copy posted on the gHSSEr web site
Pre-Job risk assessment:

1. Where any personnel are to undertake an activity
deemed to be potentially hazardous, a pre-job
risk assessment shall be held.
2. The BP Canada representative in charge of the
pre-job risk assessment must review gen-
eral HSSE requirements emphasizing checks,
procedures and hazards. These include the
requirements for personnel protective equip-
ment, site hazards, emergency procedures and
job-specific safety requirements. Where the
job is complex or involves hot work, a detailed
site-specific procedure must be prepared prior
to, and reviewed at this meeting. The minutes of
the pre-job risk assessment must be recorded. All
personnel involved in the work task must sign
the minutes of the meeting. This documentation
must be retained on file at the worksite office for
a minimum of one year.
3. W
here the pre-job risk assessment is being held
as part of ongoing rig operations, the pre-job
safety meeting will involve all personnel on the
lease and be noted in the morning report, and
tower report.
HSSE Opportunity/Near Miss Reporting:

When a worker has reason to believe that an unsafe condi-
tion or practice may exist, he/she shall take immediate
corrective action where practical, and report the condition/
practice to his supervisor.
HSSE Opportunity/Near Miss reports will be filled out and
returned to the onsite HSSE representative.
282
Suggested format for recording the minutes of joint

worksite Health, Safety, Security and Environment com-
Safety Standby
mittee meetings:
1. Date, time, and location of meeting.
2. Chairperson of Meeting.
3. List of attendees.
4. Consecutive days since last Lost Time Accident.
5. Consecutive days since last Preventable Vehicle
Accident.
6. Old safety concerns reported but not corrected
(including specific details).
7. Old safety concerns reported and corrected.
8. New safety concerns and recommendations.
9. Safety concerns corrected but not reported.
10. Discussion of accidents, incidents and near
accidents (in area, throughout the company and
the industry).
11. Safety topics discussed and/or education
program.
12. Distribution list for minutes.
13. Must complete a full work place level one
inspection per year.
14. This can be split into smaller monthly ones.
SAFETY STANDBY
PURPOSE:
To provide procedures for a safety standby person to be
used as an observer and back-up during specific work
procedures.
APPLICATION:
Confined-space entry, and other work tasks as specified by
site-specific procedures.
283
DEFINITION:
Safety Standby
A safety standby person is an employee or designate used

as an observer and back-up, whenever the above work
applications are being carried out. This person is not part of
the work crew, and is only concerned with the safety of the
workers. Safety standby personal will be identified by some
type of measure as identified in the pre-job risk assessment.
PROCEDURES:
Qualifications:
The safety standby person must have up-to-date knowledge
of the following:
Site-specific job procedures
O
perating procedures for the safety equip-
ment required for the job in progress
Th
e location of the Operator and Supervisor
in charge and be able to communicate with
either Potential hazards. Training
First Aid
CPR
H2S, if applicable
Fire extinguisher use, if applicable
Rescue procedures
Applicable Golden Rule of Safety
BP Indoctrination
Confined Space if applicable Pre-entry or rescue
Atmospheric monitoring if applicable
Duties of the Safety Standby:

1. A safety standby is a person who observes a work
task for the purpose of: Fire suppression
2. M
onitoring atmospheric conditions from outside
the confined space Ensuring the air supply to
supplied-air units that are being used. [See Sec-
tion: Atmospheric Monitoring]
284
3. P
roviding communication between workers and
other operation or rescue personnel in the event
Safety Standby
of an emergency
4. E
xecution of emergency rescue plan and activation
of rescue team
5. M
aintaining entry log and tool log to ensure all
personnel and tools are accounted for.
6. E
nsuring unsupervised entry points are flagged
off indicating DO NOT ENTER or made
inaccessible by other means.
7. E
nsuring that all workers involved in the task
have the proper training certification in place.
8. Other duties as identified in the pre-job safety
meeting.
Note: Safety standby personnel can not leave their assigned

post unless personal safety is jeopardized.
Equipment Required:
The safety standby equipment must be designated in
the site-specific job procedure.
Emergency Actions:
In the event of any emergency, the safety standby
must perform the following:
(a) Communicate the emergency to the appropriate
back-up support. The call shall give the lease
location, shall be concise and specific: e.g., Man
Down, Fire, Explosion.
(b) If there is no immediate response, repeat the
message, and proceed with appropriate action.
Example: In the case of a Man down:

Call for help from a safe area and confirm call
285
has been acknowledged

Assess the hazard
Sand Blasting
P
ut on (don) respiratory protective equipment
(SCBA) as per provincial requirements
Remove the victim to a safe area
Perform emergency first aid as appropriate
R
eport all incidents immediately and arrange
for the victim to be transported to the nearest
medical support
Entry to Sour Worksites:

[See: Hydrogen Sulfide Safety]
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Employee in
charge and/or contractor to address the need for a Safety
Standby during specific work procedures, and to ensure that
a properly trained person is used where required.
SAND BLASTING / ABRASIVE BLASTING
PURPOSE:
Provide general guidelines for safe sand blasting operations.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada Plant and Field sites.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
D
ust created by blasting operations (i.e., silica
sand, walnut shells)
D
ust from material removed
(i.e., lead base paints)
Sparks caused by the blasting operation
286
Static electricity build-up

P
ossibility of physical injury from the blasting
Sand Blasting
operation
Noise exposure
Heat stress
PREPARATIONS:
W
ork area should be checked for combustible
gas prior to commencing operation and as
required throughout.
[See: Working in a Combustible Atmosphere Standard]
A
Safe Work Permit and Pre-Job Safety
Meeting may be required, depending on the
proximity to the production facilities and the
complexity of the job.
[See: Safe Work Permits]
[See: HSSE Meetings]
[See: Confined Space Entry]
[See: Noise and Hearing Conservation]
PROCEDURES:
The compressor, hose, nozzle and operator must be properly
grounded to prevent build-up of static electricity.
Ventilation requirements for the work area must be
considered.
The equipment operator must be able to stop the flow of
material immediately, i.e., shut-off device located at nozzle.
PRECAUTIONS:
I f conducting abrasive blasting ensure that
crystalline silica is replaced with a less harmful
substance.
M
inimize any release of dust (nuisance particu-
lates, silica, lead, etc.).
Approved respiratory protection must be used to
287
guard against inhalation of air borne contaminants.

S afe handling requirements for sand blasting
Security
material, or material removed from surfaces must

be addressed.
[See: MSDS]
C
onsult Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hy-
gienist for advice on working with silica, lead or
other toxic fumes, vapors or particulates.
A
pproved personal protective equipment must be
used to guard against injury to the operator.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
The BP Canada Representative, or his designate, is
responsible for ensuring that safe sand blasting procedures
are followed.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring:
Th
at all personnel are properly trained in the safe
use of the equipment
That the material hazards are identified
Th
at approved respiratory protection and per-
sonal protective equipment are used.
SECURITY
PURPOSE:
To protect the public, BP Canada, and contractor person-
nel, property and assets from injury, loss or damage.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada locations, including plants, compressor sta-
tions, offices, warehouses, batteries, wellsites, pipelines etc.
288
DEFINITION:
Security included:
Manned 24 hr. daily operation
Security
Unmanned 8 hr. daily operation
Assets included:
Product
Equipment
Legal Liability
PROCEDURES:
Physical Security:
1. Properly maintained public protection security
systems contribute to visitor safety, and minimize
exposure to possible litigation resulting from
incidents/accidents involving non-employees on
locations.
2. Where the possibility exists for theft, vandalism
or unauthorized entry, facilities shall be evaluated
and secured as required. Livestock entry shall be
a consideration.
The following are general physical security practices:
Perimeter Protection:
1. Control access to company facilities. Post
appropriate signs at ALL entrances to guide
legitimate visitors and warn-off potential tres-
passers. Utilize gates and barriers to prevent the
casual and/or curious from wandering or driving
into facilities.
[For appropriate signs, See: Lease Design]
2. W
here locks are required, approved heavy-duty/
industrial shackle padlocks (7/16 inch diameter)
and chains will be used. (For approved padlocks,
289
contact Corporate Security.)

3. F
encing, for security purposes, BP standards are
2.4 meters high, chain linked and topped with
Security
three strands of barbed wire angled outward.

4. F
encing requirements for sour facilities or facili-
ties near populated areas can be found in Alberta
Oil & Gas Regulations - 8.170, 8.180 & EUB
IL 90-19.
(If other than Alberta, see applicable government regula-
tions.)
Building Protection:
1. Install approved heavy-duty, deadbolt locks on
the doors and heavy security screening (mesh) or
bars over the windows of buildings containing
vital controls and sensitive or valuable equip-
ment. Overhead doors may require additional
protection.
2. Buildings, offices, etc. containing vital controls,
large quantities of valuable equipment and/or
supplies may, in addition, require electronic fire
and intrusion detection systems. Corporate Secu-
rity can provide recommendations and assistance
as required.
Lighting:
Areas should have sufficient illumination
for security purposes, and be in accordance with BP
Canada General Specifications and applicable government
regulations.
Identification:
Valuable equipment and other theft-prone items should be
engraved or stamped with a company-issued, computer-
registered, identification number. (Corporate Security shall
issue numbers specific to each operating facility/area during
290
security surveys and/or on management request.)
Service Rig Safety

RESPONSIBILITIES:
All employees must report incidents involving criminal ac-
tion or loss to Corporate Security, Local Management and
Police (if required).
EMERGENCY PLANS:
Refer to Emergency Response Plan Guide.
Forms:
48-220 Security Incident Report
C1121 Bomb Threat/Anonymous Telephone
Call Record
SERVICE RIG SAFETY
PURPOSE:
To review the major areas of concern in regard to service
rig safety to ensure compliance of service rigs with all appli-
cable government and BP Canada regulations and practices.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada operated service rig operations.
PREPARATIONS:
Pre-employment Meeting:
A Pre-employment meeting should be held with the service
rig contractor to ensure compliance with Service Rig Safety
requirements.
[See: Contractor Safety Program]
Controlled Areas:
Where service rig operations are required in a controlled
291
area, that is, adjacent to airports or populated areas, ad-

Service Rig Safety
ditional equipment and/or procedures may be required to

meet government regulations.
[See: Applicable Government Agency, E.U.B. in Alberta]
Notification:
The applicable government agency should be notified of all
rig moves.
Signs:
Post appropriate signs at the lease entrance advising H2S,
hard-hat area, overhead power lines, restricted access, etc.
PROCEDURES:
Detailed Rig Inspection Report:
Form C-79 (88-08)
Must be filled out and sent to the appropriate supervisor
according to the following schedule:
W
hen using a service rig that has not worked for
BP Canada before, or
W
hen a service rig has not worked for BP
Canada for a significant length of time (several
jobs), or
O
nce every three months during continuous
operation for BP Canada, or
W
hen it is deemed necessary by BP Canada
Wellsite Leader
Note:
Th
is inspection must be reported on the daily
report and service rig tour sheets
F
or critical wells, this inspection should be
completed within the 24 hour period prior to
initiating operations
Weekly Rig Inspection Report:
292
Form C-125 (88-08)
Service Rig Safety

In addition to the detailed Rig Inspection, service rig
inspections must be carried out each week, or once per
well, whichever is more frequent. The report must be filled
out and sent to the appropriate supervisor, and must be
reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets.
Daily Inspections:
A walk around inspection must be done on a daily basis
with the contractor representative. This should be done
first thing in the morning and reported on the daily report
and service rig tour sheets. Ideally this inspection could be
carried out in conjunction with the daily mechanical testing
of the BOP equipment.
Service Rig Blow-Out Prevention Drill Report:
Form C-125 (88-08)
Blow-out drills must be performed by each rig crew every
7 days, or once per well, whichever is more frequent.
Performance and certification of the rig crew and supervi-
sors must be recorded on the form. Drills should be done
at various stages of activity (i.e. tripping, drilling, out of
hole, etc.)
Blow-out Preventers:
1. When BOPs require winterizing, the heat source
must be suitable for the electrical area classifica-
tion in which it is used.
[See: Electrical Protection Regulations]
2. W
henever bolts are loosened or flanges broken,
that section of the BOP system must be pressure-
tested as if it had just been hooked up.
Accumulator:
Lines shall be tested to the maximum operating pressure of
the accumulator for 5 minutes prior to commencing opera-
tions. Hose couplers within 7.0 meters of the wellbore must
293
be lock-type or Hammer Union type.

Service Rig Safety
BOP Remote:
Must be shielded from the wellhead and may be located at
the accumulator.
Kill and Bleed Off System:

Wellhead casing valves must not be used as part of this
system. These valves are reserved for emergency use only.
Threaded BOP ports are not acceptable because of potential
thread damage.
If fire sheathed hoses are used, they shall be shop serviced in
three year cycles and service reports made available.
Rig Savers/Shut-Offs:
All diesel engines within 25 meters of a wellhead or a tank
must be equipped with a positive air shut-off valve (PASO),
either automatically or manually operated. This valve must
be function tested prior to commencing operations and at
least once a week thereafter. Tests shall be recorded on daily
reports.
Vehicles, without air intake shut-offs, essential to operations
may operate within this distance, provided the BP Canada
Representative in-charge or his designate assesses the on-site
safety, i.e. Gas detection. This does not apply to where a
vehicle is performing an operation on the well.
Lighting:
All rig lights must be enclosed in vapor-proof glass covers
and should be controlled by an explosion-proof switch
within reach of the driller while at the brake.
Rig Cleaning:
The rig should be kept clean using rigwash chemicals and
water. Gasoline must not be used.
294
Hydrogen Sulfide and Combustible Gas (L.E.L.)
Service Rig Safety

Monitors:
Ensure Drager or Gastec H2S sampling devices are available
with an adequate range of dated sampling tubes. H2S elec-
tronic monitors, complete with audible and visual alarms,
are required on critical sour wells. The monitor must be
capable of detecting H2S at 10 PPM. The monitor should
provide alarms as follows:
Low Alarm 10 PPM H2S
High Alarm 20 PPM H2S
Monitors must be routinely calibrated and tested by a
qualified person. A minimum of two detectors are required;
one located as close to the return line in the rig/mud tank
as possible, and the other placed under the rig floor.
[See: Standard for Working in a Combustible Gas Environ-
ment]
Equipment Placement:
On initial set-up, the rig should be upwind of the wellhead,
based on the prevailing wind direction. The line from the
tank to the wellhead should run at 90 degrees to the wind,
and the pump must be upwind of the tank.
[See: E.U.B. Equipment Spacing Diagram included at the
end of this section.]
NOTE: If the lease is too small to position equipment

according to the applicable regulations, approval for exemp-
tion must be obtained from the appropriate regulatory
agencies prior to performing the work. (e.g. EUB and/or
OH&S).
Power Line Spacing:

Guy lines must not cross under or over any existing power
line. For minimum clearances from overhead power lines,
[See: Electricity].
295
Wind Direction:
Service Rig Safety
A method of determining wind direction shall be used. This

should be supplemented by streamers in the derrick, guy
wires and rig tank to ensure that a correct wind direction is
always available.
Access and Parking:

The parking area should be as far away from the wellhead as
possible, but in no case closer than 25 meters. Access to and
from this area should be outside the 25 meter radius.
Sump, Swab Tank and Flare Stack:

The sump, swab tank and flare stack must be located 50
meters downwind of the rig based on the prevailing wind
direction. On sour wells, the flare stack must be equipped
with a continuous Pilot. For critical sour wells, continuous
ignition is suggested as a back-up to the continuous pilot.
Anchors:
All underground piping, cable and cathodic protection beds
must be located prior to driving in anchors.
[See: Ground Disturbance Practice]
Anchors must be properly spaced and pull tested according
to the rig manufacturers specifications.
[See: BPs Completion Operations Manual for further
details]
Safety Trailer Requirements:

Safety trailers are required where the H2S concentration
in the vapor phase is equal to or greater than 1 percent. A
safety trailer and safety supervisor is required on all wells
where the H2S concentration in the vapor phase is equal to
or greater than 5 percent.
For wells where the H2S concentration is low and risk to
personnel associated with an H2S release is minimal, the
non-requirement for a safety trailer can be addressed in the
work plan.
296
Electrical Grounding/Bonding:
Signs & Barricades

All electrical systems must be properly grounded. Ground
electrodes must have a resistance of no more than 10 ohms.
Ground the service rig, pumps, pump trucks and rig tanks,
etc. The electrode resistance should not exceed 7 ohms.
Cathodic protection must be shut off and the pipeline
properly bonded to the wellhead and service rig before it is
disconnected.
[See: Electricity]
When ground electrodes are to be used, these will be driven
rods or pipes.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
The BP Canada representative in-charge is responsible for
ensuring that all personnel on-site fully understand the
safety considerations and service rig safety requirements.
He is also responsible for ensuring that service rig inspec-
tions are performed, and that all service rigs that work for
BP meet the applicable requirements.
The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that
his equipment and personnel comply with the applicable
government regulations and BP HSSE Policies.
SIGNS AND BARRICADES
PURPOSE:
To provide safe work practices to reduce hazards by the use
of signs or barricades.
APPLICATION:
All BP plant and field roads and facilities.
PROCEDURES:
Road Hazards:
Where a hazard exists on a road, e.g., closure, bridge
out, or culvert out, proper signs and barricades must be
297
Simultaneous Operating
used to ensure public safety. Road signs addressing dust

hazards, ice, curves, hills, speed limits, etc. should also be
considered. Local management should assess the need on all
company roads.
Road Maintenance:
Whenever road maintenance (i.e., sanding, grading, gravel-
ling, etc.) is being conducted on BP Canada roads, all signs
required by Provincial Transportation must be used. BP
Canada roads are open to public use and must be treated
as such.
Temporary Hazards:
Wherever a temporary hazard exists during maintenance
or operating activities, (i.e. open ditches, spills, wet floors,
etc.) the necessary signs or barricades must be in place to
ensure the safety of uninvolved personnel.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
All employees and contractors are responsible to identify
hazards and ensure that proper and adequate signs and
barricades are used as required. Use of reflective vests are
required for people involved in setting, manning signs and
barricades on roadways.
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATING PROCEDURE
1.0 Purpose/Scope
1.1 The intent of this document is to provide procedures

to facilitate safe operations during simultaneous
Well, Operations, and Construction activities. The
Canada Gas BU team is committed to maintaining a
safe and environmentally sound workplace.
1.2 Pre-job planning, cooperation and communica-

tion between all groups and departments during
298
simultaneous operations are crucial to ensuring safe
operations. Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS)
referenced herein apply to interactions between Op-
erations, Wells, and Construction activities. Federal,
provincial, and local regulations are to be followed
during all operations and activities.
2.1 The following is a list of the key Canada Gas PU

Field based positions and their roles with respect to
Simultaneous Operations planning. As the project
develops, roles and responsibilities will change.
These changes will be clearly identified and com-
municated at the daily coordination meetings.
2.2 perating Centre Manager (or designee such as

O
Plant or Field Foreman for a site within the OC) is
responsible for the overall safety of personnel on site.
On a continuous basis they will communicate with
the operating groups to learn of the days activities.
They will decide which activities take precedence af-
ter assessing the priorities associated with each opera-
tion. The OCM (or designee) has the obligation and
authority to shutdown any or all activities necessary
to ensure the safety of personnel and the facility. He
is responsible for organizing communications meet-
ings with the respective Person in Charge from Wells,
Construction and Operations for SIMOPS activities.
2.3 erson in Charge (PIC) will be a designated

P
Contractor, Alliance partner, or BP employee who
is singularly accountable for compliance with this
SIMOPS Procedure at a given work location. Their
accountabilities under this procedure will include
notification/training of the work location depart-
ment staff outlined in this procedure, develop-
299
ment of any location specific notification lists, and

ongoing reporting of any HSSE incidents or near
miss incidents. There shall be a PIC identified for
each major work group on the site (e.g. Construc-
tion, Wells, and Operations) wherever simultaneous
operations can occur. As the project progresses, the
PIC role may be transferred to different personnel.
As these roles change, it is important that the PICs
are clearly identified to all personnel onsite through
training/orientations and posting on the SIMOPS
Notice Board.
2.4 ells Representative is the BP Wellsite Leader and is

W
accountable for all drilling and rig related activities
and operations. He/she is the Wells PIC and reports
to the Wells Team Leader in Calgary.
2.5 S pecial Projects / Construction Foreman - this can be

any person who has responsibilities for construction
or special project activities including WARTHOG.
He/she is accountable for all project-associated
contractors to provide a SIMOPS Work Plan for all
construction projects that involve SIMOPS (concur-
rent activity among Projects, Wells, and Operations).
2.6 perations Lead/or Area Authority is accountable

O
for facility operations and all non-drilling remedial
well operations as well as all activities on the site
outside of the drilling rig after Production Opera-
tions begin. He/she is the Operations PIC and is
accountable for Operations SIMOPS Work Plans
that involve activities that impact drilling operations
or project/construction activities. Depending on the
particular OC / Site organization this may be a Fore-
man, Senior Operator or Plant / Field Operator.
2.7 Issuing Authority is accountable for the overall
300
control of work on the work site. He / she will issue
Work Permits. In cases where the Issuing Authority
has been transferred from existing operations the
Issuing Authority must ensure the requirements for
handing over a lease and changing Issuing authority
have been met. On larger sites it may be appropriate
to designate more than one Issuing Authority. In that
case the designated areas for each Issuing Authority
must be clearly defined with a marked up plot plan
and on site (e.g. snow fencing). Note in many cases
the Issuing Authority will also be a PIC.
2.8 S ite HSSE Coordinator will be responsible for site

safety programs. The Site HSSE Coordinator
will assist the PIC in the facilitation of SIMOPS
communication meetings and provide support to all
departments in the preparation of SIMOPS Plans
and hazards analysis reviews.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 S imultaneous operations referenced herein apply

to interactions between Operations, Wells, and
Construction activities. Federal, provincial, and local
regulations are to be followed during all operations
and activities. These activities as well as other termi-
nology are defined as follows:
O
perations: facilities operation and maintenance,
well production and maintenance, pipeline
operation and maintenance
W
ells: drilling rig, workover rig, and/or comple-
tion rig operations including abandonments,
and rig maintenance
C
onstruction: civil/gravel work, facilities installa-
tion and construction, pipeline construction, site
decommissioning and abandonment and general
construction
301
S imultaneous Operations (SIMOPS): concurrent

activities of producing, processing, or injection
of hydrocarbons (and associated water); drilling;
completion; remedial operations; well mainte-
nance/service; or any construction activity
S ite Control: Ultimate control and account-
ability for a development work site by one of the
three departments shall be established for each
phase of the individual program development
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Communications
ommunications is the key to excellent HSSE per-
C
formance and safe Simultaneous Operations. Every
group must be keenly aware of what the other groups
are doing to avoid conflicts. Coordination meetings
will be held daily through the various phases of con-
struction, drilling, and operations activities. A rep-
resentative from each major work group will attend
these meetings and exchange information about their
respective groups activities for the day. Potential
work conflicts will be resolved between the various
groups before any work will commence. SIMOPS
activities planned for the next day will be discussed
in detail and the various PICs will pass on SIMOPS
information to affected supervisors, foreman and
workers at the following days HSSE meetings. At
this meeting, information relative to future work
will also be shared to allow adequate planning for all
affected departments.
SIMOPS Notice Board shall be established at a

A
designated location on the work site. It is critically
important during Simultaneous Operations that all
personnel involved know how to communicate an
emergency situation.
302
This SIMOPS Notice Board will display, as a
minimum:
Site specific Emergency Notification Number(s)
Site specific Emergency Notification Procedure
A
uthority or Department in charge of the loca-
tion (Site control), name of Issuing Authority
(IA), and contact information for Work Permits
SIMOPS Work Plans
Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
ame and contact information for the site
N
specific Person in Charge (PIC) for Construc-
tion, Wells, and Operations
ate of last Notice Board information change
D
or review
The location of the notice board and the minimum
information above shall be part of the initial site
specific HSSE orientation. As part of the site orien-
tation, the site specific emergency notification proce-
dure and the muster location(s) will be reviewed.
Crew supervisors are accountable for reviewing

the SIMOPS Notice Board and ensuring that any
operation which affects another groups activity be
discussed at the next appropriate tour or shift change
tool box safety meeting, pre-tour safety meeting, or
pre-job safety meeting.
e SIMOPS Notice Board shall be updated as con-

Th
ditions or development phases change. It must be
reviewed weekly for accuracy. The Issuing Authority
in charge of the site shall be accountable for review-
ing and updating the SIMOPS Notice Board.
4.2 Work Permits

e Canada Gas PU Permit to Work (PTW) Practice
Th
(MS880) will be used. Work Permits will be issued
by the Issuing Authority and posted on the SIMOPS
Notice Board.
303
4.3 Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS) Work Plans

S IMOPS Work Plans shall be developed for any
work groups activity that directly or indirectly affects
the safe performance of another work groups activity
or operation. (i.e., a SIMOPS Work Plan is required
of all activities that may impact wells, production
operations or construction operations.) Responsibil-
ity for SIMOPS Work Plan preparation lies with the
work group initiating the activity. The Site HSSE
Coordinator will assist each department in the devel-
opment of SIMOPS Plans and hazards analysis and
will facilitate SIMOPS interface meetings between
departments.
e work activity requiring the SIMOPS Plan

Th
should be clearly identified on the SIMOPS Plan
form, gHSSEr MF36201.
The plan must include but is not limited to the follow-

ing key points:
A
description of the job, project, operation, or
activity to be conducted including the number
of personnel involved, equipment involved, site
resources required, etc.
D
esignated PIC for the job and the communica-
tion plan for contacting the PIC by radio and/or
phone
Expected duration of the work
Hazard Analysis profile for the job
Work Permit Plan for that given job
C
larity on which activities cannot occur simul-
taneously or what special controls are required if
the activities are to take place simultaneously
very SIMOPS Work Plan must be approved and

E
signed by the PIC for the operation(s) impacted.
304
For example, when a construction activity impacts
a Wells operation by proximity to the wells opera-
tion, the PIC for Construction is accountable for
communication with the Wells PIC, reviewing the
SIMOPS Work Plan, and obtaining the Wells PICs
approval before the work begins. However work can
only begin when a Permit to Work has been issued
by the Issuing Authority who has also reviewed the
SIMOPS Work Plan.
Examples of work requiring SIMOPS Work Plans

include but are not limited to the following:
O
n a well site, Construction work adjacent to a
drilling or well service rig
O
n a plant site, Construction work adjacent to
live operating plant
e Issuing Authority or PIC can require a SIMOPS

Th
Work Plan before the new job, project, operation, or
activity can begin.
copy of every approved SIMOPS Work Plan shall

A
be posted on the SIMOPS Notice Board. Upon
completion of the SIMOPS activity, the Plan may be
removed from the SIMOPS Notice Board.
5.0 Reference Documents
Project Management Plan gHSSEr MS 363

g HSSEr MS 880 - Permit to Work and Hazard
Assessment Practice
N
AG SPU Control of Work Policy http://docs.
bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/
documents/K0000002586
6.0 Forms
HSSEr MF36201 SIMOPS Work Plan Form
305
STRESS RELIEVING
Stress Relieving
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for safe stress relieving practices.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada Facilities.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Fire, Explosion, Electrical Shock, Burns
PREPARATIONS:
The stress relieving unit and associated equipment are both
potential ignition sources, and therefore necessitates the
need for extreme caution and proper procedures to elimi-
nate the safety hazards.
[See: Permit to work] [See: HSSE Meetings]
PROCEDURES:
Whenever stress relieving is performed on piping or vessels
in place, site-specific procedures must be developed.
[See: Welding Practices - General]
Refer to BPs Welding Quality Control Manual for stress
relieving requirements and techniques.
Signs:
Appropriate signs should be erected around the work
area to warn of the hazard and to keep out non-essential
personnel.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
Th
e BP Canada Representative in charge of the
operation is responsible for ensuring that safe
stress relieving procedures are followed
It is the responsibility of the qualified engineer
306
in charge to ensure that the appropriate stress

relieving requirements and techniques are met
Swabbing
Th
e contractor is responsible for the safe opera-
tion and use of his equipment while on an BP
Canada worksite
SWABBING
PURPOSE:
To provide a general guide for safe swabbing operations.
APPLICATION:
All swabbing operations conducted by service rigs, swab-
bing units and wireline units.
DEFINITION:
Routine Work:
Frequently performed swabbing operations on wells of
similar set-up. Does not include swabbing operations on
sour wells.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Combustible Fluids:
As excessive gas becomes evident, production must be
switched through testers and gas flared. Wind indicators
must be present at all locations.
Toxic return fluids:

[See: WHMIS for Fluid Handling Requirements]
[See: H2S Safety]
[See: Static Electricity]
Swabbing Unit, wireline unit, service rig and associated pip-
ing and equipment must be properly bonded to wellhead
and grounded.
307
[See: Bonding and grounding]

PREPARATIONS:
Swabbing
Non-Routine Work:
A Work Permit must be issued and a pre-job safety meeting
conducted, prior to commencing operation. If swabbing is
part of service rig operations, only a pre-job safety meeting
needs to be conducted.
[See: Permits To Work]
Routine Work:
Swabbing procedures must be developed for all routine
swabbing operations where a work permit and pre-job
safety meeting are not issued or conducted.
The procedure must cover all pertinent safety and opera-
tion considerations and emergency plans. This procedure
must be reviewed with all pertinent contract personnel.
Procedures reviewed and individuals trained must be
documented.
PROCEDURES:
Company Representative:
A properly trained BP Canada Representative, or his
designate, must be on-site for all swabbing operations. An
BP Canada Representative must be on-site when swabbing
operations involve sour wells.
Cathodic Protection:
If flowline is to be disconnected, or swab return line is to
be connected to flowline, cathodic protection must be shut
off. The wellhead, swabbing unit and swab return line must
then be electrically bonded to the flowline to eliminate any
electrical potential before disconnecting.
Fluids should be swabbed through a poorboy degasser into
a rig tank, only if the Hydrogen Sulfide concentrations are
less than the occupational exposure limit.
308
[See: H2S Safety]

If the H2S concentrations exceed the occupational exposure
Swabbing
limit, all fluid should be swabbed through proper testing
equipment, which may include a separator, flare stack,
continuous flare pit, gas boot, and vented tanks. Two quali-
fied personnel should supervise the equipment, configured
appropriately for the specific well.
[See: BPs Completion Operations Manual]
Swab Return Vent Lines:

Must be equipped with block valves, which are closed when
running in the hole with the swab mandrel.
Swabbing Unit:
Must be securely anchored according to manufacturers
specifications.
Swab Tank:
Must be spaced as per rig tank spacing requirements.
Swabbing with service rig or swabbing unit must not be
done after dark. A wireline truck equipped with adequate
lighting and a meterage wheel may be used with the ap-
proval of the supervisor, or his designate and the appropri-
ate government agency.
Diesel Engine Shut-Offs:

[See: PASO]
Oil Savers:
Lubricator oil savers must be equipped with controls which
can be readily operated.
Tank Trucks:
If swabbing to a tank truck, the engine must be shut off,
and the driver must not be in the cab.
Swab Cable:
309
Should be flagged and well maintained.

PRECAUTIONS:
Tank Gauging
Swab tank should be externally gauged. If external gauging

is not possible, suspend swabbing operations and ensure
that the swab return line block valve is closed prior to
any personnel going up on the tanks. Fluid must not be
unloaded from the swab tank while a swab is being pulled.
[See: Tank Gauging]
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative
in charge of the operation to ensure that safe swabbing
procedures are followed.
The service contractor is responsible for the safe operation
of his equipment, and for the adherence to all applicable
government and BP Canada regulations and practices.
TRAINING:
[See: Training]
TANK GAUGING
PURPOSE:
To provide a guide for safe gauging of tanks.
APPLICATION:
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
Gauging operations present a hazard to the worker due
to the presence of toxic or flammable gases and the tank
height.
PRECAUTIONS:
T
anks installed on a permanent basis should have
gauge boards or an external gauging mechanism.
310
A
ll tank ladders shall conform to applicable
Tank Truck Loading

government regulations and BP Specifications.
[See: Ladders Fixed]
No person should stand on a tank roof.
W
here tanks are handling toxic fluids, the
worker may require breathing apparatus and a
safety standby person.
[See: Tank Truck Loading/Unloading]
C
onsult Safety Coordinator or Industrial
Hygienist for advice on specific respiratory
protection.
W
hen gauging a tank from a ladder at a height
greater than 2.0 meters, where a hoop, guardrail,
platform or cage has not been supplied, a fall
arresting device must be worn.
[See: Working at Heights Standard and Golden Rule]
TANK TRUCK LOADING /UNLOADING
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for loading and unloading products
and fluids safely.
APPLICATION:
Movement of fluids at plant and field operations via bulk
truck transport.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
[See: WHMIS]
[See: MSDS]
[See: Hydrogen Sulphur Safety]
[See: Atmospheric Monitoring]
311
Static Electricity
Tank Truck Loading
[See: Electrical Bonding and Grounding]

Elevated Worksite Top of Tank
[See: Working at Heights]
Fluid temperature, i.e., Sulfur, LPG.
PREPARATIONS:
Where caustic, acids, or extremely volatile, corrosive, or
sour fluids are being transported, site-specific procedures
must be followed. These will address the unique hazards
and safeguards required.
PROCEDURES:
Before loading or unloading, all trucks must be suitably
grounded. The grounding cable connection should be made
at the Tank Truck to eliminate any possible spark at the
ignitable source.
All trucks must be parked at least 25 meters from any
combustible source, and pointed off the lease for quick exit.
All diesel engine vehicles working within 25 meters must be
equipped with a positive inlet air shut-off.
While loading or unloading, the truck must be located
a minimum of 8 meters from the production tanks and
outside of any tank dykes. In areas where spacing relaxation
has been approved by the necessary government agencies,
the distances so approved shall be maintained.
[See: Service Rig Safety for Spacing Diagrams]
All trucks must be equipped to allow determination of levels
in the tank without the driver being on top of the tanks.
When loading has started the driver must walk around the
unit to ensure that the product is not leaking from hoses,
connections, valves, or pump seals. If a leak is spotted,
the driver will immediately stop the activity, and if safe to
do so, correct the problem. Unless specific safety related
considerations require otherwise, the driver will remain
outside the vehicle at all times during loading and unload-
312
ing operations to continuously monitor tank levels and
Tank Truck Loading

connections. No truck maintenance shall take place during
these operations. Prior to loading and unloading a vehicle,
the wheels must be chocked.
The appropriate personal protection must be worn.
Tank trucks must be equipped with at least 1-30# LTK
Fire extinguisher, placed ready to use, during loading and
unloading operations.
Special Precautions for Handling Sour Fluids:

When handling fluids containing H2S, where the potential
exists for H2S to exceed the occupational exposure limits,
truck operators must wear breathing equipment while
connecting or disconnecting load lines, gauging tanks, and
checking truck compartments during loading or unload-
ing operations. This equipment must be supplied and
maintained by the contractor. A safety standby should also
be considered. In systems with low H2S content and/or the
risk to worker exposure is minimal, the non-requirement
for a safety standby can be addressed by a site-specific
procedure.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada employee in-charge
to ensure that safe loading and unloading procedures are
conveyed and followed.
The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that safe
loading/unloading procedures are followed
While loading or unloading, the truck must be located
a minimum of 8 meters from the production tanks and
outside of any tank dykes. In areas where spacing relaxation
has been approved by the necessary government agencies,
313
the distances so approved shall be maintained.

[See: Service Rig Safety for Spacing Diagrams]
Swabbing
All trucks must be equipped to allow determination of lev-

els in the tank without the driver being on top of the tanks.
When loading has started the driver must walk around the
unit to ensure that the product is not leaking from hoses,
connections, valves, or pump seals. If a leak is spotted,
the driver will immediately stop the activity, and if safe to
do so, correct the problem. Unless specific safety related
considerations require otherwise, the driver will remain
outside the vehicle at all times during loading and unload-
ing operations to continuously monitor tank levels. No
truck maintenance shall take place during these operations.
Prior to loading and unloading a vehicle, the wheels must
be chocked.
The appropriate personal protection must be worn.
Tank trucks must be equipped with at least 1-30# LTK
Fire extinguisher, placed ready to use, during loading and
unloading operations.
Special Precautions for Handling Sour Fluids:

When handling fluids containing H2S, where the potential
exists for H2S to exceed the occupational exposure limits,
truck operators must wear breathing equipment while
connecting or disconnecting load lines, gauging tanks, and
checking truck compartments during loading or unload-
ing operations. This equipment must be supplied and
maintained by the contractor. A safety standby should also
be considered. In systems with low H2S content and/or the
risk to personnel associated with an H2S release is minimal,
the non-requirement for a safety standby can be addressed
by a site-specific procedure.
314
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the Canada employee in-charge
to ensure that safe loading and unloading procedures are
Tools
conveyed and followed.
The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that safe
loading/unloading procedures are followed.
TOOLS
All tools must be inspected prior to use and only used if in

safe working condition. Tools must be used as per manufac-
turers recommendation. This means all guards must be in
place and no modifications made to the tool.
Studs and nuts must be tightened as per manufac-

turers recommendation (i.e. torque wrenches to be used vs.
impact wrenches).
Inspection of Hand Tools prior to use:

P
erform a complete inspection of all equipment
and job related tools prior to starting any job. All
tools and equipment used must be clean and in
good working condition prior and during use.
E
nsure wooden or fiberglass handles used on
hammers and similar tools are not damaged or
have been modified (i.e. taped wooden handles
may hide damage to the handle.) Damaged
handles on hammers, axes and similar equipment
shall be immediately taken out of service and
replaced promptly.
E
nsure hand tools such as hammers, chisels and
punches, which develop mushroomed heads
during use, are reconditioned or replaced as
necessary.
C
heck to ensure that tool handles are wedged
tightly in the head of all tools. Check for tight-
315
ness at head/handle connection point.

R
eplace worn or bent wrenches, pliers, etc.
regularly.
Training
S tore tools in dry secure locations where they will

not be tampered with.
N
ever attempt to repair damaged or modified
tools.
U
tilize appropriate eye face and hand protection
while using hand tools or equipment which
might produce flying materials or be subject to
breakage? (See Personal Protection Equipment
for further information)
P
reference is to select a tool that will keep your
wrist in neutral position.
TRAINING
PURPOSE:
To describe the safety training courses and certification
required by employees and contractors to ensure safe and
productive on-site operations.
APPLICATION:
Employees and Contractors as required by job function
and/or designated by the Department/Area Manager.
PREPARATIONS:
Pre-Job risk assessment Meeting:
Should provide details of the job and all safety consider-
ations related to the job could include but not limited to;
required training and certification. This on-site commu-
nication will provide informal training and open channels
for encouraging awareness and information flow as the
operation progresses.
[See: Safety Meetings]
316
Contractor Safety:
All contractors should have a Safety Program in place which
meets the training requirements of the applicable govern-
Training
ment regulations and BP Canada requirements. This should
be reviewed prior to awarding work.
PROCEDURES:
Safety is a function of every job task, however, in several
special safety training areas, certification is a requirement.
Safety training will be instituted to comply with mandatory
requirements and other safety training as deemed necessary
by Management.
Training Courses:
Employees will be trained to a competent level on job tasks,
operating procedures, and mandatory safety training.
Safety Training Records:

A complete record of all safety training must be maintained
by the Local VTA Administration section in the Depart-
ment/Area, and should be retained in the VTA database.
The Safety and Industrial Hygiene section provides for the
required safety training in-house or through recommended
outside agencies. It also promotes the compliance of all
employees with safety training requirements, by monitoring
changes in regulations and advising the Operating Manage-
ment of the requirements.
Wellsite Training:
The On-Site BP Representative in charge of any rig opera-
tion must have the following qualifications:
S econd Line B.O.P. certification (for Drilling
Operations)
W
ell Service B.O.P. certification (for Service Rig
Operations)
H2S Alive certification (as applicable)
317
R
espiratory Protection Training certification (as
applicable)
First Aid & C.P.R. (in accordance with appli-
Training
cable government regulations)

W
orksite Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS)
Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG)
Confined Space (as applicable)
S pecific Training in the type of Operations being
performed.
Th
e Service Rig/Drilling Contractor/Service
Company personnel must have the following
qualifications:
F
irst Line B.O.P. certification for Drillers (for
drilling operations)
S econd Line B.O.P. certification for Toolpush/
Rig Manager (for drilling operations)
W
ell Service B.O.P. certification for Toolpush
and Driller (for service rig operations)
Boiler Tickets certification (as applicable)
B
asic specific training in the operation or service
they are to perform.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
The BP Canada Supervisor/Representative in charge is
responsible for verifying that the required training and
certification requirements are met as per the CGPU HSSE
Required Training Matrix. This matrix must provide for, at
a minimum, all legislated training requirements. The Field
Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all workers are
properly trained or under the direct supervision of a worker
who is, in accordance with the applicable government
regulations and BP Canada requirements.
BP and FTE Employees within Operations refer to the
CGPU Field Required Training Matrix for training require-
ments and renewal frequencies located on the gHSSEr
318
website - http://gasiso14001.bpweb.bp.com/index.asp
Welding Practices
CONTRACTOR REQUIRED SAFETY TRAINING:
Contractors working on behalf of BP Canada are required
to have the minimum training requirements listed below.
The Contractor shall be able to provide valid training
certificates to the BP Representative on site prior to work
commencing:
H2S Alive if working in potential H2S atmospheres
WHMIS
Standard First Aid to meet the minimum first
aider requirements in provincial regulations
TDG if transporting dangerous goods
Level One Indoctrination
References:
Skills Development Web Links:
- NAG SPU: https://wss2.bp.com/EP3/Skills_
Development/default.aspx
- CANADA: https://wss2.bp.com/EP3/Skills_
Development/Canada/Forms/AllItems.aspx
N
AG Control of Work Practice Web Link:
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/
onshore/documents/K0000002586?docbase=NA
G&ticket=vlinkpass&username=bp_vlink&root
paths=%2Fcontent%2Fhse%2Fonshore%2Fdoc
uments%0A%0D.
WELDING PRACTICES GENERAL
PURPOSE:
To provide safe procedures for welding.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada Facilities and pipelines.
DEFINITION:
319
Welding includes:
Welding Practices
Arc Welding
MIG
TIG
Hot cutting
CAD Welding
Stoppling
Explosion welding and cutting
A pressure piping system includes the pipe, tubes, conduits,
fittings, gaskets, bolting, and other components making up
a system. The sole purpose of this system is the conveyance
of a fluid under pressure, and the control of the flow of a
fluid under pressure between two or more
A pipeline is a gas line, oil line, fluid line, multiphase line,
solids line, secondary line, distribution line or flowline.
Other jurisdictions may have definitions that vary. The
appropriate regulations should be checked for their defini-
tions.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
W
elding within a production area is an activity
which requires extreme caution and proper
procedures
W
elding and hot work are not to be considered
routine operations, particularly when the work
involves cutting into, or welding onto, produc-
tion lines
Fire and Explosion
Welding Burns, Radiation and electric shock
Toxic welding fumes, and gases
Compressed fuel cylinders
Noise
Vibration
PREPARATIONS:
320
All welding and hot work must be done with the permis-
Welding Practices
sion of the BP Canada Representative in-charge. Welding
in any production facility requires a Hot Work Permit and
shall require a pre-job safety meeting depending on the
complexity and hazard associated with work.
[See: Permit to work]
[See: MSDS]
NOTE: Designated welding shops are exempt.

Complete risk assessment to determine if respiratory
protection and emergency back-up personnel are required,
prior to commencing any welding operation.
The needs for warning signs, to isolate or restrict entry to
the work area to authorized personnel wearing suitable
protection should take into consideration.
Government Regulations:
Before any additions or changes are made to pressure
piping that are classified under the provincial inspection
jurisdictions, proper notification must be made and ap-
proval secured. The BP Canada welding quality manual and
specification must be consulted.
PROCEDURES:
Site-specific procedure must be developed. This may
include, but is not limited, to the following:
Blinding
Purging
Depressuring
Excavations
X-Ray
Stress Relieving
Non-Destructive Testing
321
Site-Specific Procedure:
Welding Practices
A detailed work plan for any procedure that involves the

use of a cutting torch, welding, or tie-in to existing operat-
ing equipment must be prepared. The procedure must list
all the activities in sequence required to complete the job.
For each activity, the following areas must be covered:
1. A
ctivity: Describe what has to be done and how
the activity will be carried out.
2. H
azards: Describe the safety hazards present
and how each hazard will be eliminated or
minimized.
3. P
ersonnel: Describe who is responsible for the
activity and who will carry it out.
4. F
ire Protection Equipment: Must be located at
the work site, ready to use.
[See: Fire Protection Equipment]
PRECAUTIONS:
Ventilation:
Adequate mechanical ventilation, local fume extraction
equipment or respiratory protection must be used where:
Natural ventilation is obstructed
Toxic metals or fluxes are used
Toxic fumes, gases and ozone are generated.
[See: Confined Space Entry]
[See: Respiratory Equipment]
Note: Consult Industrial Hygienist for advice on appropri-

ate worker exposure controls and respiratory protection.
Respiratory:
Exposure to hazardous fumes, dusts, gases and vapors
may occur in the welding process. To reduce exposure to
hexavalent chromium, beryllium and other metal fumes or
dusts the following respiratory protection guidelines must
be followed:
322
Task Respiratory Protection
Welding Practices
Welding, cutting, gouging & grinding on Half Mask respirator with P100 filters
stainless steel inside a vessel or in a shop
Welding on carbon steel with chromium or Half Mask respirator with P100 filters
beryllium containing rods (in shop or
outside)
Welding & grinding on stainless steel using Powered air-purifying or full-face
Inconel rod inside vessels respirator with P100 filters
Protective Equipment:
Welder and Welders helpers must wear approved protective
equipment.
Welding helmet and safety glasses must be worn when

welding, grinding and buffing.
If a welder is performing non-welding related tasks, the
Practice PPE requirements shall be followed.
[See: Personal Protective Equipment, FRW Practice and

Hand Protection Practice]
Flash protection screens should be used to protect the
uninvolved workers.
Gas Monitoring:
Work area, equipment and lines shall be checked for com-
bustible and/or toxic gas prior to starting job. Work area
may require continuous monitoring throughout the job.
Re-entry to work area must be accompanied by re-check for
combustible and/or toxic gas.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada supervisor in
charge, or his designate, to ensure that safe welding proce-
dures are in place and followed.
Welders are responsible for the proper maintenance and safe
operation of their equipment.
TRAINING:
Only welders ticketed for the applicable weld procedure
shall be used.
323
Well Servicing Work Plan
All workers must be properly trained and competent to

carry out their required task.
For welding rules and regulations consult the provincial

occupational health and safety references listed below:
A
lberta OH & S Manual Part 10 Section
171.1 (1) 174 (1)
B
ritish Columbia OH & S Manual Section
12.112 12.124
WELL SERVICING WORK PLAN
PURPOSE:
To provide a guide for developing work plans for well
servicing work.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada operated wells.
DEFINITION:
A site-specific procedure of the well servicing operations to
be undertaken.
PROCEDURES:
Each well servicing job should have a work plan. Analysis
of the operation and safety conditions will dictate the detail
required.
All well workovers must have an approved work plan.
The following outlines the information and procedures that
should be included in any approved work plan.
Pertinent Well Data:

Well name and location
324

Perforations
Zone
Elevations: KB, Ground or CF
TD
PBTD
C
asing details: Surface, intermediate and produc-
tion size, weight, grade, setting depth, cement
type, cement volume
P
roduction tubing details, listed from top to
bottom, including all dimensions (IDs, ODs),
weights, grades, thread size, and accessories
(packers, tubing anchors, etc.)
Bottom hole pressure
Bottomhole temperature
H
2S concentration (Is a safety company re-
quired? Is this a critical sour well as defined by
the EUB?)
[See: H2S Safety]
Hole capacities
W
ellhead description including details of size,
pressure ratings, flanges, hangers, and manufac-
turers name
S ucker rod and bottomhole pump details includ-
ing polish rod dimensions
Pumping unit details.
Well History:
An outline of the initial completion and a summary of
all previous workovers should be included. Any problems
previously encountered should be referenced and detailed,
particularly those which could lead to further trouble, e.g.,
lost circulation, cementing difficulties, pressure test failures,
collapsed casing, etc.
Job Procedure:
325
A detailed, step-by step procedure must be written. It can-

not be assumed that the wellsite supervisor will perform any
operation, therefore, every job to be done must be included
in the procedure.
It should begin with the statement of notification, which
details the various regulatory bodies, and the BP Canada
personnel that must be notified before any equipment is
moved on a location.
Applicable Emergency Response Plan should be referenced
and included in work plan package as required.
[See: Emergency Response Plan]
All equipment to be used (packers, profiles, etc.), should be
fully identified by manufacturers name, part number, ID,
OD, and thread connection.
All fluids to be used must be fully detailed, including all
safe handling precautions (Include MSDS), where the fluid
is to be obtained and how it is to be disposed of.
[See: TDG Regulations]
Service Companies:
If specific companies are to be used, they should be named,
and a copy of their program attached. The service to be
provided and the contact must be listed. If it is necessary to
substitute service companies during the course of the job,
the program must be discussed with a representative of the
substitute company before they arrive at the lease.
Contact List:
This should include BP Canada personnel as well as es-
sential contract personnel contacts.
Approvals:
All well workover work plans or programs must be ap-
proved according to the Department/Area policy. EUB
approval is required for critical sour wells.
Down-hole Schematic-Log Sections:
326
Down-hole drawings which show present and proposed

down-hole details must be attached. Use Form C-238.
Well Testing
Pertinent open hole and cased hole log sections must be
attached and referenced in the main body of the program,
noting which log is to be used for correlating purposes.
Material Requirements:
Any materials that are not readily available, or must be
specially manufactured, must be listed and the supplier
identified. All special handling tools must be listed.
Other Requirements:
Copies of the following documents or permits must be at-
tached to the program package where appropriate:
1. Flaring Permit
2. M
ineral Surface Lease or Landowner Contact
Sheet
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative on-
site to ensure that a work plan is developed and provided.
WELL TESTING
PURPOSE:
To provide a general guide to safe well testing operations.
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada operated well testing operations.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
E
xplosion: Improper Purging procedures, i.e.
entrained air
High Pressure
Toxic and/or Combustible fluids
327
[See: WHMIS, H2S Safety]

S tatic Electricity: All equipment rigged in must
Well Testing
be electrically bonded and grounded.

[See: Electricity]
High Noise:
[See: Noise Exposure & Hearing Conservation]
PREPARATIONS:
Well Test Program:

A work plan must be developed which meets the applicable
regulatory requirements. Procedures may be part of the well
servicing work plan, or may stand alone.
[See: Work Plan]
A work plan should address the following:

Safety Hazards and Considerations
Purpose of the test
Type of reservoir
Test Equipment required
P
otential operating difficulties and preventative
measures.
When testing wells containing H2S in excess of 5 percent,

prior approval from the EUB, if in Alberta, must be
obtained.
[See: EUB IL 91-2]
The requirements under IL 91-2 must also be addressed
when flaring wells containing 1-5% H2S and should be
followed for wells containing less than 1% H2S.
An Emergency Response Plan must be in place when test-
ing wells containing H2S in excess of 1%. Where the well
is part of an approved Emergency Response Plan for an
existing sour facility, no additional response plan is required
for testing. Otherwise a site-specific Emergency Response
328
Plan is required.
[See: Emergency Response Plan]
Well Testing
Must be held before commencing operations to discuss
testing procedures and potential hazards.
Signs:
Warning of the presence of H2S must be posted at the lease
entrance when testing wells with H2S content exceeding
10 PPM.
PROCEDURES:
The BP Canada representative in charge must be aware of
the regulatory requirements as laid out in the following:
Well Testing Minimum Guidelines for Safety Enhanced
Field Operations, available from most testing companies in
Alberta, or Alberta Occupational Health and Safety.
Equipment Spacing:
[See: Service Rig Safety]
NOTE: In British Columbia, the flare stack must be 50
meters from the separator.
All testing lines must be staked or secured
First Aid Equipment:

Must be available on-site along with means for transporta-
tion off-site.
[See: First Aid Equipment]
Testing Personnel:
A minimum of two (working) qualified test personnel are
required on-site at all times. Three (working) qualified
test personnel are required on-site at all times when the
H2S content of the well is known to be greater than 1%
329
(10,000PPM). It is the responsibility of the BP Canada

representative in charge, to assess the need for additional
Well Testing
personnel and ensure that fully trained and competent

contractor employees are used.
Well site illumination must be adequate to safely perform
any job, and must be approved for use in the hazardous
locations.
[See: Electrical Protection Regulations]
Communications:
Off lease communications and an Emergency Contact List
must be on location at all times.
Breathing:
A minimum of two self-contained breathing apparatus
must be on location at all times. If working on a sour well,
adequate breathing apparatus must be supplied for the full
crew.
Fire Protection:
A minimum of 2 30# LTK BC fire extinguishers must be
on location in accessible areas ready to use.
Purging:
System must be purged of all air with pilot out prior to
commencing operations. The use of a non-combustible
purge medium is desirable. If using a combustible purge
medium, ignition sources must be eliminated, and specifi-
cally the flare must not be lit.
[See: Purging]
Pressure Testing:
All equipment upstream of the choke should be pressure
tested to 1.2 times the maximum working pressure, or to
the wellhead pressure rating, whichever is the lesser. Once
330
the flow test has started, check the entire system for leaks.
Wireline Operations
PRECAUTIONS:
Safety standby must be utilized for tank gauging when
working with toxic fluids, or when working with fired
equipment.
[See: H2S Safety]
Sour and/or Critical Wells:
Additional safety procedures are required.
[See: OH&S Well Testing guide]
[See: BPs Completion Operations Manual]
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative
in-charge to ensure that safe well testing operations are
carried out.
The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equip-
ment and personnel meet the applicable Government
regulations, BP Canada requirements, and possess sufficient
experience to perform the work with minimal supervision.
TRAINING:
All personnel must possess valid First Aid, CPR and WH-
MIS and should have an H2S certificate. Where H2S is
expected, all personnel must possess a H2S certificate.
[See: Training]
WIRELINE OPERATIONS
PURPOSE:
To provide a general guideline for safe wireline operations.
331
APPLICATION:
Wireline Operations
All BP Canada operated wells where wireline is run for

remedial and/or maintenance requirements (i.e. dewaxing,
pressure survey, fishing, running or pulling plugs/chokes,
and opening or closing sliding sleeves).
DEFINITION:
Routine Work:
Frequently performed wireline operations (i.e. dewaxing)
on wells of similar set-up. Does not include wireline opera-
tions on sour wells.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS:
H
igh Pressure: Well pressure must be checked to
ensure that wireline equipment is rated for the
working pressure.
S tatic Electricity: The Wireline and Picker/Mast
unit must be properly bonded and grounded to
the rig and/or wellhead.
[See: Electricity]
Combustible/Toxic Fluids:
[See: H2S Safety]
PROCEDURES:
All equipment attached to the wellhead must be adequately
supported to prevent lateral movement.
Climbing on the lubricator is not allowed.
[See: Safety Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines]
Wireline Unit and Picker/Mast Unit must have wheels
chocked.
Lubricator & B.O.P.s:

At least one line-B.O.P. located between the lubricator and
wellhead must be used. B.O.P.s for sweet wells can be either
332
manually or hydraulically operated.

Lubricator and B.O.P.s must be pressure tested to the
Well Work
lesser of 1.2 times the maximum working pressure or the
wellhead pressure rating, prior to use.
Stuffing Box:
Rubber/Packing must be maintained in good condition.
At least 2 30# LTK fire extinguishers must be on-site and
ready to use.
PRECAUTIONS:
Critical Wells:
Additional safety procedures are required.
[See: Alberta Recommended Practices Volume 2]
[See: BP Completion Operations Manual]
Equipment approved for use in sour service must be used
(i.e. line, lubricator, B.O.P.s, running tools).
RESPONSIBILITIES:
It is the responsibility of the BP Representative in-charge to
ensure that safe wireline procedures are followed.
The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equip-
ment meets all applicable government regulations and BP
requirements, and all personnel are properly trained in safe
wireline procedures.
TRAINING:
(See: Training)
WELL WORK - HAND OVER BETWEEN

OPERATIONS AND WELLS TEAMS
PURPOSE:
To provide standards of safe well turnover between Opera-
tions and the Wells group.
333
APPLICATION:
All BP Canada operated wells.
Working Alone
PROCEDURE:
1) Th
ere will be a minimum of 36 hr notice (longer
if required by either Operations or the Wells
teams) between the time the program for the well
work is received in the field and the well work
operation begins. This is required to give the ap-
propriate time to plan for the required resources,
and properly co-ordinate activities between Wells
and Operations teams in the field.
2) A
ny deviation from the agreed upon time period
requires joint written approval by both Opera-
tions and Wells teams.
3) P
rior to starting work on the well bore, the Wells
team will take steps to ensure seal integrity; e.g.
no leaking of the master valves.
4) O
perations will take responsibility for the turn
over of the well bore to the Wells team. The
surface facilities downstream of the master valves
shall be fully de pressured with all process con-
nections; e.g. chemical lines; removed.
5) Th
e well bore will be locked and tagged by
the Operator until such time as it is ready to
turn over to the Wells team as per BP Canadas
Energy Isolation Golden Rule Practice.
6) S teps 2 and 3 will be documented as part of
BP Canadas Permit to Work Golden Rule
Practice.
WORKING ALONE PRACTICE
1.1 The purpose of this practice is to provide safe work
334
requirements for employees, contracted employees

and contractors working or traveling alone on Canada
Working Alone
Gas Performance Unit (CGPU) business, premises
and work sites.
1.2 This practice applies to all CGPU employees,
contracted employees and contractors performing
potentially hazardous work alone or traveling alone.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 Working Alone To work alone means to work

or travel alone at a site in circumstances when they
cannot be seen or heard by another worker, they
cannot expect a visit from another worker for some
time and when assistance is not readily available in
the event of an injury, illness or emergency.
2.2 Readily Available Three assessment factors must be
considered when determining if assistance is readily
available:
A
wareness Will other workers capable of pro-
viding assistance be aware of the workers needs?
W
illingness Is it reasonable to expect those
other workers will provide helpful assistance?
T
imeliness Will assistance be provided within a
reasonable period of time?
This assessment must consider the level of risk
associated with the circumstances of the work; for
example, type of work, location and hazards. If the
hazards the worker faces poses a high risk of injury,
readily available may mean immediately avail-
able. The availability of assistance increases as the
level of risk associated with the work increases.
2.3 Effective Means of Communication Radio, tele-

phone or other electronic communication device.
335
2.4 ffective Contact System An alternative to an ef-

E
fective means of communication that is appropriate
Working Alone
to the hazard. Examples of a contact system include

visiting the worker, scheduling check-ins with other
workers or designated persons, reporting to an office
or particular person upon completion of a task, and
visual or audible contact with other persons who can
offer assistance when needed. The frequency of the
contact is based on a hazard assessment.
2.5 A worker is not working alone if all the following

conditions are met:
A
wareness The worker can get the attention of
someone capable of providing helpful assistance
when the worker requires it; for example, by
maintaining visual contact, staying within hear-
ing range of others, being continuously moni-
tored by a remote surveillance camera, sounding
an alarm, making frequent contact with other
workers or persons throughout the work period
W
illingness Persons expected to provide
assistance must be capable and willing to do so
when required. There should be a reasonable
expectation that the persons being relied on to
provide assistance can and actually will provide
that assistance. Depending on circumstances,
those persons may need access to communica-
tion devices to trigger emergency response plans
or telephone to call Emergency Services (9-1-1)
T
imeliness The required assistance will be
provided in a reasonable period of time. What is
reasonable depends on factors such as the nature
of the illness, injury or emergency, the physical
location of the work and workers and the type
and level of risk of the work being performed
336
3.1 ach functional area manager (Operating Centre

E
Manager, Wells Manager or HSSE Manager) is ac-
Working Alone
countable for:
C
onducting a hazard assessment to identify exist-
ing or potential safety hazards in the work place
associated with working alone
D
eveloping and implementing a written pro-
cedure for checking the well-being of a worker
assigned to work alone
I mplementing safety measures to reduce the risk
to workers from the identified hazards
E
nsuring workers have an effective means of
communicating with their immediate supervisor
or other designated person in case of an emer-
gency
E
nsuring workers have an effective contact
system for checking the well-being of a worker
in the event the worker may not be able to signal
for assistance in the event of an injury or illness
while working alone; and
E
nsuring workers are trained and educated so
they can perform their work safely
3.2 e functional team lead (Area Foreman, Construc-

Th
tion Foreman, Wells Supervisor) is responsible for:
D
eveloping and implementing the site specific
working alone requirements; and
P
roviding the required training to allow workers
to perform work safely
3.3 ll workers and contractors are responsible for fol-

A
lowing the working alone procedures developed for a
specific area.
4.0 Requirements for Working Alone while

Performing Potentially Hazardous Work
337
4.1 igh risk activities such as working at heights, ener-

H
gy isolation, confined space entry, working in hazard-
Working Alone
ous atmosphere where a safety stand-by is required

(e.g. H2S), or working with hazardous equipment
such as chainsaws must never be conducted alone.
4.2 rior to commencing work, a work site hazard as-
P
sessment to identify existing hazards for employees
working alone is required.
4.3 I mplement and develop a working alone safe work
procedure that contains:
A
n effective means of communication to
provide workers with a method of signaling
their need for assistance. The effective means
of communication is not limited to verbal
communication. Common devices that meet the
intent include: telephones, cellular telephones,
satellite telephones, portable two-way radios,
personal alarms and computer-based systems
that achieve the same results. The key point is
that the communication system must permit the
worker requiring assistance to send a message or
signal to someone capable of providing assistance
to them
A
s an alternative to an effective means of com-
munication, an effective contact system that is
appropriate to the hazard can be developed. The
contact system will:
o D
efine the time interval between scheduled
checks and procedures to follow in case the
worker cannot be contacted, including provi-
sions for emergency rescue. The frequency of
contact for checking the workers well-being
must be based on a hazard assessment and
developed in consultation with the worker
assigned to work alone
o D
etermine the type of contact required
visual or verbal (e.g. call-in)
o Identify a designated person to establish
338
contact with the worker at pre-determined in-

tervals and the results of this contact recorded
Working Alone
by that person; and
o E
nsure a worker checks-in at the end of the
work shift
Examples of contact systems include:
o Visiting the work at pre-determined intervals
o Scheduling check-ins with other workers or
designated persons
o Reporting to an office or particular person
upon completion of a task; and
o Visual or audible contact with other persons
who can offer assistance when required
4.4 worker required to work alone and any person

A
assigned to check on the well-being of a worker must
be trained in the written site-specific working alone
procedure.
4.5 e procedure and system for checking a workers

Th
well-being must be reviewed at least annually. The
procedure and system must be reviewed more
frequently if there is a change in work arrangements
which could adversely affect a workers well-being or
a report that the system is not working effectively.
5.0 Requirements for Traveling Alone
5.1 People traveling alone require a traveling alone plan

that contains the following:
D
estination and schedule for arriving at the
destination
Mode of transportation to destination
Contact person for communicating travel plans;
339
and
E
stablish scheduled check-in times with contact
Working Alone
to indicate:
o When starting the journey
o Arrival at pre-determined check points if
deemed necessary
o Arrival at destination
o Changes to travel plans; and
o Procedures and response plan in case the
person traveling does not check-in at pre-
determined times or cannot be contacted
5.2 ll aspects of the journey will comply with gHSSEr

A
MS860 Vehicle Standard including training,
vehicle fit for purpose and adequate emergencies
supplies for the trip.
340
Date Revision Type/Comment Revised By: Revision Details:
Authority:
Dec 10, 2007 Minor - New Version Joanne Dezall gHSSEr Forum Moved Jewerly section
Number 1.1 under PPE, Added to
Online Controlled table of contents.
Copy Revised and Replaced Working at
Books Printed After Heights Practice to
October 1, 2007 include the boom lift
section.
Added the Eye Hazard
341
Assessment Chart
under PPE.
Updates to Ground
Disturbance and
Practice for Working
in a Combustible Gas
environment.
Revisions

Standard Safety Practices Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Standard Safety Practices Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Standard Safety

This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy

To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer

This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy

To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer

BP CANADA GAS PERFORMANCE UNIT

Standard Safety Practices Manual

Standard Safety Practices Manual

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE 1

GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS 191

SAFETY STANDBY 283

 lberta Occupational Health and Safety Act and

 ritish Columbia Occupational Health and Safety

 odes of Practice http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

 ntario Occupational Health and Safety Act and

Golden Rules of Safety/Practices (gHSSEr Docu

I nternal and External HSSE Links http://canadahsse.

 egal and Other Matrix http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

 rocess Safety Management http://psmcanada.

Confined Space Entry

2.0 Scope of Definitions

2.1 Confined Space:

2.1.1 Tanks, vessels, towers, heaters, silos, aerial

2.1.2 An excavation is considered a confined space

2.1.5 Others, such as pipe racks, utility doors,

Confined Space Entry

THIS IS A CONFINED SPACE

Class 1 No Hazard Class 1I Potential Hazard Class III Hazard Exists

A Confined Space in A Confined Space in which A Confined Space in

Class 1 No Hazard Class 1I Potential Hazard Class III Hazard Exists

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS ENTRY REQUIREMENTS ENTRY REQUIMENTS

2.2  ntry into a confined space is deemed to have

3.0 Scope of Responsibility

3.1  ach worker is responsible to recognize the hazards

3.2  e on-site BP representative in charge or designate

Confined Space Entry

3.4 The immediate supervisor or designate overseeing

3.5 The person accepting the permit (Lead Worker in

Confined Space Entry

3.7 Definition of the Confined Space Safety Standby:

3.8 The Confined Space Safety Standby is respon-

NOTE: Safety Standby personnel can not leave their as-

4.0 Scope of Training and Qualification

4.1  raining is mandatory, to ensure safety, that all

4.2  acilities are required to establish individual training

Confined Space Entry

5.0  Scope of Pre-entry Procedures

5.1 Pre Entry Cleaning

the personal responsible for the confined space

5.2 Pre-Entry Isolation and Lockout

Confined Space Entry

5.2.10 Confined spaces shall be ventilated to

5.3 Temporary Heating Devices

Confined Space Entry

5.4 Personal Protective Equipment

5.5 Emergency Rescue

5.7 Electrically Operated Equipment

5.8 Static Electricity

5.8.2 Some specific conditions that may lead to

Confined Space Entry

5.9 Unsupervised Entry Points

6.0 Scope of Forms

6.1 gHSSEr MF 34004 Pre-job Risk Assessment

lberta Occupational Health and Safety Act and

ritish Columbia Occupational Health and Safety

odes of Practice http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

ntario Occupational Health and Safety Act and

I nternal and External HSSE Links http://canadahsse.

egal and Other Matrix http://gasiso14001.bpweb.

rocess Safety Management http://psmcanada.

2.1.1 Tanks, vessels, towers, heaters, silos, aerial

2.1.2 An excavation is considered a confined space

2.1.5 Others, such as pipe racks, utility doors,

2.2 ntry into a confined space is deemed to have

3.1 ach worker is responsible to recognize the hazards

3.2 e on-site BP representative in charge or designate

3.4 The immediate supervisor or designate overseeing

3.5 The person accepting the permit (Lead Worker in

3.8 The Confined Space Safety Standby is respon-

4.1 raining is mandatory, to ensure safety, that all

4.2 acilities are required to establish individual training

5.0 Scope of Pre-entry Procedures

5.2.10 Confined spaces shall be ventilated to

5.8.2 Some specific conditions that may lead to

7.1 lberta General Safety Regulation AR 448/83 as

7.2 B.C. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation

7.3 g HSSEr MS 800- Energy Isolation (Lock Out-Tag

1.1 This practice will be used if the unexpected energiza-

1.2 This practice specifies minimum requirements for the

1.3 is practice applies to all BP Canada Gas

1.4 is practice does not apply to hot tap operations

2.1 unctional Area Manager Operating Center Man-

2.2 unctional Team Lead Area Foreman, Construc-

2.3 rea Authority the person who is on-site or as-

2.4 Authorized worker is a person who applies the

2.5 Affected worker is a person who works on equip-

2.6 Energy isolating device is a mechanical device that

2.7 Energy source is any electrical, mechanical, hy-

2.8 Personal Lock means a lock for use by an affected

2.9 Lockout means the use of a lock or locks to render

2.10 Lockbox is the control point for the key securing

2.12 Warning Tag is a numbered tag directing people

3.2 e functional team lead or designate is responsible

3.3 e Area Authority in charge or designate is respon-

3.4 e authorized worker is responsible for ensuring

3.5 e affected workers and authorized workers are

4.1 I f the unexpected energization or start-up of equip-

4.2 hen energy isolating devices must be locked

4.3 A work permit is issued by the Area Authority in

4.4 work permit is not issued until a Pre-job Task

4.5 orkers servicing, maintaining or cleaning cord-con-

4.7 Site specific procedures and controls must be

5.1 The Area Authority designates an authorized worker

5.2 A designated authorized worker will physically

5.3 Lockout of the equipment will be done with a

o The authorized worker will lockout and attach

o The number of locks on the lock box securing

5.5 Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy

5.7 Whenever locks, blinds and tags are installed, details

5.8 All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy

5.9 If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored

5.10 After ensuring that all personnel are clear, the

5.11 At the beginning of each shift change, the Area

6.0 Specific Procedures Color Identified

6.1 ach affected worker must install a personal lock

6.2 nly the affected worker who installed the lock

6.3 ach trade will use a different color-coded lock and

7.0 Specific Procedures Group Lockout

7.1 Areas may elect to use a group lockout where a num-

7.2 An authorized worker competent in the isolation of

7.3 e energy isolation must be verified by two autho-

7.4 e lockbox will contain as many keyed-alike locks

7.5 ach affected worker working on the locked out

7.7 hen all affected workers personal locks are

8.1 I dentify energy source(s) to be isolated electrical,

8.2 I dentify system and isolation points to be isolated.